HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 6104A - Contract - David Wood Construction Inc.- Fire Administration Complex - 11/12/1998�6oluft�n
d/Origoo
.2nd C+�n�i {1a��'
Novcmhce, /2,1448
r4
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
3.5 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
900-9330
A. Lay and maintain all pipe to lines and grades shown on drawings or as established on
ground by Engineer.
B. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line eir in a vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions, to plumb valves, or where vertical or horizontal curves are
shown or permitted, degree of deflection at each joint shall not exceed maximum deflection
recommended by manufacturer of particular type of pipe being laid and degree of deflection
shall be approved by Engineer.
3.6 LAYING AND JOINTING PVC PIPE
A. Obtain approval of trench and grading prior to installation of pipe and accessories.
B. Handle and install PVC pipe in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Lower all pipe, fittings, and valves into trench piece by piece by means of derricks, ropes,
or or suitable tools or equipment, in a manner to prevent damage to material.
D. Do not drop or dump pipe nor accessories into trench.
E. Clean ring groove before installation of rubber ring.
F. Install ring in groove as recommended by manufacturer.
G. Wipe spigot end of pipe clean and lubricate using manufacturer's recommended lubricant.
H. In a manner to prevent damage to ring, insert spigot end into bell end until reference mark
on spigot end is flush with end of bell.
I. When pipe laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by approved means, to prevent
entrance of contamination, trench water and soil.
3.7 LAYING AND JOINTING DUCTILE IRON PIPE
A. Mechanical Joint Piping
1.
Clean last 8 in. outside of spigot and inside of bell of to remove oil, grit, excess
coating, and or foreign matter from joint.
2.
Paint cleaned area with lubricant recommended by pipe manufacturer.
3.
Slip cast-iron gland on spigot end of pipe with lip extension of gland toward socket or
bell end.
4.
Paint rubber gasket with lubricant recommended by pipe manufacturer and placed on
spigot end with thick edge toward gland.
5.
Push entire section of pipe forward to seat spigot end in bell and press gasket into
place within bell taking care to locate gasket evenly around entire joint.
k '
6.
Position gland for bolting, insert all bolts and nuts and tighten with suitable
torque -limiting wrench.
7.
Tighten nuts spaced 180 deg. apart alternately in order to produce an equal pressure
on all parts of gland.
B. Flanged Joints
1.
Properly align pipe and fittings free to move in any direction while bolting.
2.
Gradually tighten bolts at a uniform rate around entire flange.
C. Flexible Couplings and Flanged Coupling Adapters
1.
Provide flanged coupling adapters and flexible couplings at locations shown on
low
drawings and at or locations required for installation of piping system.
2.
Provide flanged coupling adapters with anchoring studs to provide thrust restraint.
i
D. Push
-On -Joint Installation
1.
Thoroughly clean inside of bell and outside of spigot end to remove oil, grit, excess
01N
coating, and or foreign matter.
2.
Flex circular rubber gasket inward and insert in gasket recess of bell socket.
3.
Apply a thin film of manufacturer's recommended gasket lubricant to eir inside
�+
Nh
surface of gasket or spigot end of pipe or both.
0.3860396/98
WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665-5
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
4.
Insert spigot end of pipe into socket in a manner to prevent damage to gasket and
prevent joint from contacting ground.
5.
Complete joint by forcing plain end to bottom of socket with a forked tool or jack -type
tool or or device.
6.
Mark pipe not furnished with a depth mark before assembly to assure that spigot end
is inserted to full depth of joint.
7.
File or grind field -cut pipe lengths to resemble manufactured spigot end of pipe.
8.
When pipe laying is not in progress, close open ends of pipe by approved means, to
prevent entrance of contamination, trench water and soil.
9.
Complete jointing for all pipe laid each day, in order not to leave open joints in trench
overnight.
10.
If water gets in trench before joint is completed, or if pipe is disturbed from line and
grade after being laid, remove pipe, clean joints and relay pipe.
11.
Make premoulded joints in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer of
pipe.
12.
Wipe surfaces of jointing material on both bell and spigot at each joint with solvent
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
13.
Firmly force spigot into bell using a bar or or similar lever and a block of wood to
prevent damage to pipe.
3.8 SETTING
VALVES, VALVE BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish valve boxes and extension stems on buried valves where top of operating nut is
more than 36 -inches below finished grade.
B. Top of Extension Stem: Not more than 9 -inches below top of valve box.
C. Set valves and fittings at locations shown on plans or at locations as established by ,.
Engineer.
D. Set and joint to pipe in manner specified for pipe installations.
E. Provide a cast iron valve box set over valve for all valves buried in ground.
F. Provide concrete blocking for all buried valves and fittings.
G. Firmly support valve boxes and maintain centered and plumb over wrench nut of valve,
with box cover flush with surface of ground or at such level as directed and encased with
concrete as indicated on drawings.
3.9 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Install Owner furnished fire hydrants at locations indicated on drawings, plumb, to grade
indicated on drawings, with steamer nozzle at right angles to street and in accordnace with
specified requirements.
B. Support fire hydrants in a manner not of cause strain on fire hydrant lead or branch. _
C. Brace bowl of of hydrant against unexcavated soil at end of trench and back with concrete.
D. Place concrete to allow access to joints and flanges and to prevent interference with
hydrant drain.
E. Block gate valves on fire hydrant leads with concrete as indicated'on drawings.
3.10 PLUGGING DEAD ENDS
A. Insert standard plugs into bells of all dead ends
B. Cap pipes, tees, or crosses and spigot ends.
C. Join plugs or caps to pipe or fittings in same manner used in jointing pipe.
D. Provide all plugs and caps with horizontal thrust blocks.
03860396/98 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665-6
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
3.11 MARKING TAPE
900-9330
A. Identify all pipes installed in an open trench with appropriate color and description of 3"
wide pipe identification tape.
B. Install tape parallel to pipe it identifies at a distance above pipe of 12 to 18 inches.
C. Install a tape, detectable from top of finished grade with a metal detector, above non-
metallic (PVC) pipe material.
3.12 BACKFILLING
A. Immediately after completion of jointing, place sufficient bedding and backfill material
around and over pipe to hold pipe to line and grade.
B. Backfilling Under Pipe, Non -water Packed
1. Backfill all pipe by hand from bottom of trench to centerline of pipe with selected
backfill material free from rocks or boulders greater than 2 inches in size or or
unsuitable material.
2. Place material in 3 -inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compact under
and on each side of pipe.
3. Deposit backfill material in trench for its full width on each side of pipe, fitting, and
appurtenances simultaneously.
C. Backfilling Over Pipe, Non -water Packed
1. From centerline of pipe to a depth of 1 foot above top of pipe, backfill trench by hand
or by approved mechanical methods using materials free from rocks or boulders
greater than 2 inches in size.
2. Moisten material and place in lifts not exceeding 6 -inches in thickness and compact
by tamping to a density of not less than 90% of maximum density at optimum
moisture as determined by ASTM D698.
3. Use special care in placing this portion of backfill to insure placement under and
around pipe and to avoid injuring or moving pipe.
D. Backfilling Under and Over Pipe, Water Packed
1. Backfill all pipe by hand from bottom of trench to a point approximately 12 inches to
16 inches above top of pipe using material free from rocks or boulders greater than 2
inches in size.
2. Carefully place material under haunches of pipe, fully backfill between sides of pipe
and trench wall, and across entire width of trench once backfill depth has exceeded
top of pipe.
3. Hand compact as required to assure that all spaces are uniformly filled.
4. When backfill has reached a point 12 inches to 16 inches above top of pipe, fill entire
trench with water to natural ground level.
5. Allow water to percolate through backfill that has been placed until all of water has
drained away.
6. Allow backfill to dry until it will support weight of a person without settlement and
tamp backfill to grade.
E. Backfilling to Grade
1. From 1 foot above top of pipe to finish grade, install backfill and tamp.
2. Place material in 6 -inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted
with mechanical tampers from bottom of trench to finish grade to a density of at least
90% of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698.
F. Anchorage of Bends, Tees and Plugs, Etc.
1. Apply reaction or thrust backing to all pipe lines at all tees, plugs, caps, and bends.
2. Back pipe and fittings with concrete conforming to concrete specifications as set
forth in Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete, except a minimum compressive
strength of 2500 psi will be acceptable.
r
03860396/98 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665-7
Iv
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
3. Place backing between solid ground and fittings to be anchored; area of bearing on
pipe and on ground in each instance shall be sufficient to withstand maximum thrust
anticipated and as required by Engineer.
4. Place backing so that pipe and fitting joints will be accessible for repair.
5. Round backfill up over trench sufficiently to allow for future settlement.
6. Remove all excess dirt from site.
3.13 LINE TESTING
A. After pipe is laid and joints completed, hydrostatically test each section or run of piping.
B. Provide suitable means for filling lines and developing required pressure in lines.
C. Test piping system in accordance with following procedure:
1. Duration: Minimum of four (4) hours.
2. Pressure: Minimum of 100%, but not greater than 120% of pipe pressure class of
pipe at lowest point in test section, and minimum of 85% of pipe pressure class of
pipe at highest point in test section.
3. Allowable Leakage: Maximum allowable leakage for push -on joints in ductile iron pipe
is number of gallons per hour as determined by following formula:
L SD P
_
133,200
where:
L = Allowable leakage in gallons/per hour
S = Length of pipe tested
D = Nominal diameter of pipe in inches
P = Average of max. and min. pressures within test section in psi
4. Maximum allowable leakage for PVC pipe is number of gallons per hour as
determined by following formula:
L=ADO
7,400
where:
L = Allowable leakage in gallons/per hour
N = Number of joints in length of pipe tested
D = Nominal diameter of pipe in inches
P = Average of max. and min. pressures within test section in psi
D. Repair all leaks which become evident prior to final acceptance of project and repaired to
satisfaction of Engineer even though particular line has been previously accepted and
tested.
03860396/98 . WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS
02665-8
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
3.14 DISINFECTION OF PIPE LINES
A. Disinfect piping system before placing in service by application of a chlorinating agent in
accordance with requirements of AWWA C651.
B. After disinfection has been completed, and before pipeline is filled with municipal water,
sample water in pipe for bacteriological testing.
C. Take a second sample 48 hours later, also for bacteriological testing.
D. If acceptable bacteriological test results are not received, disinfect pipe again and provide
whatever measures are necessary to achieve an acceptable result.
3.15 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Maintain trench surfaces in a satisfactory manner until final completion and acceptance of
work including blading from time to time as necessary, filling depressions caused by
settlement, and or work required to keep all areas in a presentable condition.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665-9
i
c
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 02830
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply
to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Chain link fencing and accessories.
B. Fence gates and related hardware.
C. Gate operator.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Electric power for gate operators: Division 16.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 90-81(91) -- Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated
(Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles; 1981 (Reapproved 1991).
B. ASTM A 392-91 b -- Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric;
1991.
C. ASTM F 567-93 -- Standard Practice for Installation of Chain -Link Fence; 1993.
D. ASTM F 669-92 -- Standard Specification for Strength Requirements of Metal Posts and
Rails for Industrial Chain Link Fence; 1992.
E. ASTM F 900-94 -- Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates; 1994.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: .
1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Indicate post sizes and thicknesses, protective coatings,
fabric characteristics, and accessories.
2. Manufacturer's technical data, catalog cuts, specifications, and installation
instructions for gate operator and keypad.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Showing location of fences, gates, posts and details of installation of hardware and
accessories. Location of gate operator and keypad are critical and are to be approved
by the Owner.
1.6 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Gates and Operators:
1. Complete and detailed operations and maintenance data for each component,
including diagrams and part numbers for ordering spare or repair parts.
Poll
f
03860396/98 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02830-1
E
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..
r-
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Galvanized steel fencing:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit.
b. American Security Fence Corporation.
C. Anchor Fence, Inc.
d. Boundary Fence & Railing Systems, Inc.
2.2 FENCING ACCESSORIES
A. Material and finish of accessories shall match fence fabric, except as noted.
2.3 FENCE
A. Fence Configuration:
1. Fence shall be constructed with:
a. Barbed wire top, 3 strands, inclined arm.
b. Top rail. �.
C. Brace rails at each terminal post.
d. Bottom tension wire.
B. , Fabric:
1. Material: Zinc -coated steel, ASTM A 392.
2. Zinc coating weight: 1.2 ounces per square foot.
3. Wire diameter: 0.148 inch (9 gage).
4. Mesh size: 2 inches.
5. Fabric width: 72 inches. _
C. Fence Framework: -
1. Zinc coating of steel pipe (ASTM A 90): ...
a. Interior and exterior coating: Hot -dip zinc -coated; weight of coating, 1.8
ounces per square foot of coated area, average.
2. Zinc coating of steel shapes (ASTM A 90): _
a. Hot -dip zinc -coated; weight of coating, 1.8 ounces per square foot.
3. Material: Except where specific requirements are indicated on the drawings, the
contractor may select any framework material listed below.
4. Material: Conform to ASTM F 669, Light Industrial category.
a. Group IA: Steel pipe.
1. Rail size: 1.660 inches outside diameter by 0.112 inch wall thickness,
1.82 pounds per foot.
2. Line post size: 2.375 inches outside diameter by 0.123 inch wall
thickness, 2.96 pounds per foot.
3. Terminal post size: 2.875 inches outside diameter by 0.162 inch wall
thickness, 4.69 pounds per foot. y
b. Group I -C: Steel pipe, commercial standard, yield strength 50,000 psi.
1. Rail size: 1.660 inches outside diameter by 0.083 inch wall thickness, -`
1.40 pounds per foot. �^
2. Line post size: 2.375 inches outside diameter by 0.095 inch wall
thickness, 2.31 pounds per foot.
03860396/98 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02830-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3. Terminal post size: 2.875 inches outside diameter by 0.110 inch wall
thickness, 3.25 pounds per foot.
C. Group II: Roll -formed steel sections, commercial standard, yield strength
50,000 psi (see ASTM F 669).
D. Gate Type 1 :
1. Construct gate (and gateposts) according to manufacturer's standard heavy-duty
design.
a. Type: Single rolling.
b. Frame: Round tubular steel.
C. Zinc coating of steel (ASTM A 90): Interior and exterior coating, 1.8 ounces
per square foot of coated area.
2. Provide gate operator as described below.
E. Gate Type 2
a 1. Comply with ASTM F 900.
a. Type: Single swing.
b. Frame: Round tubular steel.
C. Zinc coating of steel (ASTM A 90): Interior and exterior coating, 1.8 ounces
per square foot of coated area.
2. Provide gate hardware, including keeper for each leaf.
F. Gate Operator
1. General: Manufacturer's standard design and construction, suitable for gates
specified. Select operator size and features according to manufacturer's published
data, taking into consideration size, type, weight, and construction of gate, as well
as Project conditions and specified requirements.
2. Type: Electric motor with enclosed gear reducer and chain drive.
3. Speed: Minimum 45 feet per minute.
4. Features: Continuous duty without overloading or overheating. Rated by
manufacturer at 30 or more complete cycles per hour. All components UL approved.
Furnish disconnect switch with NEMA KS 1; Type 3R enclosure.
a. Provide equipment with suitable electrical characteristics including phase,
voltage, branch circuit wire size, overcurrent .protection, and connection
devices coordinated with Division 16.
b. Self-locking.
c. Weather -resistant steel enclosure protecting all operating parts.
d. Automatic reversing upon obstruction during closing cycle and automatic stop
upon obstruction during opening cycle.
5. Controls: Electric and electronic programmable controls separated from motor and
drive mechanism, sealed from water and insects, with space for additional optional
c= equipment. Provide adjustable automatic closing timer and the following remote
control device:
a. Keypad control allowing access by typing in numeric codes. Should allow
virtually unlimited number of codes.
b. Photo -cell to keep fence from closing as long as an obstruction is present.
k
C. Push-button inside fenced area, to permit exiting. Shield button from long -
reach defeat efforts from outside the fenced area.
d. Provide a manual overide switch to hold the gate open on demand. Locate
F
switch in secure area on motor housing.
p.
I
03860396198
f
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
02830-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 POST INSTALLATION
A. Layout:
1. Space line posts at equidistant intervals not exceeding 10 feet on center measured
parallel to grade.
2. Locate terminal posts at the beginning and end of each continuous length of fence,
at abrupt changes in line or grade, additionally at intervals not to exceed 500 feet,
and as otherwise shown on the drawings.
3. Install posts plumb and in proper alignment.
i
3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Install posts, braces, fabric, and other components in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and to meet or exceed requirements of ASTM F 567.
3.3 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure.
B. Gates shall operate freely without binding or dragging and shall be easily operable by hand.
3.4 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION
A. Install gate operators according to manufacturer's instructions. Adjust for smooth, trouble-
free operation.
B. Advise and consult with the Architect to obtain the Owner's requirements for standard
available programmable features or adjustable controls (such as time delays, interlocks, or
safety devices), and make necessary adjustments.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Gates and Gate Operators: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to
3 days' use by normal traffic, readjust gates and gate operators and controls for optimum
operating condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of gate operators.
END OF SECTION 02830
03860396/98 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02830-4
t
t FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 03300
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes, but is not limited to cast -in place concrete, including formwork,
reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, curing, and finishes.
B. Cast -in-place concrete includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Foundations and footings.
2. Slabs -on -grade.
3. Fill for steel deck.
4. Equipment pads and bases.
5. Fill for steel pan stairs.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Drilled Piers" for Drilled pier construction
2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for steel deck construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, curing compounds, dry -
shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, materials, steel grades, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement and
methods of support. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete
structures.
D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications,
and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete
for Buildings."
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
4. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 305R, "Hot Weather Concreting."
5. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 306R, "Cold Weather Concreting."
6. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 306.1, "Standard Specification for Cold
Weather Concreting."
,. 03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during
progress of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work,
shall be done at Contractor's expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood faced, or
other acceptable panel -type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to --
conform to joint system shown on drawings.
B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, earth, or another
acceptable material.. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for
tight fit.
C. Carton Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture -resistance,
structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed
loads.
D. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a
maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain,
or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of ---
concrete surfaces.
E. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties
designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal.
Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the
exposed concrete surface.
1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in
diameter in the concrete surface.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60, deformed.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire
bar -type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where
base material will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact
with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class
1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).
3. Space reinforcing supports at 5'-0" maximum in any direction.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type L
1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C.
C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Fiber Reinforcement.
03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
F. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1
percent chloride ions.
G. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other required admixtures.
H. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
J. Water -Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
K. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
j,.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch thick
with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent
intrusion of concrete or debris.
Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand with plasticity index of 8 or less.
Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell - type or centerbulb - type waterstops at
construction joints and other joints as indicated.
Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested
according to ASTM E 154, as follows:
1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick.
Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Liquid -type membrane -forming curing
compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A. Moisture loss not more than
0.55 kg/sq. m when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. A -H 3 Way Sealer, Anti -Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Spartan -Cote, The Burke Co.
C. Conspec #1, Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.
d. Sealco 309, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
e. Day -Chem Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
f. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co.
g. Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc.
h. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc.
j. CS -309, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
k. Seal N Kure, Metalcrete Industries.
I. Kure -N -Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
M. Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc.
Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or
damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co.
b. Spec -Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
C. Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior.
d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Horn, Inc.
f. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
g. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc.
h. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
i. Metco Hi -Mod Epoxy, Metalcrete Industries.
j. Sikedur 32 Hi -Mod, Sika Corp.
k. Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc.
I. R-600 Series, Symons Corp.
•: 03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method,
use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs.
1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
2. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight.
B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at
least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed
mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.
C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as
indicated on drawings and schedules: --
1. 3000 psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of
placement as follows:
1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 4 inches.
2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 4
inches.
3. Concrete containing high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not
more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site -verified 2 - 3 inch slump
concrete.
4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches. n
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by
Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for
revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by
Architect before using in Work.
F. Fiber Reinforcement: Add at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 2.0
lb/cu. yd.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer)
in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50
deg F.
C. Use air -entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. _
Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2
percent within the following limits:
1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer
chemicals, or hydraulic pressure: .—
a. 5.0 percent for 3/4 inch maximum aggregate.
2. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to
receive a surface hardener: 2 to 4 percent air.
D. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict
compliance with manufacturer's directions.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 w..
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1 /2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above
90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder, and other related materials
with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. Before concrete placement operations
begin, the substrate shall be fully prepared. Contractor shall be responsible for
verifying that all work which will be embedded is complete and necessary inspections
have been performed. Pour stops or bulkheads shall be in place and reinforcement shall
be secured in proper location.
3.2 FORMS
A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can
support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of
correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction
tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits:
1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate
alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for
openings, offsets, linkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets,
chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features
required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt
joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to
place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,
reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal.
D. Provide temporary openings for clean -outs and inspections where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace
temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate
temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber
chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate
work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases
from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built
into forms.
G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive
concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing
concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent
mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
3.3 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. General: Place vapor retarder sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with
direction of pour.
03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
• 31*Ef
B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure -
sensitive tape.
1. Cover vapor retarder with sand cushion and compact to depth indicated.
3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and
supports and as specified.
1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement
and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. ^"
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that
reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate
and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as
approved by Architect.
D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete
protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold
reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends
are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at
least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to
prevent continuous laps in either direction.
F. Do not weld reinforcing bars unless specifically shown. Where shown on the plans,
comply with AWS D1.4. Bars to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706.
3.5 JOINTS
r
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair
strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide keyways at least 1-1 /2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and
between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may
be used for slabs.
C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement .—
across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue
reinforcement through sides of strip placements.
D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh
concrete.
E. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops
to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops
during progress of work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's printed instructions.
F. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs -on -grade at points
of contact between slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, ._
foundation walls, grade beams, and other. locations, as indicated.
G. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs -on -
grade to form panels of patterns as shown.
3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items
required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items
to be attached.
B. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated on drawings.
03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 103300-6 V_
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs
to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure
units to support screed strips using strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds.
3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC,
form -coating compound before placing reinforcement.
B. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact
with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply
according to manufacturer's instructions.
1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust -preventative material. Rust -stained
steel formwork is not acceptable.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installation of their work.
B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete," and as specified.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will
be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as
specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper
than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement
consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid
cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand -spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside .forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible
effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer
and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower
layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of
vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or
section.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull
floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb
slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect
concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,
freezing actions, or low temperatures.
G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not
less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
,.. 03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
H. Hot -Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality
and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement to below 90 deg F. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may
be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to
total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that
steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding in concrete. ...
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
4. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.
I. Water may be added to the concrete at the project site, subject to the following
conditions:
1. Truck tickets indicate maximum amount of water that can be added without
exceeding the maximum specified water/cement ratio.
2. Water is added in a manner to control volume.
3. Concrete is properly re -mixed after addition of water. .-..
4. Inspector is notified, if concrete placement requires inspection.
5. Site added water should be done prior to taking concrete samples for testing.
3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough -Formed Finish: Provide a rough -formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not
exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the
concrete surface having texture imparted by form -facing material used, with tie holes
and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4
inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. _.
B. Smooth -Formed Finish: Provide a smooth -formed finish on formed concrete surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete,
or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing,
dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as -cast
concrete surface obtained with selected form' facing material, arranged in an orderly
and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas
with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.
C. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth -rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces
that have received smooth -formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form
removal.
1.. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive
until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other
than that created by the rubbing process.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed
surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 --
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete
floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded
applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated.
1. After placing slabs, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and F(L)
13 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Slope surfaces
uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final
set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo; and where indicated.
1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface
until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only,
when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently
to permit operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with
power -driven floats or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power
units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor
levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155 . Cut down high spots and fill
low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains.. Immediately after leveling, refloat
surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and
slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint,
or another thin film -finish coating system.
1. After floating, begin first trowel -finish operation using a power -driven trowel.
Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved
over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation,
free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to
tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured
according to ASTM E 1155 . Grind smooth any surface defects that would
telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where -ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin -
set mortar, apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly
scarifying the surface with a fine broom.
E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms,
steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming
with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required
final finish with Architect before application.
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. . Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by
other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place.
Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide
other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.
B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to
template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer
furnishing machines and equipment.
3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture
03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-controlmaterial. Apply
according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before
power floating and troweling.
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after
placing and finishing.
C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, and moisture -retaining cover
curing.
D. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and
curbs as follows:
1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are
complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply '—
uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3
hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage
during curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered
with finish materials applied directly to concrete.
E. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.
1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture -retaining
cover, unless otherwise directed.
3.13 REMOVING FORMS
A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls,
columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at
not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is
sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form -removal operations, and provided curing
and protection operations are maintained.
3.14 REUSING FORMS
A. Clean and repair, surfaces of forms to be reused in the -Work. Split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for
exposed surfaces. Apply new form -coating compound as specified for new formwork.
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean
surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure
joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except
as acceptable to Architect.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A
B.
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar
immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.
Mix dry -pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine
aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for
handling and placing.
1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and
holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth
less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat the area to be patched
with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color
03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 103300-10
r
i FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off
i
slightly higher than surrounding surface.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces
�.., if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color
{ and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and
other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be
removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry -pack mortar or precast
cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect
the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
a D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for
smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct
.. low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness
of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope.
` 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's
durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced
sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and
other objectionable conditions.
C ' 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at
least 14 days. -
4
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing
surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary
underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1
j inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove
defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least
3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with
f ' patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same
` materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place,
compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same
,.. manner as adjacent concrete.
E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry -pack
method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust,
dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding
r-
compound. Place dry -pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry -pack mixture
in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist
for at least 72 hours.
'^ F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure,
using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the
following, as directed by Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C 94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour
of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency
seems to have changed.
r-. 03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal
weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight
concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete.
C. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air
temperature is 40 deg F and below, when 80 deg F and above, and one
test for each set of compressive -strength specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard
cylinders for each compressive -strength test, unless otherwise directed.
Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens except when
field -cured test specimens are required.
e. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour
exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the
first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one
specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one
specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests fora given
class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches
or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
4. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of
three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
B. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready -mix
producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength
tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete
placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of
concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both
7 -day tests and 28 -day tests.
C. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete
when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have
not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may
conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
D. Questionable Concrete
1. Concrete shall be considered "Questionable Concrete" where any of the
following test evaluations occur:
a. Individual test strength is below specified strength; or
b. Samples of concrete for acceptance test cylinders are not representative
of concrete in-place in the structure; or
C. Insufficient number of acceptance test cylinders for day's concreting were
made for testing.
2. Except where core tests will impair the strength of the structure, core test as
directed by the Architect shall be made at no cost to the Owner to resolve
Questionable Concrete. If core tests fail to demonstrate the test strength
required by the contract documents or structural analysis does not confirm the
adequacy of the structure, the Architect may, at his discretion, recommend
rejection of the work to the Owner or require load tests or additional
construction. Should structural analysis confirm the adequacy of the structure,
the Architect may, at his discretion, make a recommendation to the Owner that
the concrete be accepted with credit for the full value of the concrete delivered
to the site in accordance with the General Conditions.
03860396/98 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE r 03300 - 12
Ij
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
03860396/98
3. The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in providing the additional testing or
analysis to resolve the acceptability of Questionable Concrete.
4. Core Tests
a. Three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of
concrete for each test considered questionable. Location of cores shall be
as directed by the Architect to least impair to the strength of the
structure. Damaged cores shall be replaced.
b. Cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM C42 except
that if concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions the
cores shall be air dried (temperature 60 degrees F. to 80 degrees F., and
relative humidity less than 60%) for 7 days before test and shall be tested
dry. If the concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet
under service conditions, the cores shall be immersed in water for at least
48 hours and tested wet.
C. Questionable concrete will be considered structurally acceptable if the
average of the cores is equal to or greater than 90% of the specified
strength and no single core is greater than 500 psi below specified
strength.
END OF SECTION 03300
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-13
4
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
B. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units.
C. Face Brick.
D. Mortar.
E. Grout for masonry.
F. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing laboratory services.
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels, and fabricated steel items.
C. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Firestopping at penetrations of masonry work.
D. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Cap flashings over masonry work and placement of
flashing receivers.
E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints.
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
ASTM A82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM All 23 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
ASTM A525 Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
ASTM A580 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Wire.
ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A641 - Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
ASTM 8370 Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.
ASTM C55 - Concrete Building Brick.
ASTM C56 - Structural Clay Non -Load Bearing Tile.
ASTM C90 - Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement.
ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete.
ASTM C129 - Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
ASTM C199 - Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortar.
ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete.
ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
,-, 03860396/98 UNIT MASONRY
04200-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
X. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry.
Y. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
Z. ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. .-
AA. ASTM C1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength.
BB. ASTM E447 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
CC. ASTM E518 - Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry.
DD. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices
and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
EE. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices
and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction.
FF. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and
cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and
accessories.
B. Product Data
1. Provide data for decorative and fire rated masonry units and fabricated wire
reinforcement.
2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, positioning
of reinforcement and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
3. Include design mix complying with the Property specification of ASTM C270,
required environmental conditions and admixture limitations.
C. Samples
1. Samples: Submit three samples of each type of decorative block and face brick
units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range.
2. Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.
D. Reports
1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance to property requirements of
ASTM C270 and component mortar materials to requirements of ASTM C270 and
test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780. ...
2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to
requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation, reports to ASTM C1019.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE _
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to UL Assembly No.: 4906 requirements for fire rated masonry construction
using masonry thicknesses indicated on the drawings. '-
1.9 MOCKUP
A. Provide mockup of composite masonry under provisions of Section 01410.
03860396/98 UNIT MASONRY 04200-2
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
B. Construct a masonry wall into a panel sized 6 feet long by 4 feet high, which includes
mortar and accessories, structural backup, wall openings, flashings, weeps and water
repellent coating specified in Section 07181 and joint sealant specified in Section
07900.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.
1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of
Section 01039.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Accept decorative units on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and
foreign matter.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to
minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to
maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
1.13 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of window and door frames and other
items indicated to be built-in.
PART 2 GENERAL
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Concrete and Decorative Concrete Masonry Units
1.
Featherlite Block Co.
B. Portland Cement and Lime
1.
Essroc Materials, Inc.
2.
Glen -Gert' Corporation.
3.
Lafarge Corporation.
4.
Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
5.
Riverton Corporation (The).
C. Mortar Pigments
1.
Davis Colors.
2.
Lafarge Corporation.
3.
Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc.
D. Joint
Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors
1.
Dur -O -Wal, Inc.
2.
Heckman Building Products, Inc.
3.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
4.
Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
5.
National Wire Products Industries.
i� 03860396198 UNIT MASONRY 04200-3
f'
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
6. Southern Construction Products.
E. Admixtures
1. Integral CMU Water Repellent
a. W.R. Grace & Co.
2. Cold -Weather Admixture
a. Euclid Chemical Co.
b. W.R. Grace & Co.
3. Mortar Water -Repellent Admixture
a. W.R. Grace & Co.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I - Moisture Controlled
medium weight, with integral waterrepellent admixture.
B. Solid Load -Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I Moisture Controlled
medium weight, with integral waterrepellent admixture.
C. Hollow Non -Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C129, Type I - Moisture Controlled
medium weight, with integral waterrepellent admixture.
D. Decorative Block Units
1. Conformance: ASTM C90, TypeI - Moisture Controlled medium weight, with
integral waterrepellent admixture.
2. Size and Shape: Nominal size of 8x8x16 inches and 8x12x16 as indicated on the
drawings.
3. Surface Finish
a. Type I - Single scored vertically, ground face.
b. Type II - Ground face.
C. Type III - Single scored vertically, ground face.:
d. Type IV - Molded concrete masonry units: Standard gray.
E. Colors: As selected by Architect.
F. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels, and bullnosed corners.
T
2.3 BRICK UNITS
A. Face Brick
1. Conformance: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW.
2. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 2-11/4x3-5/80-5/8 inches.
3. Color: As selected by Architect.
4. Surface Finish: Velour or Cut and Rollback as selected by Architect.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM
A641 Class 1 after fabrication, 3/16 inch side rods with 3/16 inch cross rods. Fabricate
with integral double eyes where masonry veneer is scheduled.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Specified in Section 03300; Pintle length as required to set in from
face of veneer.
C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish.
D. Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 x 8 inch 16 gage thick, hot dip
galvanized to ASTM All 23 B2 steel finish.
E. Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 9 gage thick, pintle type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM
All 23 B2 steel finish. 3/4 to 1 inch.
03860396/98 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 •—
i
1 FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I gray at dark color masonry and white at light
�... color masonry or as otherwise selected by architect.
B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
E. Water: Clean and potable.
F. Bonding Agent: Latex.
G. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment color as selected by Architect.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Water Repellent: Liquid type; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture.
B. Accelerator: Acceiguard 80 or MORSET.
C. Retardant: Liquid type, equal to Martard-E..
2.7 FLASHINGS
A. Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: 2 oz/sq ft sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt
treated Kraft paper.
B. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900.
C. Preformed Control Joints: Neoprene material. Provide with corner and tee accessories,
cement fused joints.
D. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyurethane; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self
expanding. Provided in maximum lengths available.
E. Building Paper: No. 30 asphalt saturated felt.
F. Weeps: Cotton rope.
G. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property
specification.
B. Mortar For Non -Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the
Property specification.
C. Mortar For Engineered Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property specification.
D. Mortar For Masonry Veneer on Metal Studs: ASTM C270, Type N using the property
specification.
2.9 GROUT MIXES
A. Bond Beams and lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inch slump; premixed type
in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inch slump; premixed type
in accordance with ASTM C94.
2.10 GROUT MIXING
A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94.
t~ B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
03860396/98 UNIT MASONRY 04200-5
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.11 MIX TESTS
A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 01410.
B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780 for compressive strength,
consistency, mortar aggregate ratio, water content, and splitting tensile strength.
C. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength, and
slump.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing.
C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.
D. Plug clean-out holes with block masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mortar Mixing
1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities
needed for immediate use.
2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
3. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.
4. Provide waterrepellent admixture in mortar for all exterior exposed masonry.
5. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
6. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing.
7. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or
two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F.
B. Coursing
1. General
a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal
joints of uniform thickness.
2. Concrete Masonry Units:
a. Bond: Running.
b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
C. Mortar Joints: Concave.
3. Brick Units:
a. Bond: Running.
b. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.
a. Mortar Joints: Concave.
03860396/98 UNIT MASONRY 04200-6
rr
I FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r
4. Decorative Masonry Units:
a. Bond: Running.
b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
C. Mortar Joints: Raked.
C. Placing and Bonding
1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed
with other work.
2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
5. Interlock external corners.
6. Separate intersecting walls with 3/8 inch thick joint material with removable edges
for sealing after installation.
7. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where
adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.
8. Perfojm job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,
unshipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
9. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, and resilient base is scheduled.
10. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control
joint.
11. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and
slabs or decks with compressible joint filler.
D. Weeps
1. Install weeps in veneer at 32 inches oc horizontally above through -wall flashing, shelf
angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
E. Cavity Wall
1. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps.
F. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry
1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches o.c..
2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and
below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first joint below top of walls.
4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
5. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 o.c.
3.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER
A. Embed wall ties in masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches o.c. vertically
and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches o.c. each way around
perimeter of openings, and within 12 inches of openings.
B. Secure wall ties to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16
inches oc vertically and 36 inches oc horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc each way
around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings.
C. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections and soldier course headers and
accent bands with strap anchors 16 inches oc.
3.5 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. Extend flashings horizontally under window sills, above ledge or shelf angles and lintels,
under parapet caps, at bottom of walls.
B. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint
sheathing over steel stud back-up.
C. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
D. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions.
x
03860396/98 UNIT MASONRY
I'
of masonry and seal to
04200-7
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.6 LINTELS
A. Install loose steel lintels over openings.
B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels ...
are not scheduled.
C. All masonry lintels to attain .specified strength before removing temporary supports.
D. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
3.7 . MORTAR
A. Install mortar in accordance with premix mortar manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C270.
3.8 GROUT
A. Install grout in accordance with ASTM C476.
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding.
D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
F. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
G. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 112 inch
of dimensioned position.
H. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of
opening.
3.9 ENGINEERED MASONRY
A. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned clear of mortar and unobstructed.
B. Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 1 /4 inch from edge of unit grout spaces, bevel
back and upward. Permit mortar to cure 7 days before placing grout.
C. Reinforce masonry unit cores with reinforcement bars and grout.
D. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not
exceeding 192 bar diameters. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 03300.
E. Do not wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout prior to grout placement.
F. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques.
Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with course grout using high or low lift grouting
techniques.
G. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1-1/2 inch below top
of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement.
H. Low Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout to a height of inches and rod for grout
consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and rod for grout consolidation.
I. High Lift Grouting:
1. Provide cleanout opening no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each cell to be ,...
grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit.
2. Clean out masonry cells and cavities with high pressure water spray or compressed
air. Permit complete water drainage. Remove debris.
3. Request inspection of the cells and cavities. Allow 3 days advance notice of
inspection.
4. After cleaning and cell inspection, seal openings with masonry units.
5. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended slump without
aggregate segregation.
6. Limit grout lift to 48 inches and [rod for grout consolidation. Wait 30 to 60 minutes
before placing next lift.
03860396/98 UNIT MASONRY 04200-8
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
,. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Sea[ butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. .
D. Form expansion joint as detailed.
3.11 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, anchor bolts, plates, and
other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb and level.
C. Bed anchors of metal door [and glazed] frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids
solid with mortar. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches 300 from
framed openings.
D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.12 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Pilasters: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Variation From Face of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.
C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.
D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch in two
stories or more.
E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch
in 30 ft or more.
F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.
G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.
H. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
I. Maximum Variation of Panel from Plane: 1/8 inch.
3.13 . CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and structural members. Coordinate with
other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance
or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field [inspection and] testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Inspect all masonry work.
C. Inspect and test engineered masonry work.
D. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780.
E. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019.
F. Test mortar and masonry units to ASTM [C1072] [E447] [and] [E518]; test in conjunction
with masonry unit sections specified.
3.15 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
�.., 03860396/98 UNIT MASONRY 04200-9
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
F. Do not scratch or deface units.
3.16 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners
which may be damaged by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 UNIT 'MASONRY 04200.-.10
C"
r
I FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes structural steel.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures
and administrative requirements.
2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck."
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for loose steel bearing plates and
miscellaneous steel framing.
4. Division 5 Section "Steel Joists."
5. Division 9 Section "Painting" for painting exposed steel.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Design structural steel connections required by the Contract
Documents to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings
indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent
data.
2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field
bolts. Identify high-strength bolted slip -critical, direct -tension, or tensioned
shear/bearing connections.
4. Contractor shall verify and become responsible for correctness of other than
principal controlling dimensions shown on the contract drawings, and call to the
attention of the structural engineer of record any errors or discrepancies that may
be discovered therein.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel
without delaying the Work.
03860396/98 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural --
steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design."
2. ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates,
Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use."
3. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code --Steel."
1. Present evidence that each welder has current AWS D1.1 qualifications for the
work.
E. Contractor shall be responsible for design, supply, installation and maintenance of all
temporary support of the structural steel frame until shear walls and permanent bracing
have been installed. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, the structure in a non
self-supporting steel frame. Building design wind loads and service requirements are
noted on drawings. Erector must coordinate temporary bracing with the building
construction sequence and General Contractor/Construction Manager. Removal of
temporary bracing shall be coordinated with General Contractor/Construction Manager.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure
continuity of installation.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that
become dry or corroded before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or
damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged
materials or structures as directed.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without
delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions,
as required, for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows:
1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36.
B. Cold -Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows:
1. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 36.
2. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy
hex carbon -steel nuts.
3. Washers: ASTM A 36.
D. Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon -steel, hex -
head bolts; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
03860396/98 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2
A
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
-- E. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel
I structural bolts, heavy hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements 170 KSI minimum).
G. Adhesive Anchors - ICBO Approved, i.e., HILTI "HVA", ITW "EPION."
2.2 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting
primer.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair
painting galvanized steel with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by
weight and complying with DOD -P -21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.
` 2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive,
nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage
compensating agents, plasticizing and water -reducing agents, complying with
ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30 -minute working time.
2.4 FABRICATION
r:
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop
Drawings.
1. Camber structural steel members where indicated.
2. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly.
3. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field
handling of structural steel.
+„ 4. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting
shop -priming operations.
5. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.
B. Fabricate architecturally exposed structural steel with exposed surfaces smooth, square,
and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.
1. Remove blemishes by filling, grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to
cleaning, treating and shop priming.
2. Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance units, of AISC's "Code
of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed
structural steel.
D. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded.
E. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in
bearing.
F. Steel Wall Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall framing
�. to be attached to structural steel framing. Straighten as required to provide uniform,
square, and true members in completed wall framing.
i G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for
passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on shop drawings.
1. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes
or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
�-- 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS
i
e
r-, 03860396/98 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
A. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts.
B. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches. —
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Galvanized surfaces.
4. Architecturally exposed structural steel.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale,
and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications
as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2. Refer Division 9 for surface preparation of exposed structural steel.
.C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to
manufacturer's instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film .-
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage
of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1.. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. —
2. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
3. Refer Division 9 for priming of exposed structural steel.
D. Painting: Apply a 1 -coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System �-
Guide No. 7.00" to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
1. Refer Division 9 for painting of exposed structural steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of
concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with —
requirements.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads �-
and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when
permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC specifications referenced in this Section.
B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -
reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. ' Clean '—
bottom surface of base and bearing plates.
03860396/98 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 ...
�+ 1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
lei
E.
F.
G.
H.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting
nuts as required.
2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with
edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that
will be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating
temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature
at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when
completed and in service.
Splice members only where indicated.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes
that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts."
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section forbearing, adequacy
of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent
to field welds.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as
used for shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
END OF SECTION 05120
�,.. 03860396/98 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5
G
u
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. K -series open -web steel joists.
2. VS Series Joists.
3. Joist accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures
and administrative requirements.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing anchors set in concrete.
3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing anchors set in unit masonry.
4. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for field quality -control procedures and tests.
5. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for loose, steel bearing plates and
miscellaneous steel framing.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect joists and connections to
withstand design load's within limits and under conditions required.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.
2. Design joists to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the
following:
a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a joist manufacturer who utilizes a qualified
professional engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other
structural data for steel joists.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of joist, accessory, and product specified.
C. Shop Drawings showing layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists.
Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories, splice and
connection details, and attachments to other units of Work.
1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be
embedded in other construction.
D. Material certificates signed by joist manufacturer certifying that joists comply with SJI's
"Specifications."
E. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of bolts certifying that their products comply
with specified requirements.
;..� 03860396/98 STEEL JOISTS 05210-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
F. Welder certificates signed by "Contractor certifying that welders comply with
requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar
to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service '—
performance.
1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists conforming to SJI
standard specifications and load tables.
B. SJI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of SJI's "Standard Specifications
Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders," applicable to types
of joists indicated.
C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code --Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. _
D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized
to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined
as those performed for installations of joists that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,
and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Comply with requirements of SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web section
material.
B. Welding Electrodes: 70 KSI minimum.
C. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36.
2.2 PRIMERS
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; Federal Specification TT -P-636, red oxide;
or manufacturer's standard shop primer meeting the performance requirements of either
of these red -oxide primers.
2.3 STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture joists according to SJI's "Specifications," with steel angle top and bottom
chord members, of joist types, end arrangements, and top chord arrangements
indicated. --
03860396/98 STEEL JOISTS 05210-2
r
I FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
B. Manufacture joists according to SJI's "Specifications," with steel angle top and bottom
chord members, and as follows:
1. Joist Type: K -series steel joists.
2. Joist Type: VS Series Joists.
3. End Arrangement: Underslung.
4. Top Chord Arrangement: Parallel and pitched two ways.
C. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality
of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI Type R extended ends where indicated,
complying with SJI's "Specifications" and load tables.
E. Camber K -series steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications.
F. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes
when joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch in 12 inches.
2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Bridging is schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate bridging according
to SJI requirements.
1. Supply additional bridging to ensure stability of structure during construction
period.
B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages as indicated.
C. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by the joist
manufacturer to complete the joist installation.
2.5 SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated
joists and accessories to be primed as follows:
1. Surface Preparation: Hand tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2.
B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide
a continuous, dry paint film thickness of not less than 1 mil.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural
framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of joists. Do not proceed with
Installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to
supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's
recommendations, and the requirements of this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure joists
are stabilized during construction.
r^ 03860396/98 STEEL JOISTS 05210-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates. Coordinate
welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists.
1. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads
are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating
at walls or beams.
3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Touch lip Painting: Following installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or
reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists,
accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel'
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power tool
cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent
surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage
or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05210
03860396/98 STEEL JOISTS 05210-4 --
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
X
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel roof deck.
2. Cellular Steel Roof Deck.
3. Noncomposite steel form deck.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
r^ 1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete fill and reinforcing steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing openings with miscellaneous
steel shapes.
r-, 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for painting roof deck.
r
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of deck, accessory, and product specified.
!^ C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code --Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with
a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
r-- 03860396/98 STEEL DECK 05310-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. American Buildings Co.
2. ASC Pacific Inc.
3. Bowman Metal Deck Armco, Inc.
4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
5. Epic Metals Corp.
6. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc.
7. Robertson A United Dominion Co.
8. Roof Deck, Inc.
9. United Steel Deck, Inc.
10. Verco Manufacturing Co.
11. Vulcraft Div. of Nucor Corp.
12. Walker Div. of Butler Manufacturing Co.
13. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.
2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Steel Roof Deck A: Fabricate panels without top -flange stiffening grooves conforming
to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and
the following:
1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade A, G 60 zinc coated according to
ASTM A 525.
2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib.
3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0358 inch.
5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
6. Side Joints: Overlapped.
B. Steel Roof Deck B: Fabricate panels without top -flange stiffening grooves conforming
to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and
the following:
1. Galvanized - Steel Sheet: ASTM A446, Grade A, G60 zinc coated according to
ASTM A 525. ,
2. Deck Profile: Wide Rib Cellular.
3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
4. Design uncoated - Steel thickness: .0358 inch.
5. Span condition: Triple span or more.
6. Side joints: interlocking seam.
C. Steel Roof Deck C: Fabricate ribbed steel sheet noncomposite form deck panels
conforming to SDI publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for
Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," the minimum section properties indicated, and the
following:
1. Galvanized - Steel Sheet: ASTM A446, Grade E, G60 Zinc coated according to
ASTM A 525.
2. Profile Depth: 9/16 inch.
3. Design Uncoated - Steel thickness: .0358 inch.
4. Span condition: Single Span.
5. Side Joints: Overlapped.
03860396/98 STEEL DECK 05310-2
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.3 FORM DECK
[ A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck A: Fabricate ribbed -steel sheet noncomposite form
deck panels conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for
I Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," the minimum section properties indicated, and the
following:
1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade E, G 60 zinc coated according to
' ASTM A 525.
k 2. Profile Depth: 9/16 inch.
3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0149 inch.
4. Span Condition: Single span.
5. Side Joints: Overlapped.
B. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck B: Fabricate ribbed -steel sheet noncomposite form deck
panels conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for
Noncomposite Steel Form Deck, the minimum section properties indicated, and the
following:
1. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, Grade E, G 60 zinc coated according to
ASTM A 525.
2. Profile Depth: 2 inches.
3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0358 inch.
4. Span Condition: Single span.
5. Side Joints: Overlapped.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements
indicated and recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion -resistant, low-velocity,
powder -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -
threading screws.
C. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, 0.0359 -inch -thick minimum ridge
and valley plates, finish strips, and reinforcing channels, of same material as roof deck.
D. Column Closures, End Closures, Z -Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same
material and thickness as deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Weld Washers: Manufacturer's standard uncoated -steel sheet weld washers, shaped
to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick with 3/8 -inch minimum diameter prepunched hole.
F. Rib Closure Strips: manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed cell synthetic rubber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Do not place deck panels on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and
is dry.
" B. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
i
03860396/98 STEEL DECK 05310-3
i
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
900-9330
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and
commentary of SDI Publication .No. 28, manufacturer's recommendations, and
requirements of this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels when required to meet deflection
limitations.
C. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final position with ends
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently
fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing without warp or
deflection.
E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to the decking.
F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of decking, and support of other work.
G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
H. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical
fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated or arc seams welds with an equal perimeter, but not less
than 1-1/2 inches long, and a follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space welds as indicated
on plana
3. Install weld washers per manufacturer's recommendation.
B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Space and locate fasteners as indicated on the
plans using one of the following methods:
1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling No. 10 -diameter or larger carbon steel
screws.
C. Fasten roof deck to supporting members and side LAP fasteners at spacing indicated
on plan.
D. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of
1-1 /2 inches, with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.
3.5 FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter:: 5/8 inch, nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds
an average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, or at intervals not exceeding 36 inches, using one of the following
methods:
1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling No. 10 -diameter or larger carbon steel
screws.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of
1-1 /2 inches, with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped.
03860396/98 STEEL DECK 05310-4 0—
t
$
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
�^
D.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to
supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z -closures
to deck according to SDI recommendations to provide tight -fitting closures at open ends
of ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck
panels, unless otherwise indicated.
j^
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
B.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with
specified requirements.
3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces
with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Touch up Painting: Cleaning and touch up painting of field welds, abraded areas, and
,.
rust spots, as required after erection and before proceeding with field painting, are
included in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure steel decking is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
r
END OF SECTION 05310
r 03860396/98 STEEL DECK 05310-5
7
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted and galvanized.
B. Steel stair frame of structural sections, with open and solid risers.
C. Steel stair tread gratings.
D. Steel floor grating'.
E. Aluminum checkered floor plate.
F. Steel ladders.
G. Steel and aluminum pipe handrails, balusters, and fittings.
H. Anchor Pots.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.
B. Section 04200- Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors in masonry.
C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural bearing plates, angles and miscellaneous
items, including anchorage.
D. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Wood blocking for support of accessories.
E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Placement of anchors in stud wall
construction.
F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field preparation and paint finish.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Stairs
1. Fabricate stair assembly to support live load of 100 lb/sq ft and a concentrated load
of 300 Ib/sq ft with deflection of tread not to exceed 1/360 of span.
B. Railings
1. Railing assembly including wall rails, and attachments to resist loads as defined in
ASTM E985, without damage or permanent set as tested in accordance with ASTM
A935.
C. Gratings
1. General
a. Size components using single support design.
b. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240.
2. Type
a. Design Live Load: Uniform load of 200 Ib/sq ft minimum; concentrated load
of 1,000 lbs.
3. Type 11
a. Design Wheel Load (Heavy Vehicle): Wheel load of 15,600 lbs. conforming
to ASSHTO Grade 15, with 30 percent impact loading.
�-, 03860396/98 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1
i
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
D. Ladders
1. Conform ,to OSHA/ANSI A14.3 for fixed wall ladders.
900-9330 --
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prepare shop drawings for stairs and gratings under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certificates certifying welders employed on the Work,
verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
C. Design railing work to resist loading requirements in accordance with ASTM E985.
1.6 REFERENCES
A. AA DAF -45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
B. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
C. AASHTO - Standard Specification for Highway 'Bridges.
D. ANSI A14.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements.
E. ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual.
F. ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual.
G. ANSI/NAAMM - Metal Stair Manual
H. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
I. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings.
J. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless.
K. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
L. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
M. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.
N. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
0. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
P. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Round and Shapes.
Q. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon .Steel Structural Tubing.
R. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 maximum, percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip,
Commercial Quality.
S. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process.
T. ASTM A786 - Rolled Steel Floor Plates.
U. ASTM B26 - Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings.
V. ASTM B85 - Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings.
W. ASTM 8209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate.
X. ASTM 8241 - Aluminum -Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube.
Y. ASTM E985 - Performance of Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.
Z. ASTM E985 - Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.
AA. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
BB. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
CC. FS -S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices,
Anchoring, Masonry).
DD. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and
type of fasteners, and accessories.
2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
03860396/98 METAL FABRICATIONS 1 05500-2
l
r
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate
net weld lengths.
4. Indicate adjacent construction and required anchorages to be provided by other
sections.
5. Submit manufacturer's standard printed descriptive product literature for
manufactured items.
B. Design Data
1. Submit span and deflection tables for specified grating loads.
2. Submit design calculations for metal stairs.
C. Certification: Submit Welder's certificate verifying AWS qualification within the previous
12 months.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Railing Accessories
1. Julius Blum & Co., Carlstadt, NJ.
2. J.G. Brown, Skokie, IL.
3. Blumcraft, Pittsburgh, PA.
B. Gratings
1. IKG Industries, Nashville, TN.
2. United Interlock, Columbus, OH.
3. Alhambra Foundry Co., Alhambra, CA.
C. Floor Anchor Pots.
1. Blackhawk Collision Repair Corp.; Waukesha, WI.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Aluminum Sections: ASTM B221.
2. Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
4. Steel Plates: ASTM A283.
5. Aluminum Plate: ASTM B209.
6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade 8 Schedule 40.
7. Aluminum Pipe: ASTM 8241
S. Fasteners: FS -S-325, type as required by condition Indicated.
9. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM All 53 for galvanized
components.
10. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
11. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
12. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich type.
B. Gratings
1. ANSI A202.1, Types as specified and/or detailed.
2. Types I, 11, and 111: ASTM A36 steel, rectangular shape.
3. Fasteners and J -Hooks: Of same material as grating.
4. Perimeter Closure: Of same material as grating.
r- 03860396/98 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-3
i
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
C.
L�
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
900-9330
Railings
1. Steel System
a. Rails and Posts: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, seamless, 11/4 inch
diameter steel pipe; welded joints.
b. Ballusters: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, seamless, 1" diameter steel
pipe; welded joints.
c. Fittings: Elbows, T -shapes, escutcheons; cast steel.
d. Wall brackets: Julius Blum #306.
e. Mounting: Adjustable brackets and flanges with steel brackets for embedding
in masonry.
f. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design
of railing.
C. Splice Connectors: Concealed spigots.
2. Aluminum System
a. Rails: ASTM B241 1-1/2 inch outside diameter, extruded tubing.
b. Fittings: Elbows, T -shapes, escutcheons; cast aluminum.
c. Wall brackets: Julius Blum #316
d. Mounting: Adjustable brackets and flanges with steel brackets for embedding
in masonry.
e. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design
of railing.
f. Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot.
Floor Plate
1. ASTM A786, 3/16 inch thick, pattern no. 5.
2. Prepare and prime for field painting as Specified in Section 09900.
Aluminum Ladder: Equal to Alaco series 560 as indicated on the drawings.
Steel Ladder
1. Side Rails: ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40, 1 1/4 inch diameter.
2. Rungs: ASTM A36 steel, 3/4 inch diameter smooth bar.
3. Clip Angles: ASTM A36 steel, sizes as indicated.
Pipe Bollards: ASTM A53, Grade B- Schedule 40, 8 inch outside diameter, unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Perforated Aluminum Panels: ASTM 8221 alloy 6061-T6, 1 /8" thick aluminum panels
Resin Filled/Screen Anchors: Acceptable product, Hilti HIT C-20.
Anchor Pots: 3 - 1/8 inch diameter steel cylinder with integral attachment chain and lid;
20 ton capacity; equal to Blackhawk model TD330.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed
joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively
located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and
related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
B. Stairs
1. Exterior Stairs
a. Fabricate treads and landings from ASTM A653, G90 steel sheet of gage to
meet specified design requirements.
03860396/98 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-4
i
w
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
b. Form treads and landings from single sheet with diamond shaped open
serrated tops and integral solid 'C' shaped sides.
c. Provide manufacturer's standard diamond shaped anchoring clip with square
hole to receive carriage bolt.
d. Fabricate stairs with open risers.
e. Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs, landings and
railings to each other and to building structure.
f. Secure treads to stringers bolted in place.
g. Form stringers with rolled steel channels, of size as indicated on drawings.
Close ends of channels with 1/4 inch thick steel 'plates welded continuously
and ground smooth.
h. Shop drill stringers for all bolted connectors and to receive treads.
2.
Interior Stairs
a. Form treads, risers and landings from ASTM A569 sheet steel of gage to meet
specified design requirements.
b. Form 'Z' style closed risers and recessed pans ready to receive concrete fill.
c. Secure tread pans to stringers with clip angles welded in place.
d. Provide 4 x 4 W1.4 x W1.4 welded wire fabric reinforcing in each tread,
welded in place.
e. Form stringers with rolled steel channels of size as indicated on drawings.
Close ends of channels with 1/4 inch thick steel plates welded continuously
and ground smooth.
f. Shop drill stringers for all bolted connections.
C. Gratings
1.
Fabricate grates to accommodate design loads to sizes indicated and to tolerances
specified in ANSI/NAAMM MBG531.
2.
Fabricate steel grates with welded cross bars.
3.
Top Surface:
a. Types I and II: Smooth.
4.
Bearing Bars: 1-3/16 inch on center maximum.
5.
Cross Bars: Spaced 4 inches on center maximum.
6.
Finishes:
a. Type 1 and II: Galvanized.
D. Ladders
1.
Fabricate in accordance with ANSI Al 4.3.
2.
Drill rails for rungs, spaced at 12 inches on center, plug weld rungs to rail and grind
smooth.
3.
Rail Spacing: 20 inches clear inside.
4.
Mounting Brackets: As indicated.
E. Railings
1.
Fabricate will all joints welded and ground smooth.
2.
Return rails to within 1/4 inch of wall surface.
3.
Finish rail end with terminal caps.
F. Perforated Aluminum Panels
1.
3/32" diameter holes x 5/32" centers, staggered
2.
Minimum 30% open area
3.
1 " margin all four sides
4.
Prepare and prime for field painting as specified below
2.4 FINISHES
A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
03860396/98
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
C. Prepare and prime paint items Specified or Scheduled to be field painted with two coats
manufacturer's standard baked on primer.
D. Galvanize items Specified or Scheduled to be galvanized with 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc coating
in accordance with ASTM A386.
E. Field Painting: Specified in Section 09900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
S. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting
templates, to appropriate sections.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment
until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized,
except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
G. Mechanically cut galvanized finish surfaces. Do not flame cut.
H. Anchor grating by bolting through flange blocks.
I. Anchor handrail brackets to face brick and CMU with resin filled screen anchors.
J. Railing Posts
1. Set posts in steel sleeves cast into concrete.
2. Interior diameter of sleeve: Minimum 1 inch larger than outside diameter of post.
3. Fill sleeve with non -shrink grout.
K. Floor Anchor Pots
1. Install flush with floor with reinforcing bars as instructed by manufacturer.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. General
1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
B. Gratings
1. Conform to ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531.
2. Maximum Space Between Adjacent Sections: 1/4 inch.
3. Maximum Variation From Top Surface Plane of Adjacent Sections: 1/16 inch.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not
specifically scheduled.
1. Roof Access Ladder: At locations indicated, prime paint finish.
03860396/98 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2. Overhead Coiling Door Frames: 1/4 inch thick bent plate as detailed: prime paint
finish for field painting.
3. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
4. Floor Grating
a. Type I: Grating over liquid containment pit in PARTS STORAGE Room114.
b. Type Il: Grating over trench drains at VEHICLE MAINTENANCE SHOP Room
115.
5. Floor Plate: Flooring and floor access doors at CHASE 203, 303, 403 and 503.
6. Floor Anchor Pots: At locations indicated in VEHICLE MAINTENANCE SHOP Room
115.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-7
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 06112
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements
apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural roof framing; roof sheathing; preservative treatment of wood; fire retardant
treatment of wood; miscellaneous framing and sheathing; telephone and electrical panel
back boards; wood nailers and concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath
accessories, wall cabinets, toilet partitions, handrails, TV brackets and all other wall
mounted equipment and accessories requiring support or other sections referencing this
section.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Setting anchors in masonry.
B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Prefabricated steel structural supports.
C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded into
masonry.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards.
B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard.
C. APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) - Certification.
D. ASTM All 53 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware.
E. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
F. ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners.
G. AWPA C1 (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative
Treatment by Pressure Process.
H. AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment.
I. AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) Structural Lumber Fre Retardant
Treatment by Pressure Process.
J. AWPA C27 Plywood, Fire -Retardant Pressure Treatment.
K. FS FF -N-1058 Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought.
L. SP1B (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules:
M. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules.
N. NLGA (National Lumber Rules Authority)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit technical data on roof sheathing, wood preservative materials,
and application instructions.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products conform to specified requirements.
03860396/98
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06112-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
900-9330
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: r�
1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA - The
Engineered Wood Association. _
B. Factory grade stamp each piece of lumber and each wood structural panel. In lieu of
grade stamping, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or
exceed specified requirements.
C. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency
approved by ALSC's Board of Review.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect all wood materials from warping or otherdistortion by stacking in vertical
position, braced to resist movement.
C. Keep .all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around
stacks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum
dressed sizes for dry lumber.
B. Provide dressed lumber, 54S, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide lumber of the following species. The stess group is used as a reference only.
Stress Group Species (Commercial Design)
A Douglas Fir, Larch
B Hem -Fir -
C' Southern Yellow Pine
D. Lumber Grading Rules: SPIE, WCLIB, or WWPA.
E. Rafter Framing: Stress Group A, B, or C; 15 percent maximum moisture content with
a minimum bending stress of 1200 psi and a modulus of elasticity of 1600 ksi. -
F. Non-structural Light Framing: Stress Group A, B, or C; 19 percent maximum moisture
content with a minimum bending stress of 1100 psi and a modulus of elasticity of
1500 ksi.
G. Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group C, 19 percent maximum moisture
content, pressure preservative treat.
2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS
A. Wood Panel Roof Sheathing:
1. Conformance: ANSI A 208.1 and APA rated sheathing.
2. Material: Oriented Strand Board.
3., Thickness: 19/32 inch.
4 Exposure: 1.
03860396/98 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06112-2
i
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
B. Wood Panel Wall Sheathing: APA/EWA Rated Sheathing, Plywood 3/4 inch thick
(unless otherwise indicated), CD grade; Exposure Durability 1 Exterior; unsanded.
C. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: APA/EWA rated plywood, Exposure Durability
I 1, grade CD, plugged, sanded.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF -N -105B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized
steel.
2. Decking Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three
times thickness of sheathing cadmium plated or zinc coated.
3. Anchors:
a) At Metal Studs: Flat or oval head sheet metal screws as required by project
conditions.
b) At Face Brick: Self tapping masonry anchors equal to Hilti Kwik -Con.
c) At Mortar Joints: Expansion type anchors equal to Rawl wedge anchors.
d) At Hollow Masonry: Resin injected screen anchors equal to Hilti HIT C20.
e) At Grout Filled Masonry and Concrete: Expansion bolts or self tapping
masonry anchors as required by project conditions.
f) At Drywall: Equal to Hilti Togglers.
B. Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing
conditions.
2.4 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1, C9, C20 and C27
using water borne preservative with a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft.
B. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Colored type, as recommended by pressure
treatment manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1.
Set framing and sheathing to required lines and level, with members plumb,
true to line, cut and fitted.
2.
Fit framing to other construction, scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
3.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking grounds and similar supports to
'
allow attachment of other construction.
4.
Apply field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and
plywood.
5.
Securely attach carpentry work in accordance with requirements of applicable
code indicated on drawings.
6.
Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary
to avoid splitting wood.
B. Framing
f ^
1.
Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to
(
maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of
erection and installation of permanent bracing.
2.
Place roof rafters crown side up.
03860396/98
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06112-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3. Construct load bearing framing and curb members full length without splices.
4. Coordinate installation of wood decking and wood joists.
5. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form
corners by alternating lapping side members.
6. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck
openings.
C. Sheathing
1. Install roof sheathing with longer edge (strength axis) perpendicular to framing
members and with ends staggered and sheet ends over bearing.
2. Use sheathing clips between sheets between roof framing members. Provide
solid edge blocking between sheets.
3. Secure roof sheathing to framing members, with decking screws.
4. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with flat head drywall screws.
Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel.
D. Nailers and Blocking
1. Attach roof nailers with anchors recessed flush with exposed surface.
2. At metal studs, install blocking cut between studs. Anchor to studs with bugle
head drywall screws.
3. Provide blocking of minimum 2 x 6 size.
3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Apply preservative treatment. _
B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with roofing and
related metal flashings. Treat site -sawn cuts.
C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Section 01410 - Quality Control: Tolerances.
B. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
C. Surface Flatness of Roof: 1/4 inch" in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet
maximum. ;
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Pressure Treated Lumber: Nailers, curbs, blocking and similar members in connection
with roofing and flashing.
B. Pressure Treated Plywood: All parapet sheathing.
C. Fire Retardant Treated Lumber: All blocking in interior partitions.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06112-4
G
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1
i
SECTION 06410 .
CUSTOM CASEWORK
900-9330
PART 1
GENERAL
L
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to the work of this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Cabinet units.
B.
Countertops.
C.
Cabinet hardware.
D.
Prefinished exposed surfaces.
E.
Preparation for site finishing concealed surfaces.
F.
Preparation for installing utilities.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06112 - Rough Carpentry: Grounds and support framing.
B.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Seals at adjoining construction.
C.
Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing of casework.
D.
Division 15 - Mechanical: Plumbing fixtures.
E.
Division 16 - Electrical: Power, signal, and data wiring.
r
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
B.
ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
-
C.
AWI - Quality Standards.
D.
BHMA All 56.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
r
E.
BH MA A156.11 - Cabinet Locks.
F.
CID A - A 1936A - Adhesive, Contact.
G.
NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
H.
PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
I.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawing and Product Data
1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint
details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of
finishes.
2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and
provide master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence,
elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed.
!millwork
!
3. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
B.
Samples
!"'
1. Submit four 2 x 3 inch size samples of each color selected, illustrating counter top
and cabinet finish.
�'*
03860396/98
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06410-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
900-9330
A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI Custom Quality standards:
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and
humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hardware
1.
Julius Blum, Inc.; Stanley NC.
2.
Grass America, Inc.; Kernersville, NC.
3.
Hafele America Co.; Archdale, NC.
4.
H.B. Ives; New Haven, CT.
5.
Hewi, Inc.; Lancaster, PA.
6.
Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co.; Grand Rapids, Mi.
7.
Liberty Hardware; Greensboro, NC.
8.
Stanley Hardware; New Britain, CN.
B. Computer Keyboard Drawers
1.
MicroComputer Accessories, Inc.; Englewood CA.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade, average
moisture content of 8 percent.
B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; graded in accordance with AWI premium grade; average
moisture content of 8 percent.
C. Softwood Plywood: PS -1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer
lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts
D. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer
lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application.
E. Wood Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M -S, composed of wood chips, medium
density, made with water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.
F. Melamine Covered Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M -S, composed of wood chips,
medium density, made with water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application;
surfaced with thermofused melamine.
G. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4
inch thick, smooth one side.
H. Plastic Laminate
1. Conformance: NEMA LD 3.
2. Grade
a. Horizontal Exposed Surfaces: GP -50, 0.50 inch thick.
03860396/98 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06410-2 1.
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
b. Vertical Exposed Surfaces: GP -28, 0.28 inch thick.
C. Backing Sheet: BK20, 0.20 inch thick backing grade, undecorated plastic
laminate.
3. Color, Pattern, and Surface Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard.
I. Adhesive: CID A -A 1936A contact adhesive. Type recommended by laminate
manufacturer to suit application.
J. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
K. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application;
Cadmium finish.
L. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
M. Grommets: Two piece plastic, with spring loaded access port equal to Hafele model no.
429.99, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard.
N. Shelf Standards
1. Cabinet Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type 804071, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1
inch centers; chrome satin finish.
O. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, Type B04081, chrome satin finish.
P. Closet Rods: Equal to K&V model no. PKV 3 CHR, length to fit cabinet depth.
Q. Cabinet Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum wire pull, satin finish, equal to
Stanley no. 4484.
R. Locks
1. Conformance: BHMA A 156.11
2. Style
a. Cabinet Drawers and Doors: Type E07261. Provide locks with cams not
requiring mortising or recessing into cabinet door or drawer front.
b. Display Cases: Type E070191.
3. Finish: Satin chrome steel finish.
4. Keying: Master key all locks. Provide two keys per lock.
S. Catches: BHMA A156.9, Type 803141.
T. Slides
1. Standard Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type 805051, with positive stop levers.
2. File Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051 1100 Ib. load rated?, full extension type
with positive stop levers.
3. Kitchen Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type 805051, full extension type, with positive
stop levers.
U. Hinges: Semi -mortised, self closing, three dimensional adjustable type equal to Grass
model no. 1203 screw -on hinge with winged base plate; brushed nickel finish.
V. Wall Hooks: Cast aluminum equal to Ives model no. 577.
W. Computer Keyboard Drawer: Equal to MicroComputer model no. MCA 626.
2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS,
A. Finishing: Site finish of casework scheduled to receive opaque and transparent finishes
specified in Section 09900.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
2. Fit shelves, doors, drawer fronts and other exposed and semi -exposed edges with
veneer matching face finish as scheduled. Use one piece for full length only.
3. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
4. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
-03860396!98 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06410-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
B.
L
900-9330 --
5. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes.
6. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel
arises.
7. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic wood laminate finished
surfaces.
8. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures
and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges.
Laminated Plastic -Covered Casework
1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 1600, flush overlay style, using the
following materials:
a. Body Members: Melamine covered particleboard.
b. Stiles and Rails: Poplar, Alder or medium density particleboard.
c. Shelves: Medium density particleboard.
d. Backs: Tempered hardboard.
e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar or Alder.
f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard.
g. Drawer Fronts: Medium density particleboard.
h. Doors: Medium density particleboard.
Opaque Finish Casework
1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400A, flush overlay style, using the
following materials:
a. Body Members: Medium density particleboard.
b. Stiles and Rails: Paint grade Birch or Alder.
c. Shelves: Medium density particleboard.
d. Backs: Tempered hardboard.
e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar or Alder.
f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard.
g. Drawer Fronts: Rotary cut paint grade birch or maple veneer on particle board
core.
h. Doors: Rotary cut paint grade birch or maple veneer on particle board core.
I. Door, Drawer and Shelf Edging: Paint grade birch or Alder veneer banding.
Countertops
1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 1600C with GP -50 high pressure
decorative laminate exposed finish and BK -20 backing sheet on particle board core,
except on tops with sinks, provide exterior grade plywood.
2. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
3. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops.
4. Provide grommet at each knee space. Coordinate location with utilities.
2.5 FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Finish for items scheduled to receive transparent or opaque finishes, specified in Section
09900 - Painting
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verifiy existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section.
03860396/98 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06410-4
r_
".
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
Y
03860396/98 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06410-5
I I
I
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
s
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install casework and associated trim in accordance with AWI Section 1700.
.
B.
Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level.
C.
Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
D.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter
tops.
L
E.
Seal splashes and returns to countertop and wall with type sealant specified in Section
07900 - Joint Sealants.
F.
Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch.
Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
G.
Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
H.
Anchorage Devices
1. General: Use concealed anchorage devices at all locations except where otherwise
approved by Architect.
2. Opaque Finish Casework
a. At exposed fixed locations, countersink and putty or countersink and conceal
with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with
,.
surrounding surfaces.
b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and
countersunk finishing washers.
3. Laminated Plastic-Covered Casework
r'
a. At exposed fixed locations, provide cadmium coated screws with countersunk
f
finishing washers.
b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide cadmimum plated
�.
screws and countersunk finishing washers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
Y
03860396/98 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06410-5
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 07181
WATER REPELLENT COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
900-9303
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply
to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water repellent coating applied to [exterior masonry], [stone], [and] [precast architectural
concrete] surfaces.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry surfaces.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C67 - Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile.
B. ASTM C140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.
C. ASTM D5095 - Determination of the Non-volatile Content in Silanes, Siloxenes and Silane-
Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water Repellent Treatment.
D. ASTM E514 - Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry.
E. RILEM 25 - PEM Method 11.4
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform a laboratory test on each substrate to be treated, to determine absorption rate of
treated and untreated specimens in accordance with the following standards:
1. Brick: ASTM C 67, cold water absorption only.
2. Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C140.
3. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: ASTM E51, using a test pressure
of 20 Ibf/ft2.
B. Treatment of Specimens: Treat specimens using same application rates and methods as
recommended by water repellent manufacturer for field application.
C. Water Absorption Reduction: Minimum 90 percent after 24 hours.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating,
cautionary procedures required during application, and chemical properties including
percentage of solids.
B. Manufacturer's Installation instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention.
C. Test Reports
1. Provide copy of laboratory test indicating compliance with specified requirements.
2. Provide written results to Architect prior to beginning field application of water
repellents.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
03860396/98 WATER REPELLENT COATING
07181 -1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9303
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
C. Mock-up
1. Provide test area of not less than 5 square feet comprising typical water repellent
installation, using specified methods and materials.
2. Visually examine test area for color change of substrate and water repellency.
3. Unacceptable Installation: Extensive darkening of substrate or absorption of water
above specified limits.
4. Acceptable Installation: Maintain for duration of project as representative standard for
remainder of installation.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING h
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect coating liquid from freezing.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply coating when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than
100 degrees F.
B. Keep surfaces being treated dry until completion of treatement , including curing period.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard 5 year warranty, signed by Contractor and applicator,
warranting water repellent material against failure of material and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS .L
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Siloxane
1. Chemprobe Technologies, Inc.
- 2. The Euclid Chemical Company.
3. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
4. Pecora Corporation.
5. ProSoCo, Inc.
6. Stonhard, Inc.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Siloxanes: Colorless penetrating water repellent, alkylalkoxysiloxanes that are oligomerous
with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier.
03860396/98 WATER REPELLENT COATING 07181 -2 r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
900-9303
A. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.
B. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter
detrimental to application of coating.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cure masonry and mortar substrate a minimum of 21 days prior to application of water
repellents.
B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
C. Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coating.
D. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.
E. Test for pH level according to repellent manufacturer's instructions to ensure chemical bond
to silicate minerals.
F. Protect all glass, aluminum, painted surfaces and other substrates not specified to receive
water repellent coating from contact with water repellent coating.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at recommended
rate.
B. Apply in minimum two continuous, uniform coats.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field test on non -water repellent treated and water repellent treated area for each
substrate scheduled to be treated. Perform separate test for masonry and mortar joints.
1. Perform test using the RILEM 25 PEM method 11.4 for a period of one hour.
2. Perform minimum of 5 separate tests for each substrate scheduled to receive water
repellent treatment using specified methods and materials..
3. Acceptable Application: Minimum 80 percent reduction in water absorption between
treated and untreated areas.
4. Provide additional coatings until required reduction in absorption is achieved.
3.5 PROTECTION TO FINISHED AND ADJACENT WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
B. Mask sealant bond surfaces to prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces.
C. Protect landscaping, property, and vehicles.
D. If applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by a method instructed by coating
manufacturer.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Brick and Pre -Finished Concrete Masonry Units (except at the Training Tower)
Masonry: Siloxane, minimum two coats.
03860396/98
END OF SECTION
WATER REPELLENT COATING
07181-3
r
r-�
I
r-
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement; and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to the work of this Section.
B. Drawings, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
C. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 -
General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction.
B. Batt insulation on top of [lay -in acoustical] [and] [gypsum drywall ceilings].
C. Acoustical insulation.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Insulation fill in masonry units.
B. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Rigid insulation at roof system.
C. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Sealing fire rated partitions
D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Vapor barrier and acoustical sealant. Supporting
construction
E. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Supporting construction.
F. Section 13121 - Pre -Engineered Buildings: Roof and wall insulation.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
Manufactured Housing.
B. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions.
D. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
E. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Insulation k Values
1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg F.
2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with
RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code as indicated on drawings for combustibility and smoke
development requirements for materials as follows:
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
03860396/98 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
organization.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate
1 Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Flexible Insulation
1. Owens/Corning Corporation
2. CertainTeed
3. Manville Corp.
4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Flexible Thermal Insulation
1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass fiber batt.
2. Thermal Resistance: R19.
3. Size: To fit framing spacing.
4. Facing: Unfaced.
B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation
1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, mineral fiber batt.
2. Thermal Resistance: R14.
3. Size: To fit framing spacing
4. Facing: Unfaced.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 09250.
I-
03860396/98
03860396/98 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
900-9330
A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.
B. Verify insulation is dry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install insulation without gaps or voids.
3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and
around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to
items passing through partitions.
4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.
B. Vapor Barrier
1. As specified in section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall Systems.
C. Flexible Thermal Insulation
1. Place between and tight to framing members.
D. Flexible Acoustical Insulation
1. Place between and tight to framing members.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Thermal Insulation
1. Walls: Install in stud space from floor to bottom of roof deck above in all exterior
walls
B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation
1. Walls: Install in stud space from floor to bottom of roof deck above in all walls
where indicated on floor plan.
2. Ceilings: Install four feet wide over top of partitions separating all offices.
r 03860396198
END OF SECTION
BUILDING INSULATION
07210-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 07240
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General
Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
900-9330
A. Exterior insulation and finish system applied over gypsum sheathing substrate.
B. Accent and control joints cut in EIFS.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Perimeter flashings.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealing EIFS joints.
C. Section 09250: Gypsum Board Systems: Sheathing under insulation.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C578 - Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
B. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. EIMA - Guideline Specification For Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB
and Class PM.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Exterior Insulation and Finish System: EIMA Class PM system.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate details of construction including attachments, joint patterns,
penetrations, interface with flashings and adjacent materials.
C. Product Data: Submit data on system materials, product characteristics, performance
criteria, and limitations.
D. Samples: Submit three, 12 x 12 inch size samples illustrating coating color and
texture range for selection.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation required, installation
techniques, jointing requirements, and recommended details.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum
three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
03860396/98 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07240-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1.8 MOCK-UP
A.
Section 01410 - Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements.
B.
Provide mock-up of system materials illustrating method of attachment.
C.
Construct mock-up, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide, which includes insulation substrate,
surface finish, color, texture, perimeter and control joints, and typical interface with
^�
adjacent construction.
'
D.
Locate where directed.
E.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work if accepted.
t-,
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B.
Protect adhesives and finish materials from freezing by storing in an environment
recommended by manufacturer.
1.10
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule Work to maintain integrity of exterior wall to prevent water penetration
behind EIFS. Allow sufficient time for curing of EIFS materials prior to sealant
application.
1.11
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Supply the following materials to the Owner, with maintenance instructions and repair
procedures:
1. One gallon of base coat.
2. One gallon of primer coat.
3. One gallon of each color of finish coat.
4. Ten foot length of each type of mesh.
--
1.12
WARRANTY
A.
Provide system manufacturer's standard five year warranty against defective material.
'!
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. '
W.R. Bonsai
B.
Dryvit Systems, Inc.
C.
Finestone Simplex Products.
D.
Parex Incorporated.
r
E.
Senergy Div., Hams Specialty Chemicals, Inc.
F.
STO Corporation:
G.
TEC Inc., An H. B. Fuller Co.
^.
H.
Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A.
Molded Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C578, Type I conforming to the following:
1. Thickness: Thickness indicated with a minimum thickness of 3/4 inch.
2. Thickness Tolerance: 1/32 inch maximum.
03860396/98
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07240-2
.-
1 .
900-9330
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
3. Board Size: 24 x 48 inch.
4. Board Size Tolerance: 1/16 inch from square and dimension.
5. Edges: Square edges.
6. Fire Hazard Classification: 25/450 in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Primer/Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
`--< C. Reinforcing Mesh: Interwoven glass fiber mesh, types as recommended by
manufacturer for each location and substrate.
1. Intermediate Mesh: Minimum 12.0 oz./sq.yd.
D. Finish Coat Materials, EIMA Class PM: Polymer modified Portland cement as
recommended by manufacturer, color and texture as selected.
rte► 2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
B. Sealant Materials: Recommended by coating manufacturer. type, as specified in
y
Section 07900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01039 -Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry.
C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of irregularities, sound, with tight connections
N and free of surface voids.
3.2 PREPARATION
r■
A. Power wash all surfaces to receive insulation board with high pressure washer an
° mild detergent to remove all dirt and loose paint. Rinse surface and allow to dry.
B. Test adhesive and insulation board on all existing surfaces to ensure compatibility and
bonding.
03860396198
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07240-3
3.3 INSTALLATION
E
A. Insulation:
1. Install boards on wall surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Butt
el,
2.
Place boards in a method to maximize tight joints. Stagger vertical joints.
to at dissimilar surfaces,
edges and ends tight to adjacent board and protrusions
provide 3/8 inch wide space for sealant joint.
Secure boards to substrate by beads of adhesive to achieve a continuous flush
3.
4.
insulation surface.
Rout to pattern and profile as indicated.
B. Coatings:
1. Apply base coat to a minimum thickness of 118 inch and fully embed
�+
1
reinforcement, wrinkle free.
i
2.
Lap reinforcement edges and ends 2 inches.
to a total minimum thickness of 1/8 inch. Finish to a uniform
3.
Apply finish
texture and color.
Coordinate sealant application and control joints with placement of base and
4.
by EIFS manufacturers and in accordance with
finish coats as recommended
1
Section 07900.
03860396198
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07240-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Protect installed construction under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
900-9330
07240-4
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fireproof firestopping and firesafing materials and accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry partitions.
B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum wallboard partitions.
C. Division 15 - Mechanical: Mechanical work requiring firestopping.
D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical work requiring firestopping.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
C. ASTM E814 —Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.
D. UL -05 - Fire ResistanceDirectory.
E. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
F. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
G. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops.
H. WHI - Certification Listings.
1.5 DEFINITION
A. Firestopping (Firesafing): A certified sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in
spaces between building materials to arrest the movement of smoke, heat, gases, or fire
through wall or floor openings and to maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls,
partitions and roof -ceiling assemblies and construction joints. Through -penetrations include
the annular space around pipes, tubes, conduit, wires, cables and vents.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 or UL 723 with a flame spread / smoke developed rating of
0-25/0-450.
B. Firestop all interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide detail drawing of each type firestop and location drawing referencing each
type application.
B. Product Data: Provide descriptive data on product characteristics, performance and
limitation criteria and fire test data.
03860396/98 FIRESTOPPING 07270-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate
1. Submit certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with specified
requirements.
2. Label or listing of Underwriters Laboratories will be acceptable evidence.
3. In lieu of label or listing, a written certificate may be submitted from an approved,
nationally recognized testing agency equipped to perform such services, stating that
items submitted have been tested and conform to specified requirements and testing
methods.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to UL or WH for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from Texas Department of Health indicating approval of
materials used.
1.10 MOCKUP
A. Provide mockups of applied firestopping assemblies under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Apply 1 sq ft to a representative substrate surface.
C. Apply firestop material to a representative penetrated masonry, concrete, and stud wall.
D. If accepted, mockup will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work.
E. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery, store and handle products to project site in accordance with requirements of
Section 01600.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60
degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of
materials.
C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Commercially manufactured, non-toxic products as listed in UL 05.
B. Use of fireproofing materials specified in Sections 07255 and 07265 as firestopping is
strictly prohibited.
03860396/98 FIRESTOPPING 07270-2
a
C
i
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
C. Provide "F" and "T" fire resistance ratings for through -penetrations, as described in
paragraph 1.4 DEFINITIONS in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, except that T
Ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to a 4 -inch nominal pipe or
16 square inches in overall cross sectional area.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces.
B. Dam Material: Permanent:
1. Mineral fiberboard or sheet metal.
C. Installation Accessories: Clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other
devices required to position and retain materials in place.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Color: As selected by Architect to match adjacent wall surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may
affect bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.
C. Install backing and/or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping,
ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B. Completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration, subject to tolerance
established by manufacturer.
C. Design firestopping for filling floor voids 4 inches or more in any direction to support the
same load as floor is designed to support, or protect by permanent barrier to prevent loading
or traffic in firestopped area.
D. Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating and to uniform density
and texture.
F. Compress fibered material to achieve a density of 40 percent of its uncompressed density.
G. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
H. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
03860396/98 FIRESTOPPING 07270-3
L.
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I.
h
r�
03860396/98 FIRESTOPPING 07270-4 "�
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES
a
PART 1 GENERAL
k
1.1 SUMMARY
t -A
A.
Section includes granular surfaced asphalt shingle roofing, moisture shedding
underlayment and valley protection.
1. Provide associated metal flashings and accessories.
�..,
B.
Related Sections:
1. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing and framed
openings.
2. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Edge flashings.
1
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
B.
ASTM D228 - Testing Asphalt Roll Roofing, Cap Sheets and Shingles.
C.
ASTM D249 - Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic Felt) Surfaced with Mineral Granules.
D.
ASTM D3161 - Test Method for Wind -Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan -Induced
Method).
E.
ASTM D3462 - Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral
F.
Granules.
ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free.
G.
NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Steep Roofing Manual.
H.
UL 790 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Tests for fire Resistance of Roof Covering
Materials.
1.
UL 997 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Wind Resistance of Shingles.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to UBC UL 790 fire resistance and UL 997 wind uplift for shingle types
specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria,
and limitations.
r,.
C.
Samples: Submit two 6 x 6 inch samples of manufacturer's full color range
1
indicating finish texture/pattern; for color and texture selection'by Architect.
'
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation criteria and procedures.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
is
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r--
A.
Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.
.. 03860396/98 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.6 MOCK-UP
900-9330
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Mock-up requirements.
B. Provide mock-up of 4 sq ft, including eave protection, underlayment, shingle
installation, and associated flashings.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01600 Product Requirements. -
B. Do not install shingles when ambient air temperatures are below 45 degrees F.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Provide 25 year manufacturer warranty for asphalt shingles.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Celotex Corporation.
2. Certain Teed Corporation.
3. Elk Corporation of America.
4. GAF Building Materials Corporation.
5. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp.
6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Product Description: Asphalt shingles conforming to ASTM D3462; UL Rating of C
and Wind Resistance Label, glass fiber mat base, mineral granule surface type; 220
Ib/100 sq ft weight; self sealing type; square 3 tab type, 12 x 36 inch; color and
texture as selected.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Roll Roofing: ASTM D249, Type II; Asphalt saturated roll roofing; 90 lb/square
surfaced on weather side with mineral granules of color same as asphalt shingles.
B. Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type II, unperforated asphalt saturated felts as
recommended for use in waterproofing and in construction of built-up roofs.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type hot dipped zinc coated steel type, of
sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into roof sheathing.
B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I Asphalt type with mineral fiber components,
free of toxic solvents, capable of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of 75
degrees F and 50 percent RH.
C. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of
underlayment, free of toxic solvents.
D. Flashing Materials: As specified in Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal.
03860396/98 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-2 --
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
900-9330
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify roof penetrations are in place and flashed to deck surface.
C. Verify roof openings are correctly framed.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cover knot holes with sheet metal.
B. Broom clean deck surfaces under underlayment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Protective Underlayment Installation:
1. Place one ply of underlayment with ends and edges weather lapped
minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in
place.
2. Place a second ply of underlayment over first layer with ends and edges
weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive
layer. Nail in place.
3. Install protective underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof.
4. Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement items projecting
through or mounted on roof.
B. Valley Protection Installation:
1. Place one layer of sheet metal flashings, minimum 24 inches wide, centered
over open valleys. Weather lap joints minimum 4 inches. Nail in place
minimum 18 inches oc, 1 inch from edges.
C. Metal Flashing and Accessories Installation:
1. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic
cement.
2. Secure in place with nails. Conceal fastenings.
3. Flash and seal work weather tight, projecting through or mounted on roofing
with plastic cement.
D. Asphalt Shingles Installation:
1. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure and
5 inch offset from preceding course to produce double thickness over full
roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.
2. Project first course of shingles 3/8 inch beyond fascia boards.
3. Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fasten.
Extend shingles a minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line to achieve
woven valley, concealing the valley protection.
4. Cap hips and ridges with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather
exposure. Place to avoid exposed nails.
5. Butter back of hip and ridge shingles with plastic cement to prevent lifting.
6. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting
through roof with weather tight placement of Counterflashings.
7. Complete installation to provide weather tight service.
03860396/98 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction.
B. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 07410
PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS
PART1 GENERAL
900-9330
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof insulation.
B. Underlayment
C. Preformed fascia, wall, soffit and roof panels.
D. Associated trim.
f" 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
` A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Substrate construction.
B. Section 06112 -"Sheathing: Roof sheathing.
j C. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Flashing and sheet metal.
D. Section 13120 - Pre -Engineered Structures: Structural frame.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
B. ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
C. ASTM A 792/A - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip
Process.
D. ASTM B 117 - Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.
E. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate.
F. ASTM C 518 - Steady -State Heat flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
G. ASTM C 920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. '
H. ASTM C 991 - Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation for Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings.
I. ASTM C 1289 Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board,
J. ASTM D 522: Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings.
K. ASTM D 523: Specular Gloss.
L. ASTM D 714: Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints.
M. ASTM D 968: Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive.
N. ASTM D 1308: Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic
Finishes.
O. ASTM D 1654 - Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments.
P. ASTM D 1970 - Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as
Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
Q. ASTM D 2244 - Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color
Coordinates.
,, 03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
R. ASTM D 2247 - Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100 Percent Relative
Humidity.
S. ASTM D 3359 - Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
T. ASTM D 4214 - Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.
U. ASTM E 84 - Surface burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
V. ASTM E 96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
W. ASTM E 283 - Air Infiltration
X. ASTM E 331 - Water Penetration
Y. ASTM E 1592 - Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roofing and Siding Systems by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
Z. ASTM E 4587 - Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials Using
a Fluorescent UV -Condensation Light- and Water -Exposure Apparatus.
AA. SMACNA: "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
BB. UL 580: Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ..,
A. Design the Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roof System (SSSMRS) as a complete system
including members and connections not indicated on the drawings to comply with
ASTM El 592 for structural panels and Class 90 as defined in UL 580 for architectural
panels.
B. Loading Criteria: Design in accordance with ASCE 7-95, unless otherwise specified,
and the following:
1. Dead Load: Actual weights of the SSSMRS components as determined by
manufacturer.
2. Concentrated Loads
a. Panels and Concealed Anchor Clips: Capable of resisting a 300 -pound
concentrated load at midspan on a 12 -inch wide section of deck.
b. Panels: Capable of supporting combined dead load and concentrated load
without buckling or permanent distortions.
c. Panel Deflection: Nol greater than 1 /180th of span between supports.
3. Live Loads: Roof snow loadings given on drawings.
4. Wind Uplift Loads
a. Computed and applied using criteria on drawings.
b. Uplift Force for each Connection Assembly: Pressure given for area under
consideration, multiplied by tributary load area of connection assembly, and
multiplied by appropriate factor of safety, as follows:
(1). Single fastener in each connection: 3.0
(2). Two or more fasteners in each connection: 2.25
5. Thermal Loads: 200 degree total temperature range during life of structure.
C. Accessories and Fasteners
1. Capable of resisting specified design wind uplift loads with allowance for
expansion and contraction movement of roof panel system resulting from thermal
changes.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS r,
A. Panel Finish
1. Salt Spray Test
a.. Withstand salt spray test for minimum of 1000 hours in accordance with
ASTM B 117, including scribe requirement in test.
03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-2 --
r-
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX900-9330
b. Receive a rating of 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714
immediately upon removal of panel from test, and rating of 10, no edge
creep failure at scribe, as determined by ASTM D 1654.
2. Formability Test: No evidence of fracturing to naked eye when subjected to a
180 -degree bend over a 1/8 -inch or 3t whichever is greater diameter mandrel in
accordance with ASTM D 522.
3. 2000 Hour Accelerated Weathering Requirements
a. Test Conformance: ASTM G 23 using a Type D apparatus.
b. No cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of protective coating, or
f" corrosion of base metal.
i
C. Loss of Adhesion: Protective coating that can be readily removed from base
metal with tape in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B.
►�. d. Chalking: Not greater than No. 8 rating in accordance with ASTM D 4214
test procedures.
e. Color Change: Maximum 2 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D 4214 and
ASTM D 2244 test procedures.
4. Humidity Test: No signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion when
scored panel subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D
2247 for 1000 hours.
5. Impact Resistance: Withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with
y ASTM D 2794 equal to 1.5 times metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch -
pounds, with no loss of adhesion.
!� 6. Abrasion Resistance Test: Withstand a minimum of 50 liters of sand before
appearance of base metal when subjected to falling sand test in accordance with
ASTM D 968.
7. Specular Gloss: Specular gloss of 25 to 35 at an angle of 60 degrees when
measured in accordance with ASTM D 523.
8. Pollution Resistance: No visual effects when immersion tested in a 10 percent
hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308.
j" B. Wind Uplift
1. Test for wind uplift in accordance with ASTM E 1592 for SSSMR systems and UL
580 for architectural panels.
C. Insulation
i 1. R -value: Determined at an mean temperature of 75 degrees F in accordance with
ASTM C 518.
2. Flame Spread/Smoke Development: Not to exceed 0-25/0-450 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials
1. Obtain roof panels, components, transitions, and assemblies from same
manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications
1. Manufacturer having a minimum of three years experience in manufacturing
panels,of this nature.
C. Installer's Qualifications
1. Installation of panels and accessories by installers with a minimum of three years
experience in panel projects of this nature and approved by Manufacturer.
-- 03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1.8 SUBMITTALS,
A. Shop Drawings
1. Indicate methods of erection, elevations, .plans of roof, fascia, soffit, and wall
panels, sections and details, anticipated loads, flashings, roof curbs, vents,
sealants, interfaces with adjacent construction, identification of component parts
and their finishes and insulation support strap spacing and liner fabric sizes and
locations.
B. Product Data
1. Submit data on components, fasteners, performance characteristics, finishes,
insulation vapor barrier, insulation support system and all appurtenances.
C. Samples
1. Submit samples and color chips for all proposed finishes. r -
a. Submit one 12 in. long sample of each type of panel, including clips and
battens.
b. Submit three 2 in. x 3 in. color chip samples of each color selected by
Architect.
C. Submit three 12 x 12 inch samples of vapor barriers including seam.
D. Calculations
1. Submit engineering calculations defining roof and wall system loads based on
requirements specified and indicated on the drawings, allowable clip loads and
required type and number of fasteners per clip.
2. Compute uplift loads on clip fasteners with full recognition of prying forces and
eccentric clip loading.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle panels, trim, insulation, vapor barrier and associated products
in conformance with Section 01600.
B. Deliver panels, trim, insulation, vapor barrier and associated products to jobsite properly
packaged to provide protection against transportation damage.
C. Exercise extreme care in unloading, storing and erecting panels and trim to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, end and surface damage.
D. Store all material and accessories above ground on well skidded platforms. Slope
panels to drain all water accumulation.
E. Store panels, trim, insulation and vapor barrier under waterproof covering.
F. Provide proper ventilation to panels and trim to prevent condensation build-up between
each panel or trim/flashing component.
G. Do not store panels and trim in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting or other surface damage.
1.10 , WARRANTY
A. Furnish in conformance with Section 01700.
B. Warranty covering bare metal against rupture, structural failure, and perforation due to
normal atmospheric corrosion exposure for a period of 20 years.
C. Warranty for panel finish against cracking, checking, blistering, peeling, flaking,
chipping, chalking and fading for a period of twenty (20) years for wall panels and
twenty (20) years for roof panels.
D. Weathertightness Warranty: Warrant roof against water leaks for 20 years.
03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-4
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Panels
1.
AEP/Span Metals Corp. - Dallas, TX.
2.
Alumax Corp. - Mesquite, TX.
3.
Centria Roof Systems - Moon Township, PA.
4.
MBCI - Grand Prairie, TX.
B.
Panel
Closures
1.
East Coast Fasteners and Closures, Inc; Elkhart Lake, WI.
C.
Pipe Flashings
1.
Construction Fasteners; Wyomissing, PA.
2.
East Coast Fasteners and Closures, Inc; Elkhart Lake, WI.
3.
ITW Buildex; Itasca, IL.
D.
Insulation Vapor Barrier
1.
Reef Industries, Inc.; Houston, TX.
2.
Thermal Design, Inc.; Madison, NE.
E.
Flexible Insulation
1.
Certainteed Corporation; Valley Forge PA.
2.
Insulation Corporation of America; Olathe, KN.
3.
Manville Corporation; Denver, CO.
4.
Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation; Toledo, OH.
5.
Thermal Design, Inc.; Madison, NE.
F.
Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
900-9330
Roof and Wall Panels and Trim: Steel Sheet complying with ASTM A792/A, AZ50
coating per triple -spot test, structural grade 50.
Soffit Panels: Aluminum sheet complying with ASTM 8209.
Fastener clips: ASTM A653, G90 coating, structural quality grade 50, gage as required
for design loads specified.
Sealant: One -part polyurethane complying with ASTM C920. Color as selected by
Architect for exposed areas.
Tape Sealant
1. Manufacturer's standard double bead and triple bead pressure sensitive, 100
percent solids, polyisobutylene compound with a release paper backing.
Fasteners
1. Equal to Construction Fasteners, Inc. long life ZAC fasteners designed to
withstand design loads specified.
Underlayment
1. Self -adhering type: ASTM D1970, minimum 40 mils thick.
2. Organic type: ASTM D2178, Type 1.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822 Type 1, cutback asphalt type.
Insulation
1. Rigid Board: ASTM C1013, Polyisocyanurate rigid board, both faces finished with
non -asphaltic glass matt, with the following characteristics:
a. Density: 2.0 Ib/cu ft.
b. Size: 48x96 inch.
c. Thickness: As required to obtain minimum R-19.
d. Thermal Conductivity: K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM 177.
e. Edges: Square
�-- 03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-6
j,
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
2. Flexible Insulation
a. Conformance: ASTM C 991, Type 1.
b. R -Value: Minimum R-19.
J. Vapor Barrier
1. Material: Woven reinforced high-density polyethylene yarns coated on both sides
with a continuous polyethylene film.
2. Flame Spread/Smoke Development: 0-25/0-50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Perm Rating: 0.025 grains/hr. sq.ft. based on ASTM E96.
4. Color: Manufacturer's standard white.
K. Insulation: Support System
1. Strapping: ASTM A653, .015 x 3/4 inch x continuous length of building, gray
color on exposed side.
2. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer's, painted to match strapping.
L. Thermal Spacer: Panel or insulation manufacturer's standard 3/8 x 3 inch compressible
spacer with self adhering backing tape.
M. Closure Strips
1. Type: Closed cell polyethylene foam with integral top glue bead.
2. Density: 2.0 lbs./cubic foot closed cell polyethylene foam.
3. Thickness: 2 inches.
4. Webb Thickness: 1/4 inch minimum.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard.
6. Profile: To match panel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Roll form panels in continuous lengths, full length of detailed runs.
2. Fabricate trim, flashing and accessories to manufacturer's standard profile or as
detailed on drawings.
3. Fabricate trim and flashing from same material as panel.
4. Fabricate snap -on battens and panel clips with a factory applied hot -melt mastic.
B. Type I Roof Panels
1. Profile
a.: 2 in. high x 3/8 in. wide (High Batten) x 16.5 in. wide.
2. Style
a. Snap -on batten with concealed fasteners.
3. Gage: 24.
4. Finish: Smooth.
C. Type If Panels
1. Profile --
a. 3 in. high x 3/8 in. wide.(Small Batten) x 24 in. wide.
2. Style
a. Trapezoidal rib, double lock standing seam with concealed fasteners. ►*
3. Gage: 24.
4. Finish: Smooth.
D. Wall Panels
1. Profile ~`
a. 36 inch wide girth panel with 3/4 in. high tapered ribs spaced at 6 inches on
center.
2. Style .�
a. Exposed fastener, standing seam.
3. Gage: 24.
4. Finish: Smooth, solid panel.
03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-6
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX900-9330
D. Length: Sufficient to cover entire length of any unbroken roof slope.
E. Fascia: Manufacturer's standard trim except as otherwise detailed.
F. Soffit
1. Profile: 3/8 in. high x 12 in. wide with single 'V' groove centered in panel width.
2. Style: Concealed fastener; perforated panel, minimum 20 percent open.
3. Finish: Smooth.
G. Curbs and Equipment Supports
1. Fabricate from structural quality aluminum or aluminum sheet with mitered and
welded corner joints, factory primed and prepared for field painiting.
2. Provide integral base plates and water diverters/crickets.
3. Fabricate with front base plate a minimum of 15 inches from beginning of
diverter/cricket to end of base plate.
4. Fabricate to install under metal roof system on high side and over metal roof
system on low side.
5. Fabricate to match slope of roof with top of curb a minimum of 8 inches above
finished metal roof system.
H. Roof Jacks
1. Fabricate from one piece EPDM with a serviceable temperture range from -65
degrees F to 250 degrees F.
2. Provide with aluminum flanged base ring capable of being field bent to conform
to panel contour.
I. Fabricate vapor barrier into one piece to fit building area. Extrusion weld seams.
J. Finish
1. Panels and Trim
a. Primer: As recommended by exterior paint manufacturer, minimum 1 mil
thick.
b. Interior: Manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride, 1 mit thick.
C. Exterior: Premium fluorocarbon coating produced with Kynar-500 resin.
2. Exposed Fasteners
a. Factory applied coating to match panel finish.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
a. Wall Panels:
1) Interior: Manufacturer's standard white.
2) Exterior: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
b. Type I Roof Panels:
1) Interior: Manufacturer's standard white.
2) Exterior: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
c. Type II Roof Panels:
1) Interior: Manufacturer's standard white.
2) Exterior: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
d. Fascia: Interior -Manufacturer's standard white; Exterior As selected by
Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
e. Soffit: White.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point
where this work may continue.
B. Verify that installation may be made in accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturer's instructions.
L-- 03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 07410-7
E
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Insulation
1. Rigid Insulation
a. Install insulation with continuous coating of bitumen adhesive on each top
flute of metal decking, in accordance with insulation manufacturer's
instructions. '
b. Cut insulation to fit neatly around penetrations through roof.
C. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing.
d. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with roofing panels in same
day.
2. Blanket Insulation
a. Install insulation, vapor barrier and strapping system in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Underlayment
1. Over Rigid Insulation r
a. Starting at eave, apply self -adhering underlayment directly to insulation with
long edges perpendicularly to slope.
b. Weather lap edges 2 inches and end joints 6 inches.
2. Over Plywood Decking
a. Starting at eave, apply organic underlayment with long edges perpendicularly
to slope.
b. Weather lap edges and end joints 6 inches.
C. Nail in place with no. 3 nails thru 2 inch diameter tin caps spaced at maximum
18 inches on center along edges and in center.
C. Panels
1. Install panels weathertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or
distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction.
2. Install panels battens, eave closure, and trim in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions and shop drawings.
3. Provide concealed anchors at all roof panel attachment locations. Provide a
minimum of two fasteners per clip; single fasteners will be allowed when the
supporting structural members are prepunched or predrilled. .--
4. Install panels plumb, level, and straight with seams and ribs/battens parallel,
conforming to design as indicated.
5. Square -cut all sheets.
6. When length of run exceeds maximum panel length available and panel splices are
provided, extend each sheet in run over three or more supports.
7. Roll standing seams of Type 1 roofing panels with an electrically driven seaming
machine during installation.
8. Shop cut gable end wall sheets to correspond to roof slope and provide horizontal
joint level with eave line.
9. Install double tape sealant at all eave closures, ridge closures and elsewhere as
recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Fasteners
1. Locate and space all exposed fasteners in a true vertical and horizontal alignment.
2. Use proper torque settings to obtain controlled uniform compression for a positive
seal without rupturing the neoprene washer.
E. Roof Curbs
1. Apply triple bead tape seal to both up and down-slope flanges.
2. Anchor curb to roofing to resist thermal and structural loads.
F. Roof Jacks
1. Install only in flat pan area of panels. Do not install through panel seams. --
03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS 1 07410-8
i
7m
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.3 CLEANING, PROTECTION
A. Clean work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Protect work against damage until final acceptance.
C. Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Architect, any work that becomes damaged
prior to final acceptance.
D. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions.
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Roof Panels
1. Provide Type I roof panels at Maintenance Building.
2. Provide Type II roof panels at all other locations.
B. Wall Panels
1. Provide at locations indicated.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 PREFORMED ROOF AND WALL PANELS
07410-9
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 07533
THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
%�T<m
A. Drawings and General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mechanically fastened sheet roofing.
B. Roof insulation.
C. Walkway pads.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 01039 - Contract Considerations: Alternates.
B. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers and curbs.
C. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings and counterf lashings.
D. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Division 15 and 16 Sections "Plumbing Specialties" for roof drains.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet membrane roofing and base flashing that are watertight; will not permit
the passage of liquid water; and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and
exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing system
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. FM Listing: Provide sheet membrane, base flashings, and component materials that meet
equivalent requirements of FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are
listed in FM's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable.
Identify materials with FM markings.
1. Roofing system: Comply with Fire/Windstorm: Class IIA -90.
D. Roofing System Design: Provide a single -ply roofing system that complies with roofing
system manufacturer's written design instructions and with SPRI's "Wind Design Guide for
Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that
materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details of the following:
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is
approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system.
03860396198 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r..
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that the roofing system
complies with requirements specified in the "Performance Requirements" Article. Upon
request, submit evidence of meeting requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information ..
specified.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of components of
roofing system with requirements based on comprehensive testingof current product
compositions.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of roofing system's compliance with building code
in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
I. Warranty: Sample copy of standard roofing system manufacturer's warranty stating
obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project for a minimum of five
years and who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to
install manufacturer's product.
B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire -test -response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
below by UL, FM, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class- A; 'ASTM E 108, for application and slopes
indicated.
2. Fire -Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire -resistance -rated roof' assemblies of
which roofing materials are a part.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Before installing roofing system, conduct conference at Project
site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings. Notify participants �.
at least 5 working days before conference.
1. Meet with Architect; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative;
deck Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including
installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, '—
including flatness and fastening.
4. Review loading limitations of deck during and after roofing.
5. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment ._.
curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and
inspection and testing, if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after r
installation.
03860396/98 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-2
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX900-9330
I 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures or actions required, and furnish
,., copy of record to each participant.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions
for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid materials from direct sunlight.
C. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
D. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
E. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and
warranty requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
I A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
-� be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Standard Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty, without monetary
limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair leaks resulting
from defects in materials or workmanship for a warranty period of 15 years.
E C. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including membrane roofing, sheet
flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, and vapor retarders, if any, for a warranty period of 2
F` years from date of Substantial Completion.
i
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Sheet:
1. Carlisle Syntec Systems; Carlisle Corp.
2. . HPG Roofing Systems.
3. JPS Elastomerics Corp.; Roofing Systems Division.
4. Versico, Inc.
r B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:
` 1. Apache Products Co.
2. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
�.. 3. Celotex Corp. (The).
03860396/98 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-3
A""
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
4. GAF Materials Corp.
5. NRG Barriers, Inc.
C. Perlite Board Insulation:
1. GAF Materials Corp.
2. Manville Roofing Systems.
2.2 MATERIAL
A. Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible elastomer sheet formed from
a thermoplastic polyolefin, reinforced, of the following thickness, exposed face color, and
physical properties:
1. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal.
2. Exposed Face Color: White.
3. Physical Properties: Provide reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheets with the
following properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated:
a. Breaking Strength: 225 Ibf; ASTM D 751, grab method.
b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751.
C. Tearing Strength: 55 Ibf minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B.
d. Resistance to Heat Aging: No reduction in breaking strength, elongation at
break, and tearing strength after 168 hours at 240 deg F; ASTM D 573.
e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after 168 hours' exposure of 50 percent elongated
sample at 100 deg F and 100-pphm ozone; ASTM D 1149, Procedure B.
f. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 168 hours' immersion
at 158 deg F; ASTM D 471.
g. Weather Resistance: No cracks or crazing after 4000 hours' exposure to
xenon -arc; ASTM G 26.
B. Auxiliary Materials
1. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with membrane roofing material.
a. Furnish liquid -type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type,
thickness, and color as sheet membrane.
3. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.
4. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion -resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening sheet to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
5. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T -joint covers, seam
calk, termination reglets, and other accessories recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for intended use.
C. Insulation
1. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements,
selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.
2. Provide preformed, tapered insulation boards where indicated for sloping to drain.
Fabricate with 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate 1/4 inch per foot to slope.
4. Type A Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid,' cellular polyisocyanurate
thermal insulation with core formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to comply with
ASTM C 1289, Type 11, felt or glass -fiber mat on both major surfaces.
03860396/98 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-4
k
4
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
5. Type B Insulation: Perlite Board Insulation: Rigid, mineral -aggregate thermal insulation
board composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing
agents with top surface seal -coated, complying with ASTM C 728.
6. Insulation Accessories
a. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation
manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet roofing material.
b. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion -resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening roof
insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
D. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV.
E. Walkways
1. Walkway Pads: Roofing system manufacturer's standard reinforced heat weldable pads
with slip -resistant texture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements.
B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are properly clamped into position.
C. Verify that wood nailers are in place and secured and match thicknesses of insulation
required.
D. Do not proceed with installation until after the minimum concrete curing period recommended
by roofing system manufacturer.
E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is
taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of the roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain
is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Insulation
1. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
2. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
3. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated and to
Shop Drawings.
4. Install one or more layers of Type A or B (at Contractor's option) insulation under area
of roofing to achieve a minimum R value of 19.
03860396/98 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-5
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
5.
Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install required thickness in
2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous
layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. �.
6.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush
and does not restrict flow of water.
7.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end
joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards.
8.
Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
9.
Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
10.
Attached first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically
designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type
indicated. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing
asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature and at a rate --
required by insulation manufacturer.
11.
Fasten insulation according to the insulation and roofing system manufacturers' written
instructions to meet specified wind -uplift requirements, but not less than 1 fastener for _
each 4 sq. ft. and at least 2 fasteners per board.
B. Membrane
1.
Install thermoplastic sheet over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for a minimum of '-
30 minutes.
2.
Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082.
3.
Start installation of sheet in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
4.
Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
5.
_
Mechanically fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
6.
Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. -
7.
Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing
sheet in place with clamping ring. "
S.
Secure one edge of the sheet using fastening plates or battens centered within the
membrane seam and mechanically fasten sheet to roof deck. Field -weld seam
according to "Seam Installation" Article.
C. Seaming
1.
Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and weld side and end laps of sheets and flashings
according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam
installation. Weld seam with hot air.
2.
Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply seam calk to seal cut
edges of sheet membrane.
3.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.
D. Flashing
1.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrate
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. --
2.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate
and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
3.
Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing as
recommended by manufacturer.
4.
Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings Into the adhesive. Weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
5.
Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.
6.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars. .-
03860396/98
THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-6
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
t E. Walkways
1. Install walkway pads in locations indicated. Heat weld or adhere walkway pads to
�,.. substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and repair seam sample areas.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
C. Notify Architect 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection.
3.5 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period.
B. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect.
C. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
D. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
required by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.6 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS <NAME> of <ADDRESS>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed
x'- roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
t
1. Owner:
2. Address:
3. Building Name/Type:
4. Address:
5. Area of Work:
6. Acceptance Date:
7. Warranty Period:
8. Expiration Date:
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as
*^ a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause
to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty
` and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
►— b. peak gust wind speed exceeding <INSERT WIND SPEED> mph (m/sec);
C. fire;
d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
.., deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
i
03860396/98 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-7
r'
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys; skylights, vents,
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and
expense thereof has been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. The Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but
is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents, resulting from
leaks or faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than ^-
Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with
penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this
Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent _
said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing
Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void, unless
Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing,
showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or
deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this
Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change _
affects work covered by this Warranty.
6. The Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected
leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing
Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or
deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work
and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources �-
lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall
not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <DAY> day of
<MONTH>, 19<YEAR>.
1. Authorized Signature:
2. Name:
3. Title: _
END OF SECTION 07533 Y
03860396/98 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07533-8
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 07536
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
900-9330
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Modified bitumen membrane roofing with protective coating, insulation, base flashings,
and cant strips.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Alternates
B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Roof deck substrate.
C. Section 05313 - Steel Roof Deck: Roof deck substrate.
D. Section 06112 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.
E. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal flashings associated with
roof system..
F. Division 15 and 16 Sections: Roof mounted equipment and penetrations.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C177 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means
of the Guarded Hot Plate.
B. ASTM C208 - Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber), Structural and Decorative.
C. ASTM C518 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means
of the Heat Flow Meter.
D. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board.
E. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board.
F. ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
G. ASTM D312 - Asphalt Used in Roofing.
H. ASTM D2178 - Asphalt, Glass Felt, Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
I. ASTM D3747 - Emulsified Asphalt Adhesive for Adhering Roof Insulation.
J. ASTM D4586 Asphalt Roof Cement - Asbestos Free.
K. ULI - Fire Hazard Classifications.
L. ULI - Roof Assembly Classification
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Two ply modified bitumen membrane system with insulation installed to
withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and
exposure to weather, without failure within the guaranteed time period.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
�-- 03860396/98 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-1
4
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate roof penetrations, crickets, layout of seams, direction of laps, base and
counter flashing details.
2. Tapered insulation manufacturer's drawings indicating piece marks, filler pieces and
slopes.
C. Product Data:
1. Provide for anchoring devices, membrane materials, base flashing materials,
insulation and bituminous materials.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required for
seaming the membrane.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures and wind velocity during
application, and bitumen temperature at kettle and at application point.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Single Source
1. Provide primary products, including but not limited to, base sheet, ply sheet,
membrane, bitumen and membrane flashings from a single manufacturer.
2. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products
for use with roofing system specified.
C. Insulation k Values
1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg F.
2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with
RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with five years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with three years
documented experience and approved by membrane system manufacturer.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable UBC -1997 for roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
B. UL Listing: Provide modified bituminous sheet roofing system and component materials
that have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (ULI) for Class A external fire exposure.
1. Provide roof -covering materials bearing ULI classification marking on bundle,
package, or container indicating that materials have been produced under ULI's
Classification and Follow-up Service.
C. Wind Uplift: Provide a system with wind uplift resistance complying with ULI Class 60.
1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of
Section 01039.
B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work.
03860396/98 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-2
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
f
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
r... A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
` B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels
i_
intact.
C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
r' D. Stand roll materials on end.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather nor when ambient temperature
is below 40 degrees F.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface.
C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than
can be weatherproofed during same day.
1.13 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the work with installing associated metal flashings as the work of this section
proceeds.
1.14 WARRANTY
' A. Provide manufacturer's standard fifteen year NDL (no dollar limit) warranty under
provisions of Section 01700.
B. Warranty: Cover damage to building resulting from failure to prevent penetration of
water.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Roofing Membrane
1. Manville Roofing Systems; Denver, CO.
2. GAF Building Materials Corp.; Wayne, NJ.
3. Siplast, Inc.; Irving, TX.
B. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
r 2.2 MATERIALS
.., A. Base Sheet: SBS modified asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, with glass fiber
reinforced mat, dusted with fine granular surfacing and averaging or exceeding 75
Ib/100 sq. ft. minimum.
B. Insulation
1. Type A Insulation: ASTM C1289, Polyisocyanurate rigid board, Type Il, both faces
finished with asphaltic coated glass mat both faces, with the following
characteristics:
�^ a. Board Density 2.0 Ib/cu ft.
b. Board Size 48x96 inch.
c. Board Thickness minimum 1 inch.
k.
r- 03860396/98 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07636-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
900-9330
d. Thermal Conductivity Conditioned k factor of 0.17 as determined by
ASTM C518.
e. Board Edges square
2. Type B Insulation: ASTM C208, Cellulose fiber roof insulating board, with the
following characteristics:
a. Board Density 20.4 Ib/cu ft.
b. Board Size 48x96 inch.
C. Board Thickness 1/2 inch.
d. Thermal Conductivity k factor of 0.38 as determined by ASTM C177.
e. Board Edges square
3. Type C Insulation: ASTM C728, expanded perlite mineral aggregate board with the
following characteristics:
a. Board Density 9.0 lb/cu ft.
b. Board Size 48x96 inch.
C. Board Thickness minimum 3/4 inch.
d. Thermal Conductivity k factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C177.
e. Board Edges square
4. Tapered Insulation: Provide tapered insulation with a minimum slope of 1/4 inch
per foot with a minimum thickness of %: inch.
Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type,
reinforced with non -woven polyester fabric; white ceramic granule surfaced; with
characteristics complying with ASTM D5147 as follows:
1. Thickness: 150 mils minimum
2. Average Weight: 1.0 minimum Ib/sq ft
3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches
4. Tensile Strength
a. At 0 .deg. F: 181 lbs/in (MD); 135 lbs/in (CD).
5. Elongation to Break
a. At 0 deg. F: 53 percent (MD); 59 percent (CD).
6. Tear Strength: 185 lbf (MD); 139 Ibf (CD).
7. Dimensional Stability: Less than 0.8 percent.
8. Low Temperature Flexibility: Less than 15 deg. F.
Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type III.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822 Type I, cutback asphalt type.
Insulation Adhesive: ASTM D3747, Type I.
Flashings
1. Flexible Flashings: Manufacturer's standard SBS type conforming to the same
requirements as the membrane.
2. Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07600.
3. Prefabricated Expansion Joint Flashing.
a. Sheet butyl over closed cell foam with a bifurcated waterproof attachment to
metal flanges with an integral vapor retarder and insulation system.
b. Metal Flanges: 26 ga. Galvanized steel.
C. Bellows Width: 4 inch.
d. Metal Flanges: Minimum 4 inch wide, style as required by roofing conditions
indicated.
e. Transitions: Manufacturer's standard prefabricated type, same material as
expansion joint.
Accessories
1. Fiber Cant: Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, preformed to 45
degree angle.
2. Tapered Edge Strip. Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, 1 1/2 inches
high x 18 inches wide x manufacturer's standard length.
03860396/98 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-4
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3. Insulation Fasteners: Factory coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates
complying with corrosion resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fasteneing
roofing insulation to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
4. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit
application.
5. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify deck is supported and secured.
C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Verify flutes of metal deck are
clean and dry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Insulation
1. Over metal decking, mechanically attach base layer of Type A or C (at Contractor's
option with membrane manufacturer's approval) insulation, in accordance with
insulation manufacturer's instructions and wind uplift requirements specified.
2. Install tapered insulation in accordance with approved tapered insulation shop
drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
3. In full mopping of hot bitumen, install constant thickness top layer of either Type
B or Type C (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval)
insulation with all joints staggered from joints in first layer of insulation by a
minimum of 6 inches.
4. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through
roof.
5. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing.
6. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.
7. Minimum Total Insulation Thickness: As required to achieve a minimum R value of
19.
B. Membrane Application
1. Over Type B or C insulation, install SBS base sheet in full mopping of hot bitumen.
2. Over base sheet, install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof.
4. Apply membrane smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears.
5. Ensure full bond of membrane to substrate.
6. Extend membrane up cant strips and minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces.
7. Mop and seal membrane around roof protrusions and penetrations.
B. Provide waterproof cut-off to membrane at end of day's operation. Remove cut-off
before resuming roofing.
C. Membrane Flashings and Accessories
1. Apply flexible sheet base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements.
2. Secure to substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
3. Install prefabricated roofing expansion joints to isolate roof into areas as indicated.
4. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating or protruding through the
membrane.
�.. 03860396/98 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
Y
07536-5
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
D. Surfacing
1. Apply granular surfacing, matching membrane surfacing, as recommended by
manufacturer to completely cover all lap joints in membrane.
E. Roof Walkway Pads
1. At locations indicated on the drawings, install second layer of membrane for
walkway pads.
2. Apply granular membrane surfacing as recommended by manufacturer to
completely cover all edges at walkway pads.
F. Parapet Flashing
1. Masonry and Gypsum Sheathed Parapets
a. Prime masonry substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
b. Extend membrane up and onto top of parapet as recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
C. Coping Flashing: Installation as specified in Section 07600 —SHEET METAL.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01410.
B. Correct identified defects or irregularities.
3.4 CLEANING
A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer
of surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces.
END OF SECTION
03860396198 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07536-6
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 07600
SHEET METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coping flashings.
B. Fascias, scuppers, and sealant pockets.
C. Thru-wall scupper and conductor head.
D. Flashing receiver and cap flashing over bituminous base flashings.
E. Counterf lashings for roof hatches.
F. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks.
G. Gutters and downspouts.
H. Sheet metal splash pans.
1. Concrete splash blocks.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Thru-wall flashing, placement of flashing receivers and
substrate construction.
B. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Wood nailers and substrate construction.
C. Section 07311 - Asphalt Shingles: Shingle roofing.
D. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Roofing system.
E. Section 07724 - Roof Hatches: Insulated metal curbs.
F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
G. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Sill flashings associated with doors
and storefronts.
H. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Sill flashings associated with windows.
I. Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting.
J. Section 10212 - Metal Wall Louvers: Sill flashings associated with louvers.
K. Division 15 Section: Roof curbs for mechanical equipment.
L. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical items protruding through
roofing membrane.
M. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for plumbing items protruding through
roofing membrane.
N. Division 16 Section: Roof curbs for electrical equipment.
O. Division 16 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for electrical items protruding through
roofing membrane.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated by
the Hot -Dip Process.
B. ATM A755/A755M - Steel Sheet, Metallic coated by the Hot -Dip Process and Prepainted
by the Coil -Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products.
C. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process.
03860396/98 SHEET METAL 07600-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
D. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal
E. ASTM B486 - Paste Solder.
F. ASTM 8749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products.
G. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board
H. ASTM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
I. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free.
J. FS TT -C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant.
K. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual
L. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening
methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and
characteristics.
D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical external and internal
coping corner, indicating jointing methods.
E. Submit four samples 2 x 3 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. '-
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA and NRCA standard details and requirements.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable UBC code as indicated on drawings for size and method of rain
water discharge.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with five years
documented experience.
1.9 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section
01039.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to
provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate with the work of Section 04200 and 06112 for installing flashing receivers.
.C. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet.
03860396198 SHEET METAL 07600-2
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
/
A. Preformed Accessories
1. Cheney Flashing Co.;
-. 2. Keystone Flashing Co;.
3. Metal -Era Inc; Waukesha, WI.
B. Prefinished Metal
1. MBCI - Grand Prairie, Texas
1 2. AEP/Span Metals Corp., Dallas, Texas
3. Alumax Corp., Mesquite, Texas
r., C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 zinc coating; 26 gage thick steel, except as
otherwise indicated in schedule at end of this section.
B. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A755/A755M using ASTM A653/A653M, G90
zinc coated sheet; 26 gage thick steel except as otherwise indicated in schedule at end of
this section, pre -coated with PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) coating.
C. Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 Ib/sq ft.
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, same finish as flashing metal, with soft
neoprene washers.
B. Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type II asphalt saturated roofing felt.
C. Primer: Zinc molybate type.
D. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous type conforming to FS -TT -C-494.
E. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900.
F. Bedding Compound: Rubber -asphalt type.
G. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type IL
H. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by fabricator of same
material as gutter and downspout.
1. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered.
M. Paste Solder: ASTM B486; type suitable for application and material being soldered.
N. Touch-up Paint: To match factory finish.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, of sizes and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi
at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment complying with requirements of
section 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
B. Tapered Edge Strip: ASTM C728; minimum %a inch thick, tapered to match coping flashing
profile, same width as parapet.
2.4 FABRICATION
�-~ A. General
1. Fabricate sheet metal items in accordance with SMACNA details indicated in
paragraph SCHEDULE at the end of this section unless otherwise indicated on the
,.., drawings.
-- 03860396/98 SHEET METAL 07600-3
i
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
B.
C.
Q
E.
F.
Ccl
In
900-9330
2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or
defects.
3. Fabricate cleats of ASTM A653, G90 sheet metal.
4. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
5. Fabricate with required connection pieces.
6. Hem exposed edges on underside % inch; miter and seam corners.
7. Solder shop formed galvanized steel metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe
and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints.
8. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward Y2 inch and hemmed to
form drip.
Fabricate all exposed sheet metal from prefinshed galvanized steel sheet.
Fabricate all concealed sheet metal and sheet metal hidden from normal view from
galvanized steel.
Splash Pans
1. ASTM A653, galvanized steel, formed to 12 x 18 inches size! rolled sides of 2 inch
high for inverted pan placement.
Sealant Pans
1. ASTM A653, galvanized steel, formed with minimum 2 inch horizontal distance from
penetrating item, with 3 inch upstand, and 4 inch flanges.
2. Form top edge with continuous 45 degree backbend, minimum 114 inch long, facing
toward inside of pan.
Gutters
1. Fabricate gutter to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section.
2. Provide expansion joint at maximum 40 feet on center unless otherwise indicate on
drawings.
3. Form metal and seal watertight.
4. Size: 4 inch width x 4 inch front height.
5. Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts.
Downspouts
1. Fabricate downspouts to profile indicated on drawings.
2. Fabricate bottom of downspout with 45 -degree turn -out with 3 inch long top face.
3. Form metal and seal watertight.
4. Downspout Size: 4 inch wide x 4 inch deep.
5. Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts.
Coping Flashings
1. Fabricate cap -flashing to profile indicated on drawings.
2. Fabricate cap flashings with integral slope tapering 1 inch from front to back unless
otherwise required by slope of tapered insulation filler or otherwise indicated on
drawings.
3. Provide minimum 4 inch vertical leg unless otherwise indicated on drawings, on front
side with continuous cleat.
4. Provide minimum 3 inch vertical leg on back side.
5. Fabricate inside and outside corners with continuously factory welded or mechanically
seamed and sealed joints. Provide finish to match remainder of cap flashing.
2.5 FINISH
A. Field painting of expose metal: As specified in section 09900 - PAINTING.
B. Prefinished Metal: Fluoropolymer coating produced with Kynar-500 resin complying with
the following:
1. Salt Spray Test
a. Withstand salt spray test for a minimum of 1000 hours in accordance with
ASTM B 117, including scribe requirement in test.
03860396/98 SHEET METAL 07600-4
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
b. Receive a rating of 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714 immediately
upon removal of panel from test, and rating of 7, 1/16 -inch failure at scribe, as
determined by AttM D 1654:
2. Formability Test: No evidence of fracturing to naked eye when subjected to a 180 -
degree bend over a 3/8 -inch diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D 522.
3. 2000 Hour Accelerated Weathering Requirements
a. Test Conformance: ASTM G 23 using a Type D apparatus.
b. No cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of protective coating, or
corrosion of base metal.
C. Loss of Adhesion: Protective coating that can be readily removed from base
metal with tape in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B.
d. Chalking: Not greater than No. 8 rating in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test
procedures.
e. Color Change: Maximum 2 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D 4214 and
ASTM D 2244 test procedures.
4. Humidity Test: No signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion when scored
panel subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000
hours.
5. Impact Resistance: Withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM
D 2794 equal to 1.5 times metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch -pounds, with no
loss of adhesion.
6. Abrasion Resistance Test: Withstand a minimum of 80 liters of sand before
appearance of base metal when subjected to falling sand test in accordance with
ASTM D 968.
7. Pollution Resistance: No visual effects when immersion tested in a 10 percent
hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308.
8. Color
a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
C. Exposed Fasteners: Factory finished to match color of item being fastened.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set,
reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to details on drawings and details included in the SMACNA and NRCA manual.
B. Apply bituminous protective backing on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials to a
minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
C. Fill back of cap flashing with plastic roofing cement.
D. Backbed lap joints of flashings in horizontal position.
E. Insert cap flashing into flashing receiver to form tight fit. Bend top of flashing receiver
down over cap flashing without hammer marks, dents or other visual distractions.
F. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
F03860396/98 SHEET METAL 07600-5
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
G.
Coping Flashing
1. Install with front edge engaged in continuous cleat.
2. Fasten back edge to parapet substrate with hex head washered fasteners.
H.
Apply plastic cement compound
between metal flashings and felt flashings.
1.
Fit flashings tight in place.
J.
Make corners square,. surfaces true and straight in planes, and
lines accurate to profiles.
K.
Seal metal joints watertight.
_
L.
Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
M.
Set splash pans under downspouts draining from a higher to
lower roof area. Set in place
with plastic cement.
N.
Set concrete splash blocks under
downspouts where indicated
on drawings.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
_
A.
Field inspection will be performed
under provisions of Section
01410.
3.5 SCHEDULE
—"
A.
Metal Fabrications
ITEM
SMACNA PLATE & FIGURE
GAGE
1. Gutter
a. Gutter Profile
2 A
24
b. Expansion Joint
8
24
c. Straps
15
24
d. Screens
24 D
r.
e. Outlet Tube
24 C
24
2. Conductor Head
25 B
24
3. Scupper
27A
24
4. Fascia Scupper
29 Alternate Detail
26
5. Overflow Scupper
30 A
26
6. Downspouts
...
a. Downspout
32 C Smooth surface
26 `
b. Connections
33 Detail 1
24
7. Splash Pan
36
24
8. Fascia
a. Form
38 B and 39 A, detail 1
26
b. Joint
42 C
26
9. Counter Flashing
�--
a. In Face Brick
55 A
26
b. In Wood/Metal
55 A modified sim to 56 C
26
10. Cap Flashing
...
a. In Face Brick
55 A
26
b. In Wood/Metal
55 A similar
26
11. Pipe Flashing
66 A
26
12. Vent Pipe Flashing
66 B
2.5# lead _.
13. Coping Flashing
a. Form
77 A
26
b. Anchorage
80 A
24
c. Joint
Chart 12, Type J2
14. Expansion Joint
88 B similar
26
END OF SECTION
03860396/98
SHEET METAL
07600-6 --
I I I
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 07724
ROOF HATCH
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the, Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prefabricated roof hatches, with integral support curbs, operable hardware, and
counterflashings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
"
A.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood curbs.
B.
Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Roof system.
C.
Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing to roof system.
...
D.
Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting.
u
k
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on unit construction, sizes, configuration, jointing methods
and locations when applicable, and attachment method.
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
,._.
A.
Section 01300- Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation criteria, interface
with adjacent components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Babcock -Davis Hatchways, Inc.; Arlington, MA.
B. Bilco Co.; New Haven, Ct.
C. Inland Steel Co./Inryco, Inc.; Milwaukee, WI.
D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 ROOF HATCH
t A. Unit: 24 x 36 inch size, single leaf type.
B. Integral Steel Curb: 14 gage prime painted steel with 1 1/2 inch mm? rigid foam
r insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing; extended flange for mounting.
C. Flush Steel Cover: 14 gage prime painted steel; 1 inch foam insulation; 22 gage steel
interior liner; continuous neoprene gasket to provide weatherproof seal.
- 03860396/98 ROOF HATCH 07724-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
D. Hardware: Cadmium plated finish:
1. Compression spring operator and shock absorbers;
2. Steel manual pull handle for interior operation;
3. Steel hold open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release,
4. Padlock hasp.
5. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components free of visual distortion or defects. Weld corners and joints.
B. Provide for removal of condensation occurring within components or assembly.
C. Fit components for weather tight assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings for weather tight
installation.
C. Apply bituminous paint on surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials or
dissimilar metals.
D. Adjust hinges for smooth operation.
E. Finishing: Paint in accordance with section 09900 - Painting.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 ROOF HATCH 1 07724-2
0f".
t
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
° SECTION 07900
`t.
JOINT SEALERS
F
fi
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and backing.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
•—
A.
Section 07410 - Preformed Roof Panels: Sealants used in conjunction with paneling.
B.
Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing - Roofing system.
4(
C.
Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Sealants used in conjunction with metal
flashings.
D.
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Sealants used in conjunction with
framing and glazing methods.
E.
Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods.
F.
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with sound rated
partitions.
G.
Section 09300 - Tile: Sealants used in conjunction with tile.
W
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
AAMA 803.3 - Voluntary Specification for Narrow -Joint Seam Sealer.
B.
AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound
C.
ASTM C719 - Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic
Movement.
D.
ASTM C792 - Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of
Elastomeric Sealants.
E.
ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction.
.-,
F.
ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
G.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
°
H.
ASTM C1085 - Butyl Rubber - Based Solvent - Release Sealants.
I.
ASTM C1193 - Use of Joint Sealants.
J.
ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials -Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
K.
ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers
(Open -Cell Foam).
t^
L.
FS TT -S -00230C - Sealing Compound; Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for
Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings or Other Structures).
�--
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance
criteria, limitations and color availability.
�..
t
03860396/98 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
B. Samples
1. Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples,
consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for
each product exposed to view.
C. Mockup
1. Construct field sample panel illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface.
2. Locate where directed.
3. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work.
D. Certificates
1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified
requirements and are suitable for use indicated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
An
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
Section with minimum ten years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five
years documented experience.
C. Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation.
1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required.
2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test sealant adhesion
to joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealant joint
substrate indicated.
3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will
be erected.
4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below:
a. Install joint sealants in 5 -foot joint lengths using same materials and methods
for joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work.
Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.
b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to other followed by 2
vertical cuts approximately 2 inches long . at side of joint and meeting
horizontal cut at top of 2 -inch cuts. Place mark 1 inch from top of 2 -inch
piece.
C. Use fingers to grasp 2 -inch piece of sealant just above 1 -inch mark; pull firmly
down at a 90 -degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant.
Pull sealant out of joint to distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for
testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum
movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
5. Report whether or not sealant In joint connected to pulled -out portion, failed to
adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to
test each type of product and joint substrate.
6. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will
be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint
substrates during testing.
03860396/98 JOINT SEALERS 07900-2
6
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric
sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution:
1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that
are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section.
F. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND.HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use,
pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements
1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet.
3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer
during and after installation.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve
air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Sealants
1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or
polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920.
2. Types
a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25.
b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25.
C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.
d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
r
j.. 03860396/98 JOINT SEALERS 07900-3
t
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
B.
C.
9
E.
F.
900-9330
Latex Sealants
1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable
latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications
on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated
percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing
either adhesively or cohesively.
2. Types
a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant
(1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint
movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and
compression for a total of 10 percent.
(2) Conformance: ASTM C 834
b. S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant
(1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint
movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and
compression for a total of 50 percent.
(2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per
ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant
1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic
terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 and/or FS TT -S-00230, with
capability to withstand 15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1/2 percent
movement in both extension and compression) at time of application and remain
adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively when
tested for adhesion and cohesion per ASTM C 719.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
Type S-8; Butyl Sealant
1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable,
solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75
percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with
ASTM C 1085.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant
1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic
rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying
with AAMA 803.3
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
Accessories
1 Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
3. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to
suit application.
5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
03860396/98 JOINT SEALERS 07900-4
r
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
900-9330
A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as
shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather
for extended period of time.
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Joints
1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or
S-2.
2. Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2.
03860396/98 JOINT SEALERS 07900-5
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.
Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types
S-1, S-2, S-3 or S-4.
4.
Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3
or S-4.
5.
Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall
penetrations: Sealant types S-3 or S-4.
6.
Threshold Bedding: Sealant type: S-8.
7.
Joints in Masonry Flashing: Sealant Type S-9.
8.
Joints in Sheet Metal Flashing: Sealant Type S-9.
B. Interior Joints
1.
Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1,
or S-2.
2.
Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2.
3.
Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-
1, S-2, S-3, or S-4.
4.
Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3,
S-4.
5.
Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall
penetrations: Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6.
6.
Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4 S-
5, S-6 or S-7.
7.
Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures and joints between
ceramic tile and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6.
8.
Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and
walls: Sealant type S-6.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 JOINT SEALERS 07900-6 --
k
d
Fire Department Complex
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Custom fabricated and Standard non -rated and fire rated steel doors and frames.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames.
B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.
C. Section 08700 - Hardware.
D. Section 08800 - Glazing.
E. Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall: Prepared openings.
F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames; bituminous coating.
G. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System: Electrical connection to
activate door closers.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191,
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
B. ANSI/SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Frames.
C. ANSI A224.1 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames.
D. ASTM A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet and Strip.
E. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality.
F. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General
Requirements.
G. ASTM Ell 52 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
H. FS RR -H -365A - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening).
I. SDI -107 - Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement --Application).
J. SDI -113 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance for
Steel Door and Frame Assemblies.
K. SDI -116 - Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Rate of Air Flow Through
Closed Steel Door and Frame Assemblies.
L. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
M. NFPA 252 -Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to requirements of 36 CFR Part 1191.
2. Conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for fire rated class indicated
03860396/98 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1
S
Fire Department Complex
900-9330
B. Manufacturer
1. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Indicate each type door and frame elevation, reinforcements, hardware locations,
metal types and guages, and finish. Use same numbering system as indicated on
drawings.
2. Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings and anchor types.
3. Indicate door core construction and head and sill closure method.
4. Indicate cut outs for glazing and louvers, glazing stop and glazing frame profiles and
methods of attachment.
5. Manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
B. Certificates
1. Manufacturer's Certificate certifying that Products and fabrications meet or exceed
specified requirements.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Provide frames with manufacturer's standard sill spreader bar for all welded units.
B. Protect doors and frames with manufacturer's standard resilient packaging..
C. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Doors
1. Interior: 18 gage stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366.
2. Exterior: 16 gage stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366 or ASTM A525,
G60 as scheduled on the drawings.
B. Frames
1. Interior: 16 gage steel conforming to ASTM A366.
2. Exterior: 14 gage steel conforming to ASTM A366 or ASTM A525, G60 as
scheduled on the drawings.
C. Protective Coatings
1. Bituminous Coating: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting.
2. Primer: Manufacturer's standard oven dried, gray alkyd enamel primer, complying
with requirements of ANSI/SDI A224.1.
D. Accessories
1. Jamb Anchors
(a) Masonry Construction: 'T' -strap type, corrugated and galvanized.
(b) Concrete Construction: Expansion shield.
(c) Steel Stud Construction: Z type, same gage and material as frame.
2. Silencers: As specified in Section 08700 Hardware.
3. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel, square profile, [mitered] [square butted] corners;
prepared for countersunk style flat head sheet metal screws.
03860396/98 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2
0
Fire Department Complex
900-9330
4. Door Glazing Frames: Rolled steel, profile as indicated on drawings, mitered
corners; prepared for countersunk style thru-bolts at fire rated doors and flat head
sheet metal screws at non -fire rated doors.
5. Insect Screen: FS RR -W -365A, Type IV, Class 1, 16 x 16 mesh, .018 inch
diameter wire.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate doors and frames to sizes and profiles indicated and in conformance with,
except as otherwise specified, SDI -100, SDI -113 and SDI -116 for non -rated
assemblies and NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for rated assemblies.
2. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place.
Provide mortar guard boxes for frames set in masonry.
3. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit.
4. Grind all welds smooth, fill all voids with body putty and seam filler and sand
smooth. Welds and joints shall not be visible.
B. Doors
1. Exterior doors: Grade 11, Model 2.
2. Interior doors: Grade II, Model 2.
3. Close top edge of doors with flush steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight.
4. Close bottom edge of doors with inverted steel channel closure.
5. Core Construction, Exterior Doors
(a) Type f: Vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 20 gage steel,
spaced not more than 6" apart, and securely attached to face sheets by spot
welds, not more than 6" on center.
(b) Fill spaces between stiffeners full height of door with a minimum 0.6 pound
density insulation.
(c) U -value through door: Maximum 0.24.
6. Core Construction, Interior Doors
(a) Type a.
7. Core Construction, Fire Rated Interior Doors
(a) Conform to requirements of NFPA 252.
C. Frames
1. Fabricate and assemble as complete welded unit.
2. Weld Z anchors to frame.
3. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly
into frame head, flush with top.
4. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide for three single silencers on strike side of single
doors and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.
5. Provide minimum 14 gage steel floor angle clips welded to each jamb.
D. Louvers
1. Material: Same as door face sheets, roll formed..
2. Blade Design: Inverted V blade, sight proof.
3. Free Area: 55 percent.
4. Frame: Flush style.
5. Insect Screen: Manufacturer's standard frame with insect screening specified in this
Section.
6. Attachment: Welded in-place with concealed welds.
2.3 FINISH
A. Finish: As Specified in SECTION - 09900.
03860396198 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES _08110 - 3
f
k
Fire Department Complex 900-9330
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install frames in accordance with SDI -105 and manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Coordinate with masonry and gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor
placement.
3. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch
where in direct contact with masonry.
4. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
5. Install field applied hardware in accordance with SDI -107.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straightedge, corner to corner.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110.4
u
Fire Department Complex
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
900-9330
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED
DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2
SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors to receive transparent finish.
B.
Cut outs for glass panels.
C.
Metal door lite surround frames.
1.3
RELATED
SECTIONS
A.
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames.
B.
Section 08700 - Door Hardware.
C.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
D.
Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
B.
ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
C.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
D.
NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
E.
NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association.
F.
Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required,
special blocking for hardware, and identify cutouts for glazing.
2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics
and factory machining criteria.
C. Samples
1. Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch in size cut from bottom
corner of door.
2. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood
grain.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
1. Indicate special installation instructions.
1
03860396/98
r
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1
Fire Department Complex 900-9330
E. Manufacturer's Certificates
1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements of
NWWDA standards referenced.
2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A for Flush Wood
Doors.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.
B. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated
class as scheduled. —
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging.
C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves. _
D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where
sunlight might bleach veneer.
E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on-site to permit
ventilation.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware
installation.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term:
1. Interior Doors: Life of Installation.
B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation
tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
03860396/98 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-2
r
Fire Department Complex 900-9330
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Doors
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Algoma, WI.
2. Eggers Industries,_ Inc.; Two Rivers, WI.
3. VT Industries, Inc.; Holstein, IA.
4. Weyerhaeuser; Marshfield, WI.
B. Door Lite Surround Frames
1. Air Louvers, Inc.; Pico Rivera, CA.
2. Anemostat Door Products; Carson, CA.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Lumber
1. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, Red Oak kiln dried to maximum 10 percent
moisture content.
B. Cores
1. Solid Core
a. Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-LD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds
per cubic foot density.
b. Fire Rated
(1). 20 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard,
minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density.
(2). 3/4 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core.
2. Hollow Core: Manufacturer's standard phenolic impregnated honeycomb corrugated
fiberboard.
C. Veneers
1. Transparent Finish: .050 inch thick, NWWDA Custom, A grade, Red Oak species
wood, rift cut. -
D. Glazing Stops
1. Rolled steel, shape as detailed, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style
screws; designed to conform to UL requirements.
E. Adhesives
1. Interior Doors: Type I - waterproof.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate fire rated doors to meet fire ratings scheduled in accordance with ASTM
E84 classifications for flame spread/smoke developed of 20/4.5. Attach fire rating
label to door edge.
2. Fabricate doors to thickness scheduled.
3. Veneer Match
a. Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Slip Match.
b. Assembly on Door Face: Running Match.
C. On Pairs of Doors: Pair Match.
4. Hardware
a. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with templates
furnished by hardware supplier at locations indicated in NWWDA I.S.1.7-87 -
Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors.
03860396/98 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -3
Fire Department Complex 900-9330
b. Do not machine for surface hardware.
C. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware.
5.
Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings with
—
prefit clearances specified in NWWDA I.S. 1-A.
B. Flush Face Doors
1.
Fabricate in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 1 and 1-A for 5 ply construction except
as otherwise specified, with finish as scheduled. "-
2.
Stiles
a. Transparent Finish: Solid wood of same species as veneer facing.
3.
Edge Banding .-
a. Wood Cores: Type A - bonded.
b. Mineral Cores: Type A - bonded.
4.
Interior - Hollow Core Doors
a. Blocking: Provide at lock edge and where scheduled to receive coat hooks.
b. Top rail: Minimum 6 inch wide
C. Bottom Rail: Minimum 10 inch wide.
2.4. FINISH
A. As specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size
or alignment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height
at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements.
D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes.
E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders.
F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110 and —
hardware specified in Section 08700.
G., Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
H. Install door louvers, plumb and level.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Telegraphing: 1/10 inch measured with straightedge in any three inch span.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught
string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, --
top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
03860396/98 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-4
Fire Department Complex 900-9330
D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string,
edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -5
0
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 13121
PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pre-engineered, shop fabricated structural steel building frame; metal
wall and sloped roof system including gutters and downspouts, and roof jacks.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03100 - Cast -in Place Concrete: Concrete forms and accessories; concrete
strengths.
2. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry infill
3. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Gutters and downspouts
4. Section 07410 - Preformed Roof and Wall Panels: Roof and wall panels.
5. Section 08360 - Overhead Doors: Framed openings for overhead doors and tracks.
6. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Finish painting of primed steel surfaces.
7. Section 10210 - Metal Wall: Prepared openings.
8. Division 15 - Louvers Sections: Mechanical rough -in utilities.
9. Division 16 - Sections: Electrical rough -in utilities.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AISI-01 - Cold Formed Steel Design Manual.
B. AISC S335 (American Institute of Steel Construction) - Specification for Structural Steel
for Buildings - Allowable Stress Design, Plastic Design.
C. AISC 342L (American Institute of Steel Construction) Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
D. ASTM A36/A36M - Carbon Structural Steel
E. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
F. ASTM A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat -Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength.
G. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheets, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process.
H. ASTM A792/A792M - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip
Process, General Requirements.
I. ASTM C991 - Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation for Pre -Engineered Metal Buildings.
J. ASTM C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Non -shrink).
K. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
L. AWS A2.0 (American Welding Society) - Standard Welding Symbols.
M. AWS D1.1 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
N. MBMA (Metal Building Manufacturers Association) - Low Rise Building Systems Manual.
0. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
03860396/98
Pre -Engineered Buildings
13121-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
-900-9330
A. Tapered beam.
B. Bay Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Primary Framing: Rigid frame of rafter beams and columns, braced end frames, end wall
columns, and wind bracing.
D. Secondary Framing: Purlins, gins, save struts, flange bracing, clips, and other items as
required for a complete structure.
E. Wall System: Preformed metal panels as specified in Section 07410 with sub -girt
framing/anchorage assembly, insulation, and accessory components.
F. Roof System: Preformed metal panels as specified in Section 07410 profile, with purlin
framing/anchorage assembly, insulation, and accessory components.
G. Roof Slope: 1 inches in 12 inches.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal resistance of Calculated Wall System: R -Value of 19.
B. Thermal Resistance of Calculated Roof System: R -Value of 19.
C. Design members to withstand dead load, applicable snow load and design loads due to
pressure and suction of wind calculated in accordance with design criteria indicated on
drawings.
D. Design members to withstand UL 560 - Uplift Resistance, Uplift Class 90.
E. Design members to support mechanical, electrical and building service equipment.
F. Exterior wall and roof system shall withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable
deflection of span: 1 /160.
G. Permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on
fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of 160
degrees F.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: - Indicate assembly dimensions, locations of structural members,
connections, attachments, cambers, loads, and supplemental framing required for
openings and building service equipment; wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout,
general construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage, insulation support
strap spacing, lines fabric sizes and locations, and expansion joints; framing anchor bolt
settings, sizes, and locations from datum, and foundation loads; indicate welded
connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols; indicate net weld lengths; provide
professional seal and signature.
C. _ Product Data: Submit data on profiles, component dimensions, fasteners, performance
characteristics, finishes, insulation, vapor barrier, insulation. support system and all
appurtenances.
D. Samples:
1. Submit three samples of precoated metal panels for each color selected, 2 x 3 inch
in size illustrating color of finish.
2. Submit 12 x 12 inch sample of vapor barrier including seam.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit preparation requirements, anchor bolt placement,
and templates.
F. Erection Drawings: Indicate members by label, assembly sequence, and temporary
erection bracing.
03860396/98
Pre -Engineered Buildings
13121-2
r
0,.
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
s
I
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed components and
utilities.
E
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with AISC S335, AISC S342L, and MBMA Low Rise
Building Systems Manual.
B. Design structural components, develop shop drawings, and perform shop and site work
C under direct supervision of a professional engineer experienced in design of this Work
f and licensed in the State of Texas.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
D. Provide components of each type by a single manufacturer which are compatible with
adjacent materials.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
B. Erector: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Preinstallation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for pre-engineered building systems and
components.
C. Provide a 20 year warranty to include coverage for exterior pre -finished surfaces color
coat against chipping, cracking or crazing, blistering, peeling, chalking, or fading.
D.' Provide a 20 year weather tightness of building enclosure elements after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
r
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
i
A. Pre- Engineered Buildings:
1. Butler Manufacturing Co.
2. Lester Building Systems
3. Trachte Building Systems, Inc.
f 4. Varco-Pruden Buildings
5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Insulation Vapor Barrier
,► 1. Reef Industries, Inc.; Houston, TX.
f,
03860396/98 Pre -Engineered Buildings
C .
13121-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
03860396/98 Pre -Engineered Buildings
13121 - 4
r
C.
Flexible Insulation
1. Certainteed Corporation; Valley forge, PA.
2. Insulation Corporation of America; Olathe, KN.
.,
3. Manville Corporation; Denver, CO.
4. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation; Toledo, OH.
5. Thermal Design, Inc.; Madison, NE.
D.
Insulation Support System
—"
1. Thermal Design, Inc.; Madison, NE.
E.
Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A.
Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36/A36M.
B.
Plate or .Bar Stock: ASTM A529/A529M.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325/A325M.
D.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
E.
Primer: SSPC 20, Red Oxide.
F.
Grout: ASTM C1107, Non -shrink type, premixed compound consisting of non-metallic
aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents, capable of developing
minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in two days and 7000 psi in 28 days.
G.
Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized to G90, 80 KSI designation.
H.
Insulation: ASTM C991, Type I roll glass fiber type, unfaced, white vinyl, UL flame
spread classification of 25 or less, friction fit, thickness as required for R -value specified.
I.
Vapor Barrier:
1. Material: Woven reinforced high-density polyethylene yarns coated on both sides
with a continuous polyethylene film.
2. Flame Spread/Smoke Development: 0-25/0-50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Perm Rating: 025 grains/hr.sq.ft. based on ASTM E96.
4. Color: Manufacturer's standard white.
J.
Insulation Support System
1. Strapping: ASTM A653, .015 x 3/4 inch x continuous length of building, gray color
on exposed side.
2. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturers, painted to match strapping.
.�
K.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M 1.25 oz/sq
ft. finish to match adjacent surfaces when exterior exposed.
2.3 FABRICATION
�*
A.
Fabricate framing members in accordance with AISC Specification for plate, bar, tube, or
rolled structural shapes.
...
B.
Anchor Bolts: Formed with bent shank, assembled with template for casting into '
concrete.
C.
Provide framing for door, louver and mechanical equipment opanings.
D.
Girts/Purlins: Rolled formed structural shape to receive siding and roofing sheet.
E.
Fabricate vapor barrier into one piece to fit building area. Extrusion weld seams.
03860396/98 Pre -Engineered Buildings
13121 - 4
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
B. Verify that foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and placed anchors
are in correct position
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erect framing in accordance with AISC Specification.
B. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure
plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
bracing. Locate braced bays as indicated.
C. Set column base plates with non -shrink grout to achieve full plate bearing.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval.
E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed.
F. Install insulation and vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
G. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Section 01400 -Quality Requirements: Tolerances.
B. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from level; 1/8 inch from plumb.
C. Siding and Roofing: 1/8 inch from true position.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 Pre -Engineered Buildings
F
13121 -5
r
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 14630
OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES
PART 1 GENERAL
900-9330
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements
apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Overhead electrically operated hoist.
B. Electrically operated bridge and trolley.
C. Hoist supporting structure including bridge and trolley.
D. Electrical cables and covers attached to bridge.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Supporting structure
B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of factory primed fabrications.
C. Division 16 Section: Power service.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AGMA 2000-A - Gear Classification and Inspection Handbook
B. AGMA 2001-B - Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute Spur and
Helical Gear Teeth
C. AGMA 6010-E - Standard for Spur, Helical, Herringbone and Bevel Enclosed Drives
D. AGMA 6019-E - Gearmotors Using Spur, Helical, Herringbone, Straight Bevel, or Spiral
Bevel Gears
E. AISC ASD MAN, Vol I - Manual of Steel Construction
F. ASTM A 159 - Automotive Gray Iron Castings
G. ASTM A 325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
H. ASTM A 668 - Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use
I. ASTM B 438 - Sintered Bronze Bearings (Oil -Impregnated)
J. ASTM B 439 - Iron -Base Sintered Bearings (Oil -Impregnated)
K. ASTM B 612 - Iron Bronze Sintered Bearings (Oil -Impregnated)
L. ASTM B 633 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
M. ASTM E 125 - Magnetic Particle Indications on Ferrous Castings
N. ASME 830.16 - Overhead Hoist (Underhung)
0. ASME B30.17 - Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single Girder,
Underhung Hoist)
P. ASME HST -4M - Performance Standard for Overhead Electric Wire Rope Hoists
Q. MHI CMAA 74 - Top Running & Under Running Single Girder Electric Overhead Traveling
Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist
R. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems, Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays
Rated Not More Than 2,000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC
S. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems, Enclosures
T. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators
U. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
V. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-1
F
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
W. UL 489 - Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches and Circuit -Breaker
Enclosures
X. UL 943 - Ground -Fault Circuit -Interrupters !`
Y. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General
1. Provide cranes to operate in the given spaces and match the runway dimensions and
rails indicated.
2. Provide hook coverage, hook vertical travel, clear hook height, lifting capacity, and
load test weight not less than that indicated.
B. Classification: Design and construct hoist in accordance with'.MHI CMAA 74 moderate
service requirements for operation in non -hazardous environment with hoist in accordance
with ASME HST -4M. _
C. Rated Capacity and Speeds
1. Rated Capacity: 3 tons.
2. Lower load block or assembly of hook, swivel bearing sheaves, pins and frame
suspended by the hoisting ropes: Not considered part of the rated capacity.
3. Provide rated speeds (in feet per minute) for the hoist, hoist micro -drive, bridge
micro -drive, trolley micro -drive, bridge and trolley at the rated load as follows:
Description Minimum Maximum r -
Main Hoist 14 14
Trolley 75 75
Bridge 50 50 r-
D. Hook Assembly
1. Designed and commercially rated with safety factors inaccordance with MHI CMAA.
2. Free to rotate through 360 degrees when supporting the rated load.
E. Hoisting Ropes
1. Rating: Rated capacity load plus the load block weight divided by the number of
rope parts, and not exceeding 20 percent of the certified breaking strength of rope.
F. Gearing
1. Strength: . Adequate strength and durability for the crane service class,
manufactured to AGMA 2001-B Quality Class 6 or better precision per AGMA 2000-
A.
2. Gearing: Designed to AGMA standards and operate in an oil bath.
G. System Supply Voltage
1. Design cranes to be operated from a 460 volt, three-phase, 60 Hz, alternating
current system power source.
2. Design energy isolating devices for such machine or equipment to accept a lockout -^
device in accordance with NFPA 70.
H. Electric Brakes
1. Control System
a. Provide a separate controller for each motor.
b. Overload Protection: In conformance with requirements of NEMA ICS 2 NFPA
70. Mechanically and electrically interlock contactors when used for starting,
stopping and reversing. f-
I. Hoist Motor Control System
1. Provide one speed in each direction with an electrically -operated, full -magnetic,
across -the -line reversing type starter.
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-2
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
J. Bridge and Trolley Control
1. Main Control Systems: Provide one speed in each direction with an electrically -
operated, full -magnetic, across -the -line reversing type starter. Use centrifugal
switches in control circuit to prevent the plugging of trolley or bridge drive motors;
each switch shall be arranged to set the associated drive's brake while attempts are
made to plug.
2. Provide the bridge and trolley main control system with reduced voltage starting.
3. Type: AC static stepless secondary saturable reactor.
4. Control: Provide automatic -regenerative braking for speed reduction and slowdown
before brake setting. Control shall provide a minimum 50 -to -1 speed range.
K. Drift Point
1. Trolley and bridge main control systems shall have a drift point between OFF and
first speed control point in each direction or shall have a separate pushbutton.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following be in accordance with Section 01300 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturer's Literature
1. A complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive
data and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and
installation instructions.
C. Data
1. Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after
approval of the detail drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the date of
beneficial occupancy.
2. Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of
supply.
D. Drawings
1. Detail drawings containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams.
2. Indicate each numbered wire, where wire initiates, where wire terminates, and any
other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will
properly function as a unit.
3. Show layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment
relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and
operation.
E. Instructions
1. Diagrams, instructions and safety requirements.
F. Reports
1. Acceptance Testing;
a. Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each
component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified
performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system.
b. Include in report information as required by paragraph ACCEPTANCE TESTING.
G. Records
1. Hooks: Hook material and any heat treatment performed, stamped on the hook
shank or documented in certification papers furnished with the hooks. Hoist test
data recorded on appropriate test record forms suitable for retention for the life of
the crane.
H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. Provide one complete set prior to performance testing and the remainder upon
acceptance. Include the following:
a. Step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation and shutdown.
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-3
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
b. Manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, and brief description of all
equipment and basic operating features.
c. List routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and
troubleshooting guides.
d. Piping and equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the
system as installed.
2. Submit and obtain approval for Operation and Maintenance Manuals prior to the field
training course.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the design and manufacture of overhead hoists
with a minimum of 10 years of specialized experience in designing and manufacturing the
type of overhead hoist required to meet requirements as specified.
B. Installer: Minimum five years experience in installation of the type of overhead hoists
specified and approved or licensed by manufacturer
1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver and store equipment with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard 5 year warranty including parts and labor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the fabrication of complete and totally functional hoists
including necessary ancillary equipment.
2. Materials and products required for designing and manufacturing hoists shall not
contain asbestos.
B. Nameplates : Noncorrosive metal with letters which are easily read from the floor.
C. Warning Labels: Manufacturer's standard heavy duty vinly adhesive applied type.
D. Capacity Plates: Manufacturer's standard plate consisting of a steel backing plate and
exterior quality/fade-resistant stick -on labels with letters large enough to be easily read
from the floor.
E. Provide manufacturer's standard bridge bumper stops.
F. Bolts, Nuts and Washers
1. High-strength bolted connections: SAE Grade 5 bolts with corresponding
.. , lockwashers, nuts, etc., conforming to requirements of AISC-S329 bolts.
2. Bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A 325 bolts. Galvanized bolts are not acceptable.
G. Hooks: Single barbed, ASTM A 668 forged steel.
H. Hoisting Ropes: Regular lay, preformed, uncoated, improved plow steel, 6 by 37
construction, with independent wire rope core, suited to meet the service requirements.
I. Sheaves: Cast, forged, rolled, or welded structural steel.
J. Hoist drums: Welded rolled structural steel, cast steel, or seamless steel pipe.
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-4 '"
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
K. Wiring
1. Base motor loop, branch circuit and brake conductor selection on NFPA 70 for 90
r.. degree C conductor rating.
2. Wire Insulation: Type XHHW.
3. Conductors in the vicinity of resistors and conductors connected to resistors: Type
5RML.
2.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
A. Drives
1. Bridge Drives
a. Bridge drives: Either the A-1 or A-4 drive arrangement as specified in MHI
CMAA 74 with a single electric motor mechanically connected through gear
reduction and drive shafts to the drive wheels.
b. Acceleration and deceleration: As specified below.
c. Gears: Conform to applicable AGMA standards.
d. Gear reducers: Oil tight and fully enclosed with pressure or splash type
lubrication. Bridge -travel limit -switches are optional.
2. Trolley Drives
a. Provide drive arrangement with a minimum of two wheels driven by an integral
electric motor.
b. Drive mechanism: Run in totally enclosed oil bath.
c. Provide manufacturer's standard limit switches for drive mechanism.
d. -Acceleration and deceleration controls: Meeting requirements specified in this
section.
a•
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-5
B. Load Blocks
1. Main and Auxiliary Hoist Load Blocks
a. Load blocks: Welded steel construction.
b. Provide load blocks with hot -rolled or forged steel fixed crosshead separate
from the sheave pin with swivel mounting for forged steel hook.
c. Lubrication Fitting for Sheave Pins: Independent type recessed within the
sheave pin or adequately guarded to prevent damage.
d. Pitch Diameter of Sheaves: Not less than 16 times the rope diameter. Support
sheaves by roller type bearings on steel sheave pins. Provide provisions for
external lubrication to allow pressure relief and purging of old grease. Fabricate
sheave blocks to provide maximum personnel safety and to prevent the hoist
rope from leaving the sheaves under normal operating condition.
I
C. Hook Assembly
1. Fit hooks fitted with safety latches designed to preclude inadvertent displacement
of slings from the hook saddle:
2. No painting or welding allowed on hook.
3. Hook Nut: Secured with a removable type set screw or other similar fastener.
Welding not allowed.
.
D. Hoisting Ropes
1. Fabricate rope socketing or U -bolt clip connections in accordance with clip or rope
manufacturer's recommendation, equal to or greater than the rope strength.
2. Secure hoisting ropes to hoist drum so that no less than two wraps of rope remain
t
at each anchorage of hoist drum at the extreme low position (limit switch stop).
E. Sheaves
1. Accurately machine sheave grooves, smoothly finished and free of surface defects.
F. Hoist Drums
1. Welded rolled structural steel, cast steel, or seamless steel pipe.
2. Diameter: Not less than 24 times the diameter of hoist cable.
a•
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-5
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
G.
In
J.
7.4
L.
900=9330
3. Machine drums and provide with right-hand and left-hand grooves to take the full
run of cable for the required lift without overlapping, plus a minimum of two full
wraps of cable when load is on floor.
4. At least one groove shall remain unused when hook is at the highest position.
5. Cut drum grooves from solid stock and have sufficient depth for size of cable
required.
6. Guard drum so that the cable cannot wedge between drum flange and hoist frame.
Gearing: Enclosed gear reducer with gears and pinions spur, helical, or herringbone type
only, and shall be forged, cast or rolled steel; open -type gearing is not acceptable.
Gear Reducers
1. Components of standard hoists or hoist/trolley units of manufacturers regularly
engaged in the design and manufacture of hoists or hoist/trolley units for Class A,
B or C hoists.
2. Designed, manufactured and rated in accordance with AGMA 6010-E, AGMA 6019-
E (for trolley drives only), as applicable.
3. Gear Reduction Unit: Fully enclosed in oil -tight housing, except for final reduction.
Operation shall be smooth and quiet.
Brakes
1. Shoe or disc type with thermal capacity suitable for class and service specified in
this section.
2. Spring -set and electrically -released by a continuously rated direct acting magnet.
3. Self -aligning and provide for easy adjustment for torque setting and lining wear.
4. Lining Material: Asbestos free.
5. Brake wheels: Cast iron conforming to ASTM A 159 or shall be the manufacturer's
standard high-strength ductile cast-iron, provided that the material exhibits wear
characteristics in the form of powdered wear particles and is resistant to heat -
checking.
6. Disc brakes: Totally enclosed and have multiple discs with stationary releasing
magnets.
7. Brake torque: Easily adjustable over a 2:1 torque range.
Hoist Holding Brakes -
1. Equip each hoist with at least 1 holding brakes, disc or shoe design, applied to one
of the following: Motor shaft or gear reducer shaft or rope drum.
2. Design braking system to have zero hook lowering motion when a raise m t'
o ion is
initiated.
3. Primary brake: A spring -set, electrically -released, disc or shoe type brake.
4. Torque rating: Minimum of 150 percent of motor torque, capable of holding the
rated load with zero hook drift.
5. Primary brake: Automatically set when controls are released or when power is
interrupted.
6. Provisions shall be made to facilitate easy brake adjustment.
7. Hoist shall be furnished with mechanical -control braking or a power -control braking
system. Typical power means include dynamic lowering, eddy -current braking,
counter -torque, regenerative braking, variable frequency, and adjustable or variable
voltage.
Hoist Control Brake
1. Equip each hoist with an integral mechanical load brake of the "Weston" type or
multiple -disc type.
2. Provided external wear adjustment for multiple disc -type brake.
Trolley Brake
1. Provided with spring -applied and electrically -released shoe brakes or disc brakes.
2. Automatically set when controls are released or power is interrupted.
3. Make provisions to facilitate easy brake adjustment.
4. Torque Rating: Minimum of 50 percent of trolley drive motor rated torque.
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES
14630-6
.AW
4:
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
M. Bridge Brakes
1. Provided with a spring -applied and electrically -released single shoe or disc brake for
each bridge drive motor.
2. Design electrical portion of braking system so that the shoes will be spring -applied
and elelectrically-released.
3. Automatically set when controls are released or power is interrupted.
4. Make provisions to facilitate easy brake adjustment.
5. Torque Rating: At least 50 percent of bridge drive motor rated torque.
N. Wheels
1. Manufactured of rolled or forged steel
2. Treads and flanges: Rim toughened to between 320 and 370 Brinell hardness
number.
3. Equip wheels with self -aligning double -row spherical roller -bearings of capacity as
recommended by bearing manufacturer for design load of trolley or bridge.
O. Bearings
1. Antifriction type, except bearings which are subject only to small rocker motion.
Equip equalizer sheaves with sintered oil -impregnated type bushings in accordance
with ASTM B 438, ASTM B 439, or ASTM B 612.
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A. Control Systems
1. Hoist Control System
a. Main hoist and auxiliary hoist motion control system: Single speed, with ac
magnetic control of ac wound rotor motor; provide for reversing, and for a
mechanical load brake.
2. Travel Control System
a. Bridge and trolley motion control system: Single speed with ac magnetic
control or squirrel cage motors.
B. Power Sources
1. Transformers: dry type suitable for the application.
2. Power Rectifiers
a. Pprovide where required to convert ac to dc. Active semiconductor devices:
silicon type.
b. Rectifiers for motor control system: Three-phase full wave rectifiers.
c. Rectifiers for brakes: Single-phase full -wave or three-phase full -wave rectifiers.
A single rectifier may be used in lieu of several smaller rectifiers; supply brakes
from a different rectifier than the other equipment.
d. Protective enclosures: Conform to the requirements of NEMA ICS 6.
e. Rectifying elements: Hermetically -sealed and mounted on heat sinks cooled
by natural convection or by mechanical means.
f. Minimum protection: Consist of transient surge suppressors, and 100,000 AIC
current -limiting 700V rectifier type fuses in the ac line.
C. Motors
1. General Requirements
a. Design motors specifically for hoist duty.
b. Provide drain holes at low points near each end.
c. Provide inspection and service covers with gaskets.
d. Hardware: corrosion -resistant.
e. Conformance: NEMA MG 1.
f. Device and associated circuitry shall serve as an alarm activating an amber
signal or pilot light visible to control stations when motor temperatures become
.. 03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-7
C
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
excessive. Set point shall be set below the Class B insulation temperature limit.
Thermal -sensitive device and associated circuits shall be self -restoring
(automatic reset).
2. Hoist Motor: Single -speed; single -winding.
3. Bridge and Trolley Drive Motors: Single -speed; single -winding.
4. Motor Enclosures: Totally enclosed, non -ventilated (TENV).
5. Hoist Motor Insulation and Time Rating: Provided with insulation which has a Class
B/30 minute minimum motor time rating based on an 80 degree C motor
temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient, with frame size selection based on
continuous ratings.
6. Bridge and Trolley Motor Insulation and Time Rating: Provided with an insulation
which has a Class B/90 minute minimum motor time rating based on 85 degrees C
motor temperature rise above 40 degree C ambient with frame size selection based
on continuous rating.
D. Pendant Control Station
1. General
a. Enclosure: NEMA Type 3R. Physical size of pendant shall be held to a
minimum.
b. Provide a separate cable of corrosion -resistant chain consisting of minimum 1/4
inch wire.
c. Attach pendant station to underside of hoist bridge and hang vertically with
bottom of pendant at 40 inches above floor. Weight of pendant shall not be
supported by control cable.
2. Operating Pushbuttons
a. Heavy-duty, dust -and -oil -tight type with distinctly -felt operating positions which
meet requirements of NEMA ICS 2.
b. Pendant control buttons: Momentary recessed (except the POWER -OFF
button) type, to avoid accidental operation:
c. Diameter: Size which will make operation possible with a thumb while holding
the pendant with same hand.
d. Nameplates: Provide adjacent to each pushbutton.
e. Provide barriers on pendant between various pushbutton functions, except on
elements mounted in junction box.
f. Design and manufacture pushbuttons not to hang up in control case.
g. Pendant shall include a separate set of pushbuttons for each motion and for
POWER -ON POWER -OFF.
h. Provide following Pushbuttons:
POWER -OFF.
POWER -ON.
Hoist -up.
Hoist -down.
Bridge -Forward.
Bridge -Reverse.
Trolley -Left.
Trolley -Right.
3. Light Indicators
a. Pilot lights: NEMA ICS 2 heavy-duty requirements.
b. Provide one amber pilot light to indicate excessive'holst motor temperature on
pendant station, a blue pilot light to indicate that the main contactor is
energized, and a white pilot light to indicate that power is available on the load
side of hoist disconnect switch.
c. Provide a bright red mushroom head with the POWER -OFF pushbutton.
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-8
Cm
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
E. Protection
1. Main Line Disconnect
a. Provide a main line disconnect consisting of a combination circuit breaker
150,000 AIC) and non -reversing starter, starter without overloads (mainline
contactor) in NEMA Type 3R enclosure.
b. Control by a control circuit so that all crane motions will be stopped upon
mainline undervoltage, overload, control circuit fuse failure, or operation of
POWER OFF pushbutton.
c. Equip with energy isolating devices designed to accept lockout devices.
2. Circuit Breakers: UL 489.
3. Overloads
a. Alternating current circuit overload relays
1) Ambient compensated, automatic reset, inverse time type located in all
phases individual motor circuits.
2) Arrange overload relays to de -energize the associated motor on an
overload condition. Provide an automatically reset inverse time -trip
running overload relay for each do motor circuit. Provide an
automatically reset instantaneous trip overload relay in each do motor
circuit or for a pair of series -connected motors. Arrange overload
relays to de -energize the associated motor on an overload condition.
F. Limit -Switches
1. General
a. Geared limit -switches: Heavy-duty quick -break double -pole double -throw type
conforming to NEMA ICS 2.
b. The geared limit -switch interruption of a motion in one direction shall not
prevent the opposite motion. Geared limit -switches shall reset automatically.
c. Housings: NEMA Type 1.
d. Limit -switches shall interrupt power to the primary control systems.
2. Hoist Upper Limit -Switches
a. Provide two limit -switches for each hoist.
b. A rotating -type adjustable geared -control circuit interrupt limit -switch shall
provide hoist -up limiting. Provide a secondary hoist -upper -limit with a weight -
operated power circuit limit -switch to prevent the hoist from raising beyond the
safe limit. The secondary limit -switch shall operate to interrupt power to all
hoist motor conductors, set the hoist holding brakes and directly open all
"raise" power circuits.
3. Hoist Lower Limit -Switches
a. Provide hoists with a rotating -type adjustable geared -control circuit interrupt
limit -switch for hoist -down travel limiting. The hook downward vertical travel
of the hook shall be field -adjustable to approximately 6 inches above working
surface.
4. Bridge and Trolley Travel Limit -Switches
a. Provide runway (track -type) limit -switches for hoist bridge and trolley motions
to stop the bridge and trolley motions, respectively. Install limit -switch
actuators on building and trolley frame to actuate the limit -switches and stop
the hoist bridge or trolley prior to contacting the trolley frame bumpers. Locate
trip mechanism for trolley motion on hoist runway to trip the switch before the
bumper contacts the stop. Locate trip mechanism for bridge motion on hoist
runway to trip switch before bumper contacts the stop. When the switch is
tripped, the switch shall permit opposite travel in the direction of stop and then
automatically reset.
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-9
I
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
i
G. Electrification
1. Bridge Span Conductors
a. Festooned type consisting of a support rail, electrical cables, junction boxes, --
cable cars and accessories. Rigid conductor/collector type.
b. Cable loops shall not drop below the hook high position.
2. Pendant Festoon System
a. Consist of a support rail, cables, junction boxes, cable cars and accessories.
b. Cable loops shall not drop below the hook high position.
c. Pendant festoon: Towed by trolley.
H. Warning Horn/Buzzer --
1. Provide a solid-state electronic warning horn or buzzer on the hoist.
2. Any bridge or trolley motion shall be accompanied by a continuous series of
alternating tones.
1. Load -Limit System
1. General
a. Provide a load -limit visual/audible system for the hoist to inform the operator
that the preset load has been exceeded.
b. Load -limit system: consist of a load -cell, load -sensing electronics, overload
indicator lights, overload alarm bell and alarm cut-out switch.
c. Mount load cell to receive the load from equalizing sheave pin or upper block
sheave pin.
2. Load -Sensing Electronics: NEMA Type 1 enclosures, with adjustable alarm setpoint.
3. Alarm and Indicator Light -�
a. Provide an overload alarm light to indicate a load greater than the preset
maximum.
b. Indicate Overload alarm with a red light and clearly labeled "OVERLOAD".
Provide a bell to indicate when an overload condition exists. Provision shall be
made to turn off the bell.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pre -Delivery Inspections: Provide pre -delivery inspections as follows.
1. Inspection of Steel Castings .-.
a. Visually inspect load -carrying steel castings and test using magnetic -particle
inspection method.
b. Reference allowable degree of discontinuities to ASTM E 125, and relate to ..
service loads and stresses, critical configuration, location and type.
2. Inspection of Hook Assembly
a. Inspect hook and nut by a magnetic -particle type inspection or X-rayed prior to
delivery. Furnished documentation of hook inspection to Architect. As part of
the acceptance standard, linear indications will not be allowed. Welding repairs
of hook will not be permitted. Replace hook showing linear indications,
damage or deformation. r..
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Nameplates
1. Secure to each major component of equipment with the manufacturer's name,
address, type or style, model or catalog number, and serial number.
B. Capacity Plates `-
1. Provide two capacity plates indicating the hoist capacity in tons.
2. Secure one to each side of bridge.
3. Place capacity plates in a location visible to pendant operator's position after the
hoist has been installed.
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES . 14630-10
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
.,.
C. Safety Warnings
1. General
�..., a. Install readable warning labels to each lift block or control pendant in a readable
position in accordance with ASME B30.16 and ASME B30.17.
b. Design the word "WARNING" or other legend to bring the label to the attention
of the operator.
c. Display the following information concerning safe -operating procedures:
1) Cautionary language against lifting more than the rated load; operating
the hoist when the hook is not centered under the hoist; operating
hoist with twisted, kinked or damaged rope; operating damaged or
malfunctioning hoist; operating a rope hoist with a rope that is not
properly seated in its hoist drum groove; lifting people; lifting loads over
people; and removing or obscuring the warning label.
2. Directional Arrows
a. Provide directional arrows with the words "FORWARD" and "REVERSE" affixed
in a location on the bridge which are visible and readable to the operator from
pendant station.
b. The words "FORWARD" and "REVERSE" shall agree with the markings on
control pendant.
C" c. Directional arrows shall not be indicated on control pendant.
D. Anti -Drip Provisions
1. Design hoists to preclude leakage of lubricants onto the lifted loads or the floor.
2. Fit equipment and components which cannot be made leak -proof with suitable drip
f
pans.
3. Fabricate drip pans of steel and designed to permit removal of collected lubricant.
E. Lubrication System
1. Provide splash -type oil lubrication system for hoist, bridge gear cases.
1 ` 2. On vertical -mounted gear cases exceeding two reductions, provide a reversible type
oil pump capable of maintaining the same oil flow direction and volume while being
s driven in either direction.
i 3. Oil pumps: Electric motor -driven pumps may be used when input shaft speed is too
low at any operating condition to ensure adequate oil flow. In such applications,
,,.. pump shall be energized whenever drive mechanism brakes are released.
F. Welding
1. Qualify or prequalify welders, welding operations and welding procedures in
accordance with AWS D14.1.
2. Perform welding indoors and clean surface of parts to be welded free from rust,
scale, paint, grease or other foreign matter.
3. Minimum preheat and interpass temperatures: Conform to the requirements of AWS
D14.1.
4. Perform welding in accordance with written procedures which" specify the
Contractor's standard dimensional tolerances for deviation from camber and sweep.
5. Tolerances: Not exceeding those specified in accordance with AWS D14.1.
r 6. Allowable stress ranges: in accordance with MHI CMAA 70.
7. Welding of girders and beams: conform with AWS D14.1.
G. Bridge: Wide flange beams, standard I -Beams, reinforced beams or sections fabricated
from rolled plates and shapes.
i
H. Bridge Rails or Bars
1. Rails, girders and other sections shall be straight and true.
2. Deflection of rails shall not exceed 1/800 of the span.
s 3. The deflection shall be calculated with the worst case of two loaded bridge hoist
located adjacent each other.
�.. 4. Rail joints shall be flush and true without misalignment of running tread and shall be
designed to minimize vibration.
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-11
t
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
5.
The gap between adjacent rail ends and the vertical misalignment of running treads
shall not exceed 0.0625 inch.
6.
The bridge rail shall be leveled to a plus -or -minus 1/8 inch at all rail support joints. --
7.
Bridge rail shall be fastened to wide flange or centered on flange, complete with
welded clips.
8.
Bridge rail joints shall be bolted using standard joint bars.
9.
Rail joints shall be staggered.
10.
A positive stop shall be provided at bridge rail ends to prevent creep.
1. End Ties and Bridge End Connections
1.
Fabricate end ties' using welded steel box sections.
2.
Provide full depth diaphragms at girder, connections and jacking points.
3.
Provide horizontal gusset plates at the elevation of top and bottom end tie flanges
for connection to girder ends.
4.
Make end connections using high-strength bolts.
5.
Use body -bound bolts fitted in drilled and reamed holes to maintain the crane
square. ,
J. Bridge
End Trucks
1.
End trucks: Rotating or fixed axle type fabricated of structural tubes or from
structural steel to provide a rigid box section structure.
2.
Provide jacking pads for removal of wheel assemblies.
K. Trolley Frame
1.
Fabricate trolley frame of two structural steel side frames or trucks welded together
with one or more structural steel load gins to form a one-piece unit.
2.
Provide pads for the use of jacks or wedges when changing truck wheels.
3.
All trolley yokes and load bars: Drop forged, cast or rolled steel.
L. Stops and Bumpers
1.
Provide crane runways and bridge with structural steel end stops.
2.
Provide bridge end trucks and trolley frames with shock -absorbing, spring type
bumpers capable of decelerating and stopping the bridge and/or trolley within the
limits stated by OSHA and MHI CMAA.'
3.
Trolley end stops: Of sufficient strength to withstand the impact of a fully loaded
trolley moving at 50 percent of maximum rated travel speed.
M. Runway Rails: Size as recommended by crane manufacturer. —
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Before performing any work, verify all dimensions in the field, and submit a letter describing
the results of this verification including discrepancies to the Architect and crane
manufacture.
3.2 ERECTION
A. General
1. Erect entire hoist system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Provide a written certificate from hoist manufacturer indicating the crane is erected
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations before testing the completed
installation.
3. Shop Assembly
a. Shop assemble major crane components as completely as possible. Match
mark disassembled parts and tag electrical connections after complete no-load
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630 - 12
r—
f
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
shop testing. Protect parts and equipment at site from weather, damage,
abuse and loss of identification.
b. Erection procedures: Erect crane without initial stresses, forced or improvised
fits, misalignments, nicks of high-strength structural steel components, stress -
raising welds and rough burrs.
c. Clean damaged painted surfaces and repaint after crane is erected.
4. Mechanical Alignment
a. Align motors, couplings, brakes, gear boxes and drive components when
reinstalled in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
5. Electrical Alignment
a. Align control system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store a
copy of the final alignment data in control panel door and shall include but not
be limited to timer settings, resistor tap settings, potentiometer settings, test -
point voltages, supply voltages, motor voltages, motor currents and test
conditions such as ambient temperature, motor load, date performed and
person performing the alignment.
6. Wiring
a. Wires shall be numbered or tagged at connection points. Splices shall be made
in boxes or panels on terminals boards or standoff insulators.
7. Field Painting
a. Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting of
items only primed at the facility: As specified in Section 09900 PAINTING.
b. Paint bridge hoist one color including bridge, trolley, hoist and all attached
items in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.
c. Paint bridge rail, supports and bracing in accordance with Section 09900
PAINTING.
d. Painitng not required on items such as surfaces in contact with the rail wheels,
wheel tread, hooks, wire rope, surfaces on the electrical collector bars in
contact with the collector shoes and nameplates.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. General
1. Provide all personnel necessary to conduct the required testing, including but not be
limited to hoist operators, riggers, rigging gear and test weights. Perform testing in
the presence of Architect or his designated representative:. Notify Architect 48
hours prior to testing operations.
2. Operate all equipment and make all necessary corrections and adjustments prior to
the testing operations witnessed by Architect.
3. A representative of the Contractor responsible for procuring and installing hoist
equipment shall be present to direct the field testing.
4. Test loads: Compact and permit a minimum of 50 percent of vertical lift.
5. Test loads: Minus 0 percent to plus 5 percent of the required weight, and shall be
verified prior to testing.
6. Perform operational after building interior has been painted.
7. Provide three copies of all test reports to Architect.
B. Test Sequence
1. Test Data
a. Record operating and startup current measurements for coils, hoist, trolley, and
bridge motors using the appropriate instrumentation. Record speed
measurements as required by facility evaluation tests (normally at 100 percent
load). Compare recorded values with design specifications or manufacturer's
recommended values and the abnormal differences shall be justified in the
remarks or appropriate adjustments performed. Note high temperatures or
.:: 03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-13
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
abnormal operation of any equipment or machinery, investigated and corrected.
Record hoist, trolley and.bridge speeds during each test cycle.
2. Equipment Monitoring
a. Monitor improper operation or poor condition of safety devices, electrical
components, mechanical equipment and structural assemblies during the load
test.
b. Report defects observed to be critical during the testing period to the Architect
and suspond testing operations until the defects are corrected.
c. During each load test and immediately following each load test, inspect the
following: --
1) Inspect for evidence of bending, warping, permanent deformation,
cracking or malfunction of structural components.
2) Inspect for evidence of slippage in wire rope sockets and fittings.
3) Check for overheating in brake operation; check for proper stopping.
4) Test and inspect separately all safety devices including emergency stop
switches and POWER -OFF pushbuttons to verify proper operation of the
brakes. When provided, inspect safety accessories including warning
horn, lighting, gauges, warning lights.
5) Check for abnormal noise or vibration and overheating in machinery
drive components.
6) Check wire rope sheaves and drum spooling for proper reeving and
operation, freedom of movement, abnormal noise or vibration.
7) Check electrical drive components for proper operation, freedom from
chatter, noise, overheating, and lockout/tagout devices for energy
isolation.
8) Inspect gears for abnormal wear patterns, damage, or inadequate
lubrication.
9) Verify that locations of hoist capacity plates are visible from pendant
operator's position.
3. No -Load Testing
a. Hoist Operating and Limit Switch Test
1) Raise and lower load hook through the full range of normal travel at
rated speed and other crane speeds. Stop load hook below the geared
limit -switch upper setting. In slow speed only, verify proper operation
of upper and lower limit -switches for primary motions. Repeat test a
sufficient number of times (minimum of 3) to demonstrate proper
operation. Test brake action in each direction. Verify proper time -
delay between the actuation of dual brakes. _
b. Trolley Travel
1) Operate trolley full distance of bridge rail exercising all primary drive
and micro -drive speed controls in each direction. Verify brake
operation in each direction. In slow speed, trolley bumpers shall
contact trolley stops located on the bridge girders. In slow speed test
the proper operation (interrupt power, automatic reset) of the trolley
limit -switches at both limits of trolley motion.
c. Bridge Travel -
1) Operate bridge in each direction the full distance of runway exercising
all primary drive and micro -drive speed controls. Verify brake operation
in each direction. In slow speed the proper operation (interrupt power,
automatic reset) of the bridge limit -switches at both limits of bridge
test motion.
d. Hoist Loss of Power No -Load Test
1) Using the primary drive, hooks shall be raised to a height of
approximately 12 feet or less. While slowly lowering the hook the main
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-14
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX900-9330
JIMA
power source shall be disconnected, verifying that the hook will not
lower and that both brakes will set.
e. Travel Loss of Power No -Load Test
1) With the hook raised to clear obstructions and trolley traveling in slow
speed, the main power source shall be disconnected, verifying that the
trolley will stop and the brake will set.
4. Load Test
a. Hoist
1) Unless otherwise indicated, perform the following tests using a test
" load of 125 percent (plus 5 percent, minus 0 percent) of rated load.
t
2) Hoist Static Load Test: Test holding brakes and hoisting components
by raising the test load approximately 1 foot and manually releasing
one of the holding brakes. Hold load for 10 minutes. Apply first
holding brake and release second holding brake. Hold load for 10
minutes. Any lowering that may occur indicates a malfunction of
brakes or lowering components.
3) Dynamic Load Test: Raise and lower test load through the full range
operating in each speed. Completely stop machinery at least once in
each direction to ensure proper brake operation.
(` 4) Hoist Mechanical Load Brake: With test load raised approximately 5
feet and with the hoist controller in the neutral position, release holding
brake. Passing: Mechanical load brake capable of holding the test
load. With holding brake in released position, lower test load (first
point) and return controller to OFF position as the test load lowers.
' Passing: Mechanical load brake prevents the test load from
accelerating.
5) Hoist Loss of Power Test: After raising test load to approximately 8
feet, slowly lowering the test load, release the main power source and
control pushbutton verifying that the test load will not lower and that
both brakes will set.
6) Trolley Dynamic Load Test: While operating the trolley the full distance
of bridge rails in each direction with test load on the hook (one cycle),
�.- tesrt proper functioning of all primary drive speed control points and
proper brake action.
7) Bridge Dynamic Load Test: With test load on hook, operate bridge for
the full length of runway in both directions with trolley at each extreme
end of bridge. Verify proper functioning of all primary drive speed
control points and brake action.
5. Trolley and Bridge Loss of Power Test
a. Raise clear of any obstructions on operating floor a test load of 100 to 105
percent of rated load. Starting at a safe distance from walls or other
obstructions, select a slow speed using the trolley and bridge primary drive.
While maintaining a safe distance to obstructions, disconnect the main power
'. source and verify brakes to have set and that the equipment stops within the
distance recommended by manufacturer.
6. Overload Tests
E' a. After the operational tests, test bridge hoist system and all functions of bridge
hoist at 125 percent of rated load.
7. Acceleration and Deceleration Tests
a. Test acceleration and deceleration of bridge and trolley with approximately 10
percent of rated load at lowest possible location of hook. Operate bridge and
trolley to run up to high speed and then stopped without jarring or swinging the
... load.
8. Grounding Test
.. 03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-15
FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
a. Test hoist to determine that the hoist, including hook and pendant, are
grounded to building during all phases of hoist operation. Test the grounding
of bridge and trolley with approximately 10 percent of rated load on hook.
Test grounding between hoist hook and the structure's grounding system.
9. Adjustments and Repairs
a. Perform adjustments and repairs at no additional cost to the Owner, until
satisfactory conditions are maintained, and contract compliance is affected.
Repeat pertinent testing after adjustments are made to assure correct
functioning of the components,.
3.4 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
A. Store schematic diagrams for equipment where indicated on drawings. -�
3.5 FIELD SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE
A. Furnish a qualified experienced field service representative to supervise the crane
installation, assist in the performance of the on site testing, and instruct personnel in the
operational and maintenance features of the equipment.
3.6 FIELD TRAINING
A. Conduct a training course for the operating staff starting after the system is functionally
completed but prior to final acceptance. Cover pertinent points involved in operating,
starting, stopping, and servicing the equipment, including all major elements of operation
and maintenance manual. Demonstrate all routine maintenance operations such as
lubrication and general inspection. Provide Architect at least 2 weeks advance notice of
field training.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE
A. Final acceptance of crane system will not be given until Contractor has successfully
completed all testing operations, corrected all material and equipment defects, made all
proper operation adjustments, and removed paint or overspray on wire rope, hook and
electrical collector bars.
End of Section
03860396/98 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC CRANES 14630-16
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 15000
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL
PART GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A.
In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under
these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as
required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to
the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and
satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline
concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted
where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from
these standards.
B.
All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in
chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal
lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings,
unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed.
C.
Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment
spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in
finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as
indicated on the drawings or required.
D.
The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and
ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines,
pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay
out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural
conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to
conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the
equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated,
satisfactorily operating installation.
E.
The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures,
equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined
by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment
drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and
in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the
conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without
any additional cost accruing to the Owner.
F.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and
apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder
proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on
the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before
submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure
to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary
changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense.
-= 03860396/97 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
G. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and
equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans,
which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and
interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the
Contractor before the work proceeds.
H. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork,
material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the
ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern:
1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such
as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc.
Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as storm drains.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and
whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets.
I. Piping and ducts serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the
most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the
lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type,
the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in
a neat and inconspicuous manner.
1.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. All electric wiring of every character will be done under Division 16 of these
specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in
place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall
mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and
any required outlet boxes.
B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project,
or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely
wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of
connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and
phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16.
If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual
requirements shall govern.
1:3 TERMINOLOGY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract.
"This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
"The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period.
"Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building
occupants from the floor with all building components in place.
"Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building
occupants, including mechanical rooms.
In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be
described singularly,even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or
similar items.
03860396/97 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-2
r
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.4 SEALING AROUND PIPES, DUCTS, ETC.
A. Refer to section on Firestopping.
1.5 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
900-9330
A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as
called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the
work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its
concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the
adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use.
B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the
work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval
but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information.
1.6 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these
specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications
shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in
another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall
refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope
of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination
determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner
furnished equipment.
B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature
different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the
Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect.
C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under
other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of
these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings.
D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the
drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
p— 03860396/97 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 15000-3
i
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX ` 900-9330
SECTION 15100
SITE UTILITIES
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work
and provide and install all materials and appurtenances necessary for the
installation and final connection of all utilities.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02200 - EARTHWORK: Backfill for utilities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
B. As -built drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT
CLOSE OUT.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Underground steel piping shall be factory coated pipe "X -Tru -Coat" or
epoxy coated pipe with fittings wrapped with a double thickness of 3M
Scotch "51 " vinyl tape over pipe and fittings.
2.2 SANITARY SEWER
A. PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with a maximum
SDR of 35 with elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212.
2.3 WATER LINES
A. PVC Piping: Schedule 80, ASTM D1785 with solvent weld joints and
fittings.
03860396/98 SITE UTILITIES 15100-1
"f
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.4 GAS LINES
A. Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type 111, Grade 3, (PE 3406-3408), resin
conforming to ASTM D1248 -7A, pipe construction conforming to ASTM
D2513 (SDR 11).
B. Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic lines 2" and smaller
in size, use Continental Style 5 extra heavy duty malleable iron couplings r
with stiffeners.
C. Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect to plastic lines
2-1/2" and larger, use polyethylene and steel flat face flanges with full face
gaskets.
D. Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40 galvanized steel
pipe extending 36" beyond paving.
E. Service Risers: Wayne Manufacturing compression service riser with anode
and built-in stiffener.
2.5 FIRE LINE
A. PVC Piping: ASTM D-2241, SDR -17, Class 150, bell and spigot with
ASTM D-1869 rubber gasket, Manville Blue Brute.
2.6 EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS �.
A. Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or as
required by ordinance but not greater than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall
consist of a concrete encased special fitting with sewer pipes extending
therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass countersunk
cleanout ferrule shall be set on this slab in such manner as to be flush with
finished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout.
Cleanouts shall be the same size as the sewer, up to 6" in size.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES
A. Before starting excavation Contractor shall:
1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of
each line.
2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and
submit figures in writing to Engineer for approval.
3. Stake route of each line.
4. Arrange utility connections with authorities.
5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust
grade or routing to accommodate installation of the lines.
3.2 LAYING PIPE
A. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the
drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding,
laying and jointing operations. Install fittings and valves at the required
locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical. Handle pipe
03860396/97 SITE UTILITIES 15100-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX.900-9330
carefully to avoid damage.to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with
damaged ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping
and accessories clean.
B. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by
drawings, lay parallel water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at
least 10 feet apart. Insofar as possible place water line at a higher
elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross each
other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is
not possible, amount of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12"
out to out clearance provided the sewer line is cast iron for at least 10 feet
on each side of the water line.
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform all excavations of every description and of
whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings
and/or required for the installation of his work.
B. Piling of Excavated Materials: All excavated material shall be piled in a
manner that will not endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing
sidewalks and driveways. Hydrants under pressure, valve pit covers, valve
boxes, curb stop boxes, fire and police call boxes, or other utility controls
shall be left unobstructed and accessible until the work is completed.
Gutters shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions made for street
drainage, and natural water courses shall not be obstructed. Segregate
topsoil for replacement. Unused material shall be removed from the site.
C. Trenching Methods: Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench
excavations except where operation of same would cause damage to
existing structures, or plants either above or below ground; in such
instances hand method shall be employed.
D. Barricades and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from injury and to
avoid property damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, warning
lights and guards as required shall be placed and maintained during progress
of the construction work. All material, piles, equipment, pipe, and open
trenches that may serve as hazards to vehicular or pedestrian traffic shall
be protected by barricades or fences and warning lights.
E. Protection of Property and Structures: Temporary support, adequate
protection, and maintenance of all underground and surface structures,
drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the
work shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. Any structures
that have been disturbed shall be restored to its original condition upon
completion of the work.
3.4 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill trenches as specified in Section 02200.
r 03860396/97 SITE UTILITIES 15100-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.5 LOCATION .AND DETECTION
A. Below Ground:
1. Non -Metallic:
a. Non-metallic pipe installed below ground shall have installed in the
same trench a detectable plastic tape that conforms in to the
APWA color coding as follows:
Blue - Water
Green - Sewer and Sanitary Systems
Yellow - Gas
Such tape shall consist of one layer of aluminum foil laminated
between two layers of inert plastic film. Tape shall be approved 2
1/8" wide and shall be imprinted with a continuous traceable for a
minimum of eight years after direct burial. Product shall be Terra
Tape Detectable or approved equal. Tape shall be installed per
manufacturer's instructions, but no less than 12" above the buried
line.
2. Metallic:
a. Below ground metallic piping shall have identifying tape similar to that
specified for below ground non-metallic except that the aluminum foil
for location is not required.
3.6 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service from the city main as
indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with
the city for domestic water service, including the tap, meter and meter box, and
pay all charges levied by the city. Beginning at the termination of the city
work, the contractor shall provide and install all water piping, fittings, valves,
valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall conform to municipal
requirements.
B. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at
the point shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this
connection.
C. Gas: Arrange with the gas utility company for natural gas service as shown on
the drawings. From the location of the new meter, extend service to the
building. Provide service valves at each service point.
D. Fire Protection Water Service: The Contractor shall secure service from the city
main at the point shown. Arrange for the tap with the city and pay all charges
levied by the city for the service.
3.7 TESTING
A. Sewer: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least
the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be
placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to
permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected. Test shall be
03860396/97 SITE UTILITIES 15100-4
V9
�r
,.w
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 10
feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipe line to be
tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand not less than 4 hours.
B. Water Lines: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 150 PSIG for 4 hours with no
leaks and no pressure drop.
C. Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 15 PSIG for 24 hours. There
shall be no pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If
any pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct the leaks and retest.
03860396197
END OF SECTION
SITE UTILITIES
15100-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 15200
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment
and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as
shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING: Firestopping of penetrations.
B. Section 07536 - MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING: Pipe flashing in roofing.
C. Section 08110 - ACCESS PANELS: Access panels.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.5 INSPECTION
A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon
delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found
during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be
removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor.
1.6 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE
A. . The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free
from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be
drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by
freezing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of
America.
03860396/97 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
15200-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections
for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for
reference only to identify the applicable standard.
PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034, Type PSM
Max. SDR = 35
PVC Soil Fittings Elastomeric ASTM D3212
2.2
Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76
Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI BI6.22
Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106
Butt Weld Fittings ANSI 1316.9
Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B16.11
Steel Flanges ANSI 1316.5
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B16.3
C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern,
ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane.
D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet
requirements of ASTM F-492.
E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern,
bround joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller.
VALVES
A. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated bronze ball, teflon seats
and O -rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle. Valve shall be two
piece. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable.
B. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane
No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or
400 PSI WOG.
C. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143
in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270
threaded gas stop.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as
required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated
on the drawings.
B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow
of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to j
measurements established at the building and work into place without
forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping ,.-
above ground parallel with the lines of the building.
C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws
or bushings. r-
1
03860396/97 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 1 15200-2 "
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints
and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate
expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the
contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the
transmission of.vibration to the building structure.
E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at
points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required
to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment
items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at
connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide
insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material.
F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding
fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the oiroing
in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not
exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with
Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching
of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be
permitted.
G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems.
The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions
where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping.
Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request
exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of
fabricating it before ordering materials.
3.2 FLASHING
A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than
2-1 /2 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the
outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe
and turned over into,the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36"
square.
3.3 SEALANT PANS.
A. As specified in Section 07600 - "FLASHING AND SHEETMETAL".
3.4 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors, pipe sleeves shall be
used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the
subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of
insulated lines, the inside diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2
inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation.
B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through
galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished
surface. In pipe chases and mechanical rooms, they shall extend 1-1 /2
inches above the floor. slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve
in floor penetrations shall be sealed with sealant specified in section 07900
- SEALANTS. Penetrations in fire rated walls shall be sealed as specified in
Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING.
03860396/97 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
C. The pipes passing through concrete beams, walls, and masonry exterior
walls shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at
least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor. Pipe
sleeves should be approximate 2" larger than pipes through foundation
walls grade beams. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes
sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the
Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with
sealant specified in Section 07900 - SEALANTS. Contractor shall
coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint.
3.5 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES
A. Except as otherwise noted, provide and install concealed hinge, chrome
plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe
passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor
and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of
the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are
insulated.
B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior
walls.
3.6 ACCESS PANELS
A. Install an access panel at each valve concealed in walls, partitions, and
above gypsum drywall or plaster ceilings.
B. Panels: Panels are access specified in Section 08110.
3.7 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS
A. No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber
sleeve shall be neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel.
B. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is
threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign
material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain
exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or
an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of
threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited.
C. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square, ream and deburr. Clean insides of
fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise
care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints
with high temperature solid string or wire solder, 95% tin, 5% antimony,
using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for all copper tubing. Low
temperature solder such as 50/50 or 40/60 will not be permitted.
D. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use
base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and
ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in
accordance with ANSI B31.1 Machine the ends of the material to be
joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made
and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the
electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all
03860396/97 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-4
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next
successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear
on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before
depositing the next successive bead of welding.
E. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts of Grade 5 or
better and gaskets as specified. Faces of the flanges shall be cleaned of all
dirt, rust or other foreign matter. The pipe, valve, or fitting shall be properly
aligned and free to move while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually
tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. No strain shall be put
" on the flanges in making up the joint.
z F. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to manufacturers
instructions.
3.8 REPAIR OF LEAKS
A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows:
1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or
brazing over existing joints will be permitted.
2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint
if the tightening fails to stop the leak.
3. Repair leaks in PVC pipe by remaking the joint.
4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld
completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld,
accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld
should in no case be less than 4" in length.
B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system.
3.9 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES
A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and
grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in
bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true
to line.
END OF SECTION
03860396/97 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200-5
P '
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 15210
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of
all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in
performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories".
A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and
fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement
conforming to ASTM D-2564-67.
B. Sanitary Vent Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to
ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM
D-2564-67.
C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines
underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K soft drawn copper
tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing.
Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings.
D. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 Ib. banded malleable iron
fittings for pipe 2" and smaller; welded fittings for pipe 2-1 /2" and larger.
E. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings.
F. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and
fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement
conforming to ASTM D-2564-67.
G. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each
stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals
not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where
cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind
chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W -8480-R or provided with
other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance.
r 03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
H.
900-9330
Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded
adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and
secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors
shall be Wade W -6000 -TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade
W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the
line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines.
Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and
no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each
water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The
length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where
required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if
sized in accordance with PDI recommendations.
Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture,
item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim
of the fixture, or which has a threaded spout, provide and install an
approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to
prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in
chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match.
2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be
acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of American Standard, Eljer,
and Kohler will be acceptable.
B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets,
fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush
valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts
and etc.
C. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back
flow preventers.
D. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves.
E. Generally all wall Hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that
no weight is supported from the wall
F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance.
G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in.
H. Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, seal joint as specified in Section
07900 - JOINT SEALERS.
L The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall
secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough into
insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction.
J. Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas.
K. All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving performance
standards.
. 03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
Water Closet WC'A'
Bowl Elier 111-4805 1.5GPF water saver elongated
Flush valve
Seat
Water Closet WC'B'
Bowl
Flush valve
Seat
Water Closet WC'C'
Bowl
Flush valve
Seat
Water Closet WC'D'
Bowl
Flush Valve
Seat
Carrier
bowl, siphon jet, standard height, with bolt
covers.
Sloan Royal 113-1.5, 16" riser.
Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front.
Eljer 111-4815,1.5GPF water saver, elongated
bowl, siphon jet, handicapped 16-3/4" height,
with bolt covers. TAS compliant.
Sloan Royal 111, 11-1 /2" riser.
Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front.
Eljer 111-1505 water saver, wall hung, elongated
bowl, siphon jet, standard 15" height, with closet
carrier fitting and chrome mounting bolts.
Sloan Regal 113-1.5, 16" riser.
Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front.
Eljer 111-1505 water saver, wall hung, elongated
bowl, siphon jet, handicapped height, with
closet carrier fitting and chrome mounting bolts.
TAS compliant.
Sloan Regal 111, 11-1 /2" riser. TAS compliant.
Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front.
Wade W-310, W-330, or W-340 adjustable
carrier.
03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
F
15210-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
Urinal U'A'
Fixture
Eljer 161-1090 vitreous china, wall hung, siphon
jet flushing action, with chair carrier and 3/4" top
spud. Mount at standard height.
Flush Valve
Sloan Royal 180
Urinal U'B'
Fixture
Eljer 161-1090 vitreous china, wall hung, siphon
jet, with chair carrier, and 3/4" top spud. Mount
at 17" height. TAS compliant.
Flush Valve
Sloan Royal 186. TAS compliant.
Lavatory L'A'
Fixture
Eljer 051-2954 vitreous china 22 1/2" x 18 1/2"
self rim, with 4" drillings.
Supply
557-1122, single chrome lever handle, aerator,
and 803-0552 perforated grid strainer.
P -trap
804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
Stops, risers
802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel
handle stops.
Lavatory L'B'
Fixture
Eljer 051-2644 vitreous china 20" x 18" for
concealed arms, with 4" drillings. TAS
compliant.
Supply
557-1122, single lever chrome handle, and
aerator. TAS compliant.
Tailpiece
803-0530 with offset drain for wheelchair.
P -trap
804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
Stops, risers
802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel
handle stops.
Carrier
Wade chair carrier for concealed arms.
Insulation
Truebro 102W insulation for p -trap, offset
tailpiece, and hot and cold supplies.
03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-4 r-
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
Lavatory L'C'
Fixture
Supply
Tailpiece
P -trap
Stops & Risers
Insulation
Sink S'A'
Fixture
Supply
Strainer
03860396/98
P -trap
Stops, risers
Disposal
900-9330
Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x
18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings. TAS
compliant.
557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator.
803-0530 perforated grid with offset drain.
804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel
handle stops.
Truebro 102W insulation for p -trap, offset
tailpiece, and hot and cold supplies.
Elkay LR -3319,33" x 19-1/2" double
compartment, 18 gage type 304 self rimming
stainless steel with 4 holes.
Eljer 717-1280, Chrome finish swing spout single
lever unit with aerator, hose and spray, 3/8"
tubing inlets.
Two Eljer 803-0580 strainers and crumb cups
with tailpieces.
Eljer 804-1190 with tubing waste and
escutcheon.
Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and
wheel handle stops.
In-Sink-Erator, Classic Model, 1 Hp stainless steel
garbage disposal, stainless steel rotating
shredder with two 360° swivel impellers &
stainless steel grind chamber.
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15210-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
Sink S'B'
Fixture
Elkay LRAD-1918, 19" x 18" x 6" deep, single
compartment, 18 gage type 302 self rimming
stainless steel with 3 holes. TAS compliant.
Supply
Eljer 717-1700, chrome finish swing spout single
lever unit with 3/8" tubing inlets. TAS
compliant.
Strainer
Eljer 803-0580 strainer and crumb cup.
Tailpiece
Eljer 803-0530, offset drain.
P -trap
Eljer 804-1190 with tubing waste and
escutcheon.
Stops, risers
Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and
wheel handle stops. —
Insulation
Truebro 102W for p -trap, offset tailpiece, hot &
cold supplies. --
Service Sink SS
Fixture
Stainless steel Just A-18665 gauge, Type 304,
wall hung service sink.
Supply
Just JUB-1200 chrome plated rigid spout mixing
faucet with vacuum breaker. Spout with pail
hook, wall brace and 3/4 inch threaded hose
outlet.
Trap
Just JTS-1060 standard, enameled inside, with
cleanout.
Mop Basin MB
—
Fixture
Stern -Williams SB -1502, 24x24x12 corner
precast terrazzo, 3" integral drain body, stainless
steel cap & tiling flange on two sides. --
Supply
Eljer 749-1200 with vacuum breaker integral
stops, wall brace, pail hook, 3/4" threaded spout.
03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-6
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
Electric Water Cooler EWC'A'
Fixture Elkay EBFSA-8 with stainless steel receptor and
vinyl clad cabinet.
P -trap Eljer 804-1180 with tubing waste and
escutcheon.
Stop Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and
wheel handle stop.
Electric Water Cooler EWC'B'
Fixture
P -trap
Stop
Eye Wash EW
Fixture
Washfountain WF'A'
Fixture
Mixing Valve
Elkay EBFATL-8 bi-level for the handicapped with
stainless steel receptors and vinyl clad cabinet.
LDAPR-188 apron. TAS compliant.
Eljer 804-1180 with tubing waste and
escutcheon.
Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and
wheel handle stop.
Bradley Model S 1 9-220P eye/face wash with
hose spray and wall bracket, chrome plated brass
1/2" IPS stay open eye wash valve, chrome
plated brass sprayhead, 8' hard -held hose spray,
wall bracket constructed at heavy gauge sand
cast aluminum, chrome plated face spray, dome
type strainer and 1-1/4" drain fitting.
Bradley Model SS-3AZ (3 station) Express
Lavatory System, supplies from below having
precast Terreon bowl, Infrared sensor, 110/24
VAC plug-in transformer, 24V, 1/8" NPT solenoid
valve, integral soap dispenser, p -trap, tailpiece,
two flexible supply connections, and all standard
equipment. Color shall be as selected by
Architect. ADA compliant.
No. 222 thermostatic mixing valve.
I-- 03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
i
15210-7
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
Washfountain WF'B'
Fixture Bradley Model 2209 Bradmate Washfountain
push button actuated, bowl, sprayhead,
backsplash, access panel, intergral soap
dispenser, p -trap, flexible supply connections,
mixing valve, and trap cover constructed of
heavy gauge type 304 stainless steel. ADA
compliant.
Hose Bibb HB
Fixture Nibco Fig. 63 angle sillcock, with vacuum
breaker.
Washing Machine Rough -in Box WM
Fixture Guy Gray B-150 recessed stainless steel box
with 1-1 /2" drain outlet with two angle pattern
hose bibbs.
Shower Head SH'A'
Fixture
Shower Head SH'B'
Fixture
Shower Head SH'C'
Fixture
Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower
control with check valves, stops, and chrome
plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376 deluxe
shower head, univeral ball joint, 2-1/2 GPM
volume control. Shower head shall be mounted
at 6'-0" AFF.
Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower
control with check valves, stops, and chrome
plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376 deluxe
shower head, univeral ball joint, 2-1/2 GPM
volume control. Shower head shall be mounted
at 6'-6" AFF.
Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower
control with check valves, stops, and chrome
plated metal lever, and hand shower with SS 59"
flexible hose, supply elbow and flange, swivel
connector, and 24" chrome plated glide bar with
adjustable shower mount. TAS compliant.
03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-8
r
A
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
Shower Head SH'D'
Fixture
Wall Hydrant WH
Fixture
Roof Drain RD
Fixture
Overflow Drain OFD
Fixture
Downspout Nozzle DSN
Fixture
900-9330
Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower
control with check valves, stops, and chrome
plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376 deluxe
shower head, universal ball joint, 2-1/2 GPM
volume control. Shower head shall be mounted
at 5'-6" AFF.
Wade W-8620, non -freeze wall hydrant with
integral vacuum breaker.
Wade W-3000 cast iron drain and flange,
flashing ring, gravel stop, cast iron mushroom
dome, deck clamp and bearing pan.
Wade W-3000 SD cast iron drain and flange,
flashing ring, gravel stop, cast iron mushroom
dome, deck clamp, bearing pan, and 6" diameter
adjustable standpipe. Set standpipe 2" above
low point of roof.
Wade W-3940 cast brass nozzle with threaded
inlet and flange.
2.4 DRAINS
A. Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable.
Provide a clamping device for the floor membrane, where applicable.
B. All floor drains, shall have deep seal p -trap.
Shower Drain SD'A'
Fixture Wade No. W-1102 with 5" NB top, cast iron
body.
Shower Drain SD'B'
Fixture Wade No. W-1104 with 5" NB top, cast iron
body.
�-- 03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
z
15210-9
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
Floor Drain FD'A'
Fixture Wade No. W-1103 with 6" NB top, cast iron
body.
Floor Drain FD'B'
Fixture Wade No. W-1104 with 6" NB top, cast iron
body.
Floor Drain FD'C'
Fixture Wade No. W-1104 with 6" cast iron top, cast
iron body.
Floor Sink FS
Fixture Wade No. W-9140-12x12x8, cast iron square
floor sink, A.R.E. interior, aluminum dome --
strainer, with NB grate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ISOLATION VALVES
A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in
each line serving the riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru
removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or _
chase.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In
addition, the following specifications shall apply.
B. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection
at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less
than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be
greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a
flow velocity of 2 feet per second.
C. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10"
above the roof.
D. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to
completely drain the system.
E. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no _
movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins.
F. Gas Lines: All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed
otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions.
G. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and
at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip
pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the _
bottom of the drop.
03860396/98 1 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-10
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
H. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to
a gas consuming appliance.
I. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported as detailed on the drawings.
Spacing of supports shall be as specified under "Hangers and Supports".
3.2 TESTING
A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases insulated,
painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish
testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during
construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing.
B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig.
There shall be no leaks whatsoever.
C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping
shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall
be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in
sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be
tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with
water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each
opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly
plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least
a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the
portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The
system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1 " in
8 hours.
D. Gas Lines: Test with 15 prig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure
drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all
joints, correct leaks and retest.
END OF SECTION
l.- 03860396/98 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210-11
I
r
1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 15260
REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install the necessary refrigerant lines, fittings, refrigerant
controls, etc. to properly interconnect the condensing units and the
evaporators.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 PIPING
A. Refrigerant piping shall be ASTM 8280, Type ACR hard drawn copper
tubing assembled with wrought copper fittings. Braze joints with AWS
A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. Flood system with nitrogen
when brazing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM
A. Piping shall be adequately supported to prevent the transmission of
vibration and noise into the building structure. All refrigerant piping shall
run in a neat manner parallel to the building construction and shall be
arranged with adequate clearance for the suction line insulation. Purge
continuously with dry nitrogen while soldering.
B. Refrigerant lines shall be sized in accordance with the best refrigeration
practice and shall be designed to afford a controlled distribution of the
refrigerant and a ready return of oil to the compressor crankcases.
Particular care shall be exercised in the sizing and design of suction lines to
assure that liquid refrigerant or oil pockets will not be formed during partial
compressor operation with subsequent "slugging".
03860396198 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 15260-1
1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.2 TESTING
A. All refrigerant piping shall be tested at 300 psi with dry nitrogen for 4
hours. Finally after charging, go over each installation with a halide torch.
Correct all leaks.
3.3 EVACUATING
A. After, testing the piping system, evacuate the system to 200 microns.
Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen to raise the pressure to atmospheric.
Re -evacuate the system to 200 microns.Close the vacuum pump suction
valve and stop the pump. Backseat the compressor valve and allow the
system to stand under vacuum for a minimum of 12 hours. If the vacuum
reading remains unchanged, the system may be charged.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 15260-2
I
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 15275
DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment
and service necessary for and incidental to the dry standpipe system in the
Burn Tower as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide the dry standpipe system as shown on the drawings, in accordance
with NFPA 14 and the Building Codes.
-2.2 PIPING
A. All piping shall be schedule 40 black steel assembled by welding.
2.3 SIAMESE
A. Flush bronze, 2-1/2" inlets with the number of inlets required by code, with
caps and chains. Mark "DRY STANDPIPE".
2.4 VALVES
A. The valve at each floor shall be a chrome plated 2-1/2 X 2-1/2 U.L. listed
valve equal to Potter -Roemer 4050 with male adapter, cap and chain.
2.5 ROOF MANIFOLD
A. Potter -Roemer 5876,4" two-way roof manifold with two No. 4315 U.L.
listed 2-1/2 X 2-1/2 valves, caps and chains.
03860396/98 1 DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM 15275-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING
A. Piping between the fire department connection and fire hose valves shall be
flushed with a sufficient volume of water so as to remove all construction _
debris and trash which may have accumulated in this pipe prior to the
completion of the system.
3.2 TESTING
A. All new systems shall be tested hydrostatically at not less than 200 pounds
per square inch pressure for two hours. The piping shall show no leakage.
END OF SECTION
03860396198 DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM 15275-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 15280
i FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Contract and Division -1 General Requirements sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The building areas A, B, C, and D shall be protected by a automatic
sprinkler system designed in conformance with NFPA 13, Installation of
Sprinkler Systems.
B. The first and second floor of the Burn Tower shall have a sprinkler system
as shown on the drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING: Fire sealing of penetrations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and provide plan layout of
system for approval.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREEMNTS
A. The design and installation of the Automatic Sprinkler Systems and the
Alarm and Supervisory Systems shall be in strict accordance with all
mandatory and recommended provisions of the NFPA, FM, UBC, and UL
publications. All recommended provisions of the NFPA (National Fire
Codes) listed below shall be considered as mandatory requirements.
B. Issues of the following publications, including revisions and amendment as
of the date of award of this contract, form a part of this specification.
1. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA)
2. No. 13 Sprinkler System
3. No. 70 National Electrical Code
4. No. 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems
5. No. 24 Outside. Protection
6. Factory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
Publication (FM)
7. Approval Guide
8. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Publication (UL)
9. Approved Equipment Lists (with supplements).
r
�., 03860396/98 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1.6 QUALIFICATION OF THE CONTRACTOR
A. The Fire Protection System shall be installed by an experienced firm
regularly engaged in the installation of automatic sprinkler and standpipe
systems. The Contractor shall have a "Certificate of Registration" and shall
have in his employee a licensed "Responsible Managing Employee", as
provided for in Article 5.43-3 "Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems" of the
Texas State Board of Insurance, Insurance Code. The Owner may reject
any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300- SUBMITTALS:
1. The Contractor shall submit complete working drawings of the sprinkler
system and such other descriptive data as the Architect may require to
demonstrate compliance with the contract documents.
2. Shop drawings will be submitted at one time to demonstrate that
pertinent items of equipment have been properly coordinated and will
function properly with each other. No installation work will be
permitted prior to approval of complete shop drawings.
3. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the
Contractor, details of such departures, including changes in related
portions of the project and the reasons, therefore, shall be submitted
with the shop drawings and hydraulic calculations. Approved
departures shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Hydraulic calculations will be required in accordance with NFPA No.
13.
1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise the original control
drawings and shop drawings to agree with the construction as actually
accomplished. Submit in accordance with Section 01700 - CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT,
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All material and equipment shall be the current standard products of the
manufacturer. Where two or more items of equipment performing the same
function are required, they shall be exact duplicates, produced by one
manufacturer. However, component parts need not be products of the
same manufacturer.
B. All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for
systems of the type indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise noted, and
shall conform to the requirements of NFPA No. 13.
03860396/98 1 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-2
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. The following is a listing of the materials and specifications. The list is
comprehensive in nature. It is not intended that all materials listed will
necessarily be required, but that those required for the work be selected
from this listing. All pipe and fittings shall be non -galvanized, except where
called for on the drawings or required by code.
ITEM SIZE (INCL) SPECIFICATIONS
Pipe All Ferrous pipe as per NFPA 13.
Fittings, All Asper NFPA 13.
Flanges
Threadolets Thru 2" Steel, ANSI B16.11 sockolets
ASTM A105
Weldolets 2" and larger Steel, 90 degrees STD only,
ANSI 816.9, ASTM 105
Plugs All Brass, square head, 125 Ib,
ANSI 816.5
Unions Thru 2" Malleable iron, 300 Ib bronze to
iron ground joint.
Flange gaskets All Red rubber 1/16 inch, ANSI
816.21
Valves:
Globe valves Thru 2"
Screwed, bronze body, rising
stem, 175 Ib WWP, screw-in
bonnet, renewable disc, Kennedy
Fig. 97. UL/FM approval not
required.
Angle valves Thru 2"
Screwed, bronze body, rising
stem, 175 Ib. WWP, screw-in
bonnet, renewable disc, Kennedy
Fig. 98. UL/FM approval not
required.
Gate valves Thru 2"
Screwed, bronze body, OS&Y,
175 Ib WWP, Kennedy Fig. 66.
Gate valves 2-1/2" &
Flanged, iron body, OS&Y, 175
Larger
Ib WWP, Kennedy Fig. 68,
electrical supervisory switch.
03860396/98 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
Butterfly valves 2-1/2" &
Larger
Check valve
Check valves
Auto ball drip
Sprinklers and Nozzles:
Automatic sprinkler
Water Flow Alarm Devices:
Water Flow Switch
Water motor gong
Alarm check valves
Thru 2"
2-1/2" &
Larger
1/2 or 3/4
Miscellaneous:
Pipe hangers supports,
and connections
Pipe escutcheons
Lug body, EPDM seat, ductile
iron body, bronze disc, 6" and
above gear operated, 175 Ib. _
WWP, UL/FM approved,
electrical supervisory switch.
Screwed, bronze body, 175 lb
WWP, horizontal swing,
renewable disc, Kennedy Fig.
442. UL/FM approval not
required.
Flanged, iron body, 175 lb
WWP, bolted bonnet, horizontal
swing, renewable seat & rubber
faced disc, Kennedy Fig. 126A. -
Bronze, Grinnell Model F775.
Chrome plated recessed in
finished spaces with ceilings and
chrome plate upright in
unfinished spaces without
ceilings.
Potter -Roemer 6200 Series,
UL/FM approved, 120 volt.
Reliable Model C.
Alarm check valve, complete
with trim including retard
chamber and pressure switches
for local alarm bell & water flow
transmitter. Reliable Model E.
Approved type, in accordance
NFPA No. 13R requirements.
Chromium -plated iron or
chromium -plated brass, either
one piece or split pattern, held in
place by internal spring tension
or setscrew.
03860396/98 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-4
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
Sprinkler escutcheon
Sprinkler guard
Hypochlorite
Water Pressure gage
Siamese
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 JOINTS
900-9330
Two-piece, finish to match
sprinkler except where otherwise
specified on drawings. Depth as
required to position sprinkler.
Approved guard, standard baked
red enamel finish.
AWWA 300
3 -inch minimum dial, 0-300
psi range, polished brass case,
2 -1/2"x2 -1/2"x4" chromium
plated flush mounted with caps,
chains and sillcock. Mark "AUTO
SPKR".
A. Joints shall be the threaded type for 2" and smaller, and shall be welded or
flanged for 2-1/2" and larger.
B. Threaded Joints: Threads shall be concentric with the outside of the pipe
and shall conform to ANSI B2.1. Threaded joints shall be made tight with
an approved thread joint compound or tape. Joint compound shall be
applied lightly but sufficiently to cover male threads only. Leaking joint
shall not be repaired by peening or packing.
C. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be faced -true, provided with 1/16 inch
red rubber gaskets, and made square and tight. When made up, flange
bolts shall extend through nuts by at least one full thread. No flanges shall
be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection.
D. Welded Joints: All welding, including methods and qualifications of
welders, shall be in strict accordance with the standards and requirements
specified in NFPA No. 13. All welds are subject to inspection by the
Architect. The Architect reserves the right to accept, reject, or demand
removal of welds which are in violation of these specifications. Welded
branch connections to headers shall be made by use of threadolets,
sockolets or weldolets type fittings.
E. Cutting: Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements shown on the shop
drawings and to suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into
place without forcing or springing. All cuts shall be reamed to remove fins
and burrs.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Piping material, including valves and fittings, shall be delivered to the site in
a clean and protected condition. End seals of pipe, valves and flange
covers shall be maintained in place, being removed only as necessary for
cleaning, fabrication, erection or for inspection by the Contractor. Care
7 03860396/98 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
shall be exercised in the handling and storage of all piping materials and
prefabricated piping so that contamination by moisture, grease, dirt, or
injurious foreign matter shall not occur.
B.
. The pipe shall be cut accurately to centerline measurements to suit field
conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or
springing. Piping shall be pitched to allow proper drainage.
C.
_
The interior and exterior surfaces of all piping shall be kept clean at all
times. Pipe shall be free from and burrs and shall be cleaned in accordance
with cleaning procedures herein.
D.
No flanges or unions shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible `
after erection.
E.
All valves shall be properly packed and made leakproof under the test
pressures described.
F.
Pipes passing through fire walls, fire partitions, shall be sealed as specified
in Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING.
3.3 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Pipe escutcheons shall be provided at all finished surfaces where exposed --
piping passes through floors, walls or ceiling except in boiler, utility, or
equipment rooms. Sprinkler escutcheons shall be provided for all pendant
heads through ceilings. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to the pipe. —
3.4 SIGNS
A. All control drain and inspector's valves shall be provided with porcelainized
metal identification signs. All hydraulically designed systems shall be
provided with a permanently attached nameplate data sign as recommended
by NFPA No. 13. —
3.5 SPRINKLER GUARDS
A. All sprinkler heads installed within 7 feet of the floor or otherwise subject to
mechanical damage shall be equipped with sprinkler guards.
3.6 TESTING
A. Testing of the sprinkler systems and alarm systems shall be as prescribed
by NFPA Pamphlet No. 13. Each test shall be in the presence of an
authorized representative of the owner. This representative shall sign the
Certificate of Inspection as a witness of a successful test. The Contractor
shall deliver these certificates of inspection in duplicate to the Architect.
3.7 STERILIZATION
A. All new lines shall be flushed and sterilized with chlorine before acceptance
for service. Calcium hypochlorite powder; containing not less than 70%
available chlorine, shall be used for sterilization. The amount of chlorine
applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of 100 ppm for at least 24 _
hours. At the conclusion of the 24 hour contract time, C12 residual should
03860396/98 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-6
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
be at least 20 ppm. The chlorinating material shall be mixed with treated
( water in an acceptable container and injected directly into the system, the
process being repeated until the system is filled. All valves in the system
shall be open and closed 3 times during the procedure to insure that the
sterilizing mixture is thoroughly and evenly distributed throughout the
system. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, the system shall
�^ be flushed with water.
3.8 PROCEDURE FOR PLACING SYSTEMS IN SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall place the systems in service with the operating
mediums after purging operations are completed. The Contractor shall
furnish all labor and tools required.
3.9 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. All electrical work in connection with the installation of the fire protection
system shall be performed in accordance with Division 16.
3.10 SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS
A. The Contractor shall furnish spare heads in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet
No. 13. Heads shall be provided in a suitable cabinet and shall be
representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and
temperature rating of heads installed. In addition to the spare heads, the
contractor shall furnish not less than one special sprinkler wrench per
cabinet. The Cabinets shall be mounted at the system's riser.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15280-7
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
7 SECTION 15320
AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor,
materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all
operations in connection with the installation of ductwork, linings, air
distribution devices, dampers and control devices, curbs and other materials
and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying
drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL DUCTWORK
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications,
and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of
galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction
for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of
joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION
STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance
with 1" w.g. pressure class.
C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated
turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows
having a centerline radius equal to 1-1 /2 times the width of the duct in the
plane of the bend.
D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all
sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a
maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in
the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1 " in 7" on any side, but
with a maximum slope of 1 " in 4" where conditions necessitate.
r03860396/98 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
2.2 DUCT LINER
900-9330
A. All sheet metal supply, return, and fresh air ducts shall be lined.
B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1 " with Mansville
"Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with neoprene
on one side.
C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq.
ft. -degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F.
D. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld
pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal,
of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts
indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2"
greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are
permitted.
E. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by
SMACNA.
2.3 DUCT SEALER
A. All supply air and exhaust air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight
construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt
or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior
metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections.
Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint,
making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant.
B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system.
C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal.
2.4 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of
the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a
volume damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off
to achieve the final air balance.
B. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 22 gauge
galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall
have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances.
Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where
neither dimension of the damper exceed 24". The metal used shall match
that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special
metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion.
C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24",
volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked
together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of
No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish.
Dampers shall have brass,bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings.
Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting,
and those for automatic dampers shall have neoprene blade edges and
stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or
angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity.
03860396/98 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-2
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner
sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be
constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a
continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4
inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve
and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or
neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a
maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the
Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL -181 standards as a Class 1 duct
and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be
Thermaf lex M -KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M -KE for low pressure
application.
B. Flex duct shall not exceed 6'-0" in length or have more than 90 degree of
bend. If longer duct is required use round sheetmetal duct with 2" thick
duct insulation to make-up the difference in length.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and
the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be
long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and
the fan or unit housing with at least 1 " slack in the flexible material itself.
B. The material shall be of a glass cloth type equal to 30 ounce Ventglas as
manufactured by Ventfabrics. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and
mildew -resistant.
2.7 ROUND DUCT TAPS
A. Contractor shall provide bellmouth take -offs at branch duct locations. Take-
offs shall be equal to Buckley Air Products.
r., B. Bellmouth fittings shall be Model BM -D with damper. In areas where
sufficient duct height is not available, provide Model 3300 rectangular to
round bellmouth fitting with damper. Bellmouth shall have 1.5" radius.
C. Bellmouths shall be constructed of heavy-duty galvanized steel with bead.
Bellmouths shall include an air-tite neoprene gasket to ensure a tight fitting
with minimal leakage. Pre -drilled holes shall be provided for quick
mounting.
t
-03860396/98 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-3
D. Each volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be
r
fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the
ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings,
or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the
ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 1200 right
angle worm gear regulator with 301 concealed damper regulator. On
exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to
Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts.
E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and
stand off brackets.
2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner
sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be
constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a
continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4
inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve
and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or
neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a
maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the
Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL -181 standards as a Class 1 duct
and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be
Thermaf lex M -KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M -KE for low pressure
application.
B. Flex duct shall not exceed 6'-0" in length or have more than 90 degree of
bend. If longer duct is required use round sheetmetal duct with 2" thick
duct insulation to make-up the difference in length.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and
the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be
long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and
the fan or unit housing with at least 1 " slack in the flexible material itself.
B. The material shall be of a glass cloth type equal to 30 ounce Ventglas as
manufactured by Ventfabrics. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and
mildew -resistant.
2.7 ROUND DUCT TAPS
A. Contractor shall provide bellmouth take -offs at branch duct locations. Take-
offs shall be equal to Buckley Air Products.
r., B. Bellmouth fittings shall be Model BM -D with damper. In areas where
sufficient duct height is not available, provide Model 3300 rectangular to
round bellmouth fitting with damper. Bellmouth shall have 1.5" radius.
C. Bellmouths shall be constructed of heavy-duty galvanized steel with bead.
Bellmouths shall include an air-tite neoprene gasket to ensure a tight fitting
with minimal leakage. Pre -drilled holes shall be provided for quick
mounting.
t
-03860396/98 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
D.
Standard damper hardware shall be constructed of 26 -gauge galvanized r
material with a quadrant damper with stand-off bracket and tight fitting
gasketing to ensure minimal leakage at pivot point. _
2.8 FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Furnish and install, at locations shown on the plans, dynamic fire dampers
constructed and tested in accordance with the current edition of UL -555
Standard For Fire Dampers. Dampers up to 64 sq. ft. for vertical mount and
25 sq. ft. for horizontal mount shall be classified for dynamic closure to a
minimum 2375 fpm and 4 inches w.g. static pressure for horizontal air
flow, air flow up and air flow down. Velocity and pressure rating shall
include both in duct and no duct installations. `
B.
Each dynamic fire damper shall be marked with a UL classified 1-1/2 hour
fire protection rating, the maximum Velocity/pressure rating for each
horizontal and vertical installation and "for use in dynamic systems." In
addition each dynamic fire damper shall include a 165 degrees F fusible link.
Each dynamic fire damper shall include a 12" long integral roll formed steel
sleeve furnished by the damper manufacturer. Submittal information shall
include the fire protection rating, maximum velocity/pressure ratings and the
manufacturer's UL installation instructions.
C.
Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Ruskin DIBD 20 Style B. --
2.9 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER
A.
Low Pressure (Class 11): In low pressure duct and transfer openings, furnish
and install at locations shown on plans combination fire/smoke dampers
equal to Ruskin Model FSD36. Frame shall be a minimum of 16 gauge
galvanized steel hat channel shape with tabbed corners for reinforcement.
The blades shall be single skin 16 gage minimum galvanized with three -
longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel .a
flexible metal compression type. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve
type pressed into frame. Blade action shall be opposed blade.
B.
Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be 1-1 /2 hour fire rated under U.L.
_
standard 555 and shall be classified as Class II leakage rating for use in
smoke control systems under U.L. 555S. Each damper shall be a U.L. label.
Testing and U.L. qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. As part
of the U.L. qualification, dampers shall operate at minimum 4" w. g. in the
closed position and 2000 FPM air velocity in the open position.
C.
The combination fire/smoke dampers and their actuators shall be qualified
under U.L. 555S to an elevated temperature of 250 deg. F., 250 deg. F. or
450 deg. F. depending upon the actuator. Appropriate fail closed 120 volt
actuators shall be furnished and installed by the damper manufacturer. A
factory sleeve of 16" minimum length and constructed of 20 gage for --
dampers through 84" wide and 18 gage above 84" wide shall be provided.
D.
Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with a U.L.
classified firestat equal to Ruskin Model TS 150. Firestat shall electrically
and mechanically lock damper in a closed position when duct temperatures
exceed 165 deg. F and still allow appropriate authority to override firestat
03860396/98
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-4 '-
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
and operate damper as may be required for smoke control functions.
Firestat shall be equipped with high limit temperature sensor that meets all
requirements of NFPA92A.
E. A factory enclosure shall be provided for round connections (Style CR).
2.10 ACCESS PANEL
A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed inducts to permit servicing
of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers,
etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall
panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In
uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels
shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No.
390 gaskets.
B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable
ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction.
C. Access doors shall be located as close as possible to fire dampers and
smoke dampers. Where the size of the duct permits, the minimum size
access door shall be 18" x 16".
D. Each door providing access to fire dampers or smoke damper shall have a
label with letters not less than 1/2" in height reading "FIRE/SMOKE
DAMPER".
2.11 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose.
Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories.
B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory
finished in OFF-WHITE. All other grilles and registers shall be factory
primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job.
C. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus, Metal -Aire, or Krueger
will be acceptable.
2.12 SPIRAL WOUND DUCTS
A. Ductwork on the inlet and outlet of the Truck Exhaust System shall be
spiral wound.
B. This ductwork shall be round in cross-section. It shall be constructed
according to the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. Duct
construction details shall be in accordance with the "HVAC DUCT
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, FIRST EDITION, published by the Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. except as
may be abridged herein.
C. All job -constructed ducts shall be made with longitudinal joints butted and
welded. Round ducts shall be factory fabricated spirally wound conduit
made from zinc coated steel strips. All such ducts shall be delivered in
standard lengths and shall be cut to proper length at the site by power saw
to insure proper fit and square alignment.
�^ 03860396/98 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
D. Fittings used on round ducts shall be shop fabricated by welding. Changes
in direction shall be made with mitered fittings of at least 3 sections; 90
degree elbows shall contain not less than five sections. Branch takeoffs
shall be at 45 degree.
E. A high degree of dimensional accuracy is required in both conduit and
fittings in order that the installation may be strong, rigid, and within
allowable limits of air leakage. Inside diameter of conduits when checked
with ring gages shall show a variation from nominal diameter of not more
than 0.030". Fittings shall be provided with male connections and, when
checked with ring gages, shall show a variation from nominal outside
diameter of not more than 0.015 inch.
F. All other joints between conduits and between conduits and fittings shall be
made with "Hardcast" cement reinforced with self -tapping drill screws.
Conduits shall be joined with couplings. Adjoining surfaces of fitting or
coupling and conduit at each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after
receiving a uniform coat of cement shall be pressed together. Joints so
formed shall be further strengthened by the use of hex head No. 7x12
self -tapping drill screws installed with a screw gun. Screws shall be equally
spaced around the circumference and centered longitudinally on the joint.
Use three screws per joint on conduit with diameters of 3" through 8" and
space screws approximately 6" apart on conduit with diameters of 9" and
over. Then seal the joint with "Hardcast" assembled using manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling
hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct
penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around
such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such
sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to
exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the
same duct area.
END OF SECTION
r-
03860396/98 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320-6 1—
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 15330
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications
shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe
or equipment included in this work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The
following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials
manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern
will be considered.
MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT.
Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated
Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199
Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239
Hanger Plastic Pipe 108+ 109
Wall bracket All 150, 151, or 155
Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304
Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241
Pipe Rest All 295 or 291
Beam Clamps A11249, 254, 255, 282, 280
Adjuster All 2381
03860396/97
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15330-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.2 HANGER RODS
A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods
sized as follows:
Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or
Copper Tube Supported
3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller
1/2" 3" and 4"
2.3 HANGER SPACING
A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines
without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12
inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing
for copper and steel lines. However, hangers shall be more closely spaced
where necessitated by conditions or required by code.
Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet
3/4" and smaller 5
1 " through 1-1 /2" 7
2" and larger 10
All PVC lines 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS
A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with
due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of
support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this
consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered_
and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize
transmissions shall be used where specified or required.
B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the
walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than
10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support
near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned.
C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines
and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where
required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other
approved supports.
D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is
needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe,
extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the
floor.
03860396/97 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-2
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along
walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but
suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or
U -braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not
available in the proper size.
F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams.
Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom
chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4", verify the
joist strength before installation.
G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades,
they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle
iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including
the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size and
loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in
accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or
from the trapezes.
H. Perforated strap iron and wire will, under no circumstances, be acceptable
as hanger material.
3.2 DUCT HANGERS
A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
END OF SECTION
PO
03860396/97 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330-3
E
r
Flo
I:
0
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 15400
INSULATION
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor,
materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all
operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation,
coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as
shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All
surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated
unless specifically excepted.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes,
each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a
multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only
general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be
determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those
provided by equipment manufacturers.
Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications
and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though
they were repeated herein.
All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested
by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed
50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall
have these same component ratings.
All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be
manufactured in the United States of America.
03860396/97 INSULATION 15400-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS
A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be one of the following:
1. An All Service Jacket (ASJ) laminated of flame resistant white kraft
paper, glass scrim reinforcement, and kraft paper.
2. Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) Jacket laminated of flame resistant 0.001 "
aluminum foil, glass scrim reinforcement and kraft paper.
B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and
preformed Manville Zeston covers with taped seams.
2.3 SHIELDS
A. Provide shield of No. 16 U.S. standard gage galvanized metal to protect
insulation at hangers and supports on piping 3 inches and smaller. ' For pipe
4 to 6 inches, use 14 gage; and for pipe 8 inches and larger, use 12 gage.
Use a shield extending at least 6 inches on each side of the support bearing
area.
B. Under each shield on pipe 2" and larger, install a high density fiberglass
insert equal to Hamfab H Block, 20 lb. density, or approved equal. ..�
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized
firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation
mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable
manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by
these specifications and by those published standards.
B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be
rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line
and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves '=
the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable.
3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION
A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to
be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry
all surfaces to be covered.
3.3 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation
and coverings.
B. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1 " thick
Owens-Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II molded sectional glass fiber pipe
covering with an All Service jacket (ASJ). Insulate valves and fittings with
preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation.
03860396/97 INSULATION 15400-2
I"
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. Domestic Cold Water Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Owens-Corning
ASJ/SSL-11 molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service
Jackets (ASJ). Insulate valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC
covers over fiberglass insulation. Vapor seal all insulation.
D. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Manville Type II "Aerotube". Insulation may be slit
flange type or threaded on during fabrication.
E. Duct Insulation: Refer to Section 'AIR DISTRIBUTION' for duct liner
specification.
F. Ducts: Insulate the round supply air ducts with 2" thick, 3/4 lb. density,
Owens-Corning "All Service Wrap" glass fiber flexible insulation having a
factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket.
G. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On
horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt
joints tightly. Seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats
of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab
membrane in adhesive between coats.
H. Concealed Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate with 2"
thick, 3/4 Ib. density, Owens-Corning "All Service Wrap" glass fiber flexible
insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket.
I. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out. On horizontal runs,
lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly.
Seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin
Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in
adhesive between coats.
J. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip.
K. Roof Drains: Insulate bodies of roof drain with one coat insulating cement
to thickness of adjacent covering and cover with vapor barrier jacket of
kraft paper and aluminum foil with glass fiber reinforcing fabric. Hubs shall
be covered by building up layers of insulation until they are covered. The
insulation shall overlap the adjacent insulation by a minimum of 2", bevel
the ends and seal with glass fiber reinforced vapor barrier asphaltic
adhesive.
L. Refrigeration Suction Piping: 3/4" Manville Type II "Aerotube" threaded
onto piping during fabrication and sealed with adhesive.
M. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Manville Type II "Aerotube". Insulation may be slit
flange type or threaded on during fabrication.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 INSULATION 15400-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 15500
EQUIPMENT
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1*0103*1cle7
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment
and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as
shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein.
B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or
shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each
item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished.
C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of
any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of
equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of
equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work
necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided.
D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely
installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of
the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop
drawings that all requirements have been met, including:
1. Space requirements
2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size)
3. Capacities
4. Clearance for maintenance
5. Quality
6. Quantity
F. Contract Closeout Submittals
1. Submit operating and maintenance manuals and wiring diagrams for
all equipment in accordance with Section 01700 - CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified.
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT
t:
15500-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.4 WARRANTY
900-9330
A. General: Equipment shall be covered by the manufacturer's standard
warranty or guarantee on new equipment, which shall apply for a
minimum of one year following certificate of final payment, unless longer
warranties are specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS
A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. General service
motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the
following requirements:
B. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or
enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1;0.
C. Fractional 1/6 HP and Larger: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient,
dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0
or greater.
D. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient,
dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of
1.15.
E. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40
degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by
exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Motors shall have the minimum
performance as scheduled below.
HP RPM FRAME MIN EFF MIN POWER FACTOR
1 1800 143T- 82 84
1-1/2 1800 145T 84 85
2 1800 145T 84 85
3 1800 182T 86 86
5 1800 184T 87 87
7-1/2 1800 213T 88 86
2.2 STARTERS
A. Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as
specified herein, shall be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16.
Coordinate exact starter requirements and details.
2.3 FLUE VENTS
A. Provide and install flue vents on water heaters, furnaces, unit heaters, and
hose dryer.
B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal
conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of
the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other
required fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof in a ventilator type
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT .15500-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster.
Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be
provided with a separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA.
All vents shall be flashed and counterflashed into the roofing construction
to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight.
2.4 WATER HEATER
A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall
be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water heater.
B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable
thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and all standard accessories
including a thermomagnetic safety pilot designed to shut off gas flow
completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is
extinguished.
C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure
relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size
valve according to the applicable codes.
D. Refer to drawings for capacities.
E. Warranty: Water header shall have a 5 year warranty against failure due
to corrosion, metal fatigue or overheating caused by buildup of scale, film,
or other sediments.
2.5 HOT WATER CIRCULATOR
A. The pump shall be an in-line, single stage, wet rotor type with the motor
mounted directly to the pump chamber. The pump shall be furnished as
shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer. The pump shall be capable of delivering 5 gallons per
minute when operating at a total developed head of 5 feet of water
column. The pump shall be as manufactured by Grundfos Model
UP15-18SF.
B. The pump chamber shall be constructed of corrosion resistant 304
stainless steel and rated at 145 psi working pressure. Furnish with
flanges.
C. The impeller, impeller inlet cone, rotor can, and rotor cladding shall be
constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured directed to
the motor shaft by means of a stainless steel split cone. The motor shaft
shall be constructed of aluminum oxide ceramic and shall be supported by
two radial bearings mounted in a stainless steel bearing plate and rotor
can. The pump shall be coupling or mechanical seal.
D. The motor for the circulator shall be rated at 1/33 horsepower for
continuous duty operating on 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz alternating
current. The motor shall be cooled and lubricated by the pumped fluid and
shall require no scheduled maintenance.
E. The pump shall be supported such that the weight of the pump is not
carried by the adjoining pipe.
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT 15500-3
b,
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
2.6 FANS
A.
The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with
the schedule on the drawings.
B.
All v -belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that
the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the
adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt
tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding
purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery
specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done
at no increase in the contract.
C.
Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof. NEMA T frame
design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The
adjustable v -belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on
motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The
motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit
shall be flexible.
D.
Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the
transmission of noise and vibration.
E.
Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled.
F.
Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect.
G.
Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
H.
Fans shall have factory applied finish.
I.
Power Roof Ventilators: All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low
silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings
shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with
ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted.
J.
Exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels.
K.
All fans shall have bird screens.
L.
Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. It shall be of
welded construction.
M.
Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Acme or
Greenheck.
N.
Wall Mounted Propeller Fan: Ventilator shall be belt driven axial type.
Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel angle.
Mounting members shall be slotted to allow adjustment and centering of
propeller over spun venturi.
O.
Propeller construction shall be six die formed blades welded to a steel hub
with gussets welded to three quarters of the blade length. The hub bore
shall be a machined steel insert welded to the hub. A standard square key
with two set screws and two retaining rings shall lock the propeller to the
shaft.
P.
The ground and polished steel propeller shaft shall be mounted in sealed
ball bearings. Fully machined cast iron pulleys shall be keyed to the
propeller and motor shafts. All drives shall be adjustable and sized for a
minimum of 165 percent of driven horsepower.
Q.
Refer to schedule on the drawings for size and capacities.
R.
The fan shall be mounted as shown with sheet metal connector to the
louver with a flexible duct connector.
S.
Fan shall be Greenheck or equal.
03860396/98
EQUIPMENT 15500-4
r
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
T. Cabinet Fan: Duct mounted fans shall be of the centrifugal, belt driven in-
line type. The fan housing shall be of the rectangular design constructed
of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include rectangular duct
mounting collars.
U. A hinged or removable panel shall be provided in the fan cabinet of
sufficient size to permit access for service to all of the fan's internal
components without dismantling the cabinet.
V. The fan wheel shall be of the galvanized steel, forward curved, centrifugal
type. Wheels shall be dynamically and statically balanced.
W. Motors shall be of the heavy duty type with permanently sealed ball
bearings. The wheel shaft shall be ground and polished steel mounted in
permanently sealed pillow block bearings. Drives shall be sized for a
minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the machined
cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor
shafts. The motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing.
X. All fans shall be furnished with neoprene vibration isolators.
Y. Fans shall be manufactured by Greenheck or Cook.
Z. Utility Vent Set: Provide the centrifugal belted vent sets shown and
scheduled on the drawings. Fans shall be AMCA rated and installed in
accordance with NFPA 96. Arrangement shall be upblast with drain
opening in bottom of scroll.
AA. Fan wheels shall be backward inclined, non overloading, coated for
corrosion resistance. Inlet shall be a smooth cone. Scroll shall be all
welded, heavy gage steel, coated for corrosion resistance and weather
protection. Rotating assembly shall be dynamically balanced. Bearings
shall be prelubricated ball type rated for 100,000 hour life.
BB. Motor and drive shall be enclosed in a weatherproof housing. Drive shall
be adjustable.
CC. Fan shall be Greenheck or equal.
2.7 GAS FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
A. Provide and install the gas fired radiant heaters indicated on the drawings.
The heaters shall be Re -Verba -Ray as manufactured by Detroit Radiant
Products.
B. Each heater shall be complete with the following components:
1. Frame and burner assembly, suspended from structure at the height
directed.
2. Reflector constructed of .050 mirror polished aluminum.
3. Ceramic Radiator.
4. Secondary radiating rods or screen.
5. Automatic firing assembly including a gas pressure regulator, firing
valve, gas stop and pilot.
6. Electrical controls including remote thermostat, on-off switch, and
prewired control assembly.
C. Each unit shall be equipped with 24 volt automatic ignition and 24 volt
thermostat.
D. The heater infra -red element and secondary radiating surface shall be
warranted for ten years.
E. Each heater shall be suspended at the height directed, and at the angle
directed.
s..� 03860396/98 EQUIPMENT
15500-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
F. Provide and install the gas fired radiant heaters indicated on the drawings.
2.8 UNIT HEATERS - GAS FIRED:
A. Contractor shall furnish and install Modine or Reznor high efficiency gas-
fired unit heater. Performance shall be as indicated on the equipment _
schedule in the plans. Unit heaters shall have A.G.A. design certification.
B. The output capacity shall be a minimum of 82% of the input based on
steady-state thermal efficiency as certified by the American Gas
Association.
C. Casing shatl be draw -formed with a baked enamel finish. Casing shall also
include a hinged bottom panel for easy access to the burner compartment.
Horizontal air deflector louvers shall be provided to aid in controlling the
-
discharge air pattern.
D. Burner material shall be 409 stainless steel with non -clogging, slotted
ports designed for good lighting characteristics without noise of extinction.
E. Heat exchanger shall be designed with direct -fired primary heat exchanger
tubes constructed of stainless steel. The unit shall also have secondary
heat exchanger tubes designed to extract heat from the combustion gases
after the gases have passed through the primary heat exchanger tubes.
The secondary heat exchanger tubes shall be made of type 409 stainless
steel. The header plates of the heat exchanger shall be constructed of
type 409 stainless steel and the entire heat exchanger assembly shall be
completely heliarc machine -welded and shall have smoothly contoured
stress -free, air -foil designed tubes.
F. The units shall have a factory mounted and wired integral power exhauster
directly connected to the unit collector box assembly. The unit shall also -
include a factory mounted and wired safety pressure switch designed to
prevent pilot and main burner ignition until positive venting has been
proved. _
G. Units shall be provided with intermittent -duty pilot ignition and shall be for
natural gas with lockout. All units shall include a redundant type main gas
valve, pilot valve, low voltage control transformer, safety high limit control
(overheat control), safety pressure switch, gas valve regulator and manual
shut-off valve. All gas controls shall be rated for a maximum inlet
pressure of 1/2 psi and shall be exposed for easy access. Controls shall
be designed for operation with natural gas.
H. Motor shall be totally enclosed with built-in automatic overload. Propeller
shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall be equipped with a
safety fan guard.
2.9 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SINGLE ZONE
A. The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop units as shown
and scheduled on the contract documents. The units shall be installed in
accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions
as scheduled.
B. Units shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, Lennox or York.
C. General Unit Description: Units furnished and installed shall be
combination gas heating/electric cooling packaged rooftops as scheduled
on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT 15500-6 c.
t .
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
shall be ARI Standard 210 certified.Units shall consist of insulated
' weather tight casing with compressors, air cooled condenser coil,
condenser fans, evaporator coil, return air filters, supply motors and
drives, gas-fired heating section.
D. Units shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-22.
E. Units shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit
and indicate caution areas. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and
numbered for identification.
F. Capacity: Some latitude will be allowed to compensate for differing unit
r*' manufacturers. However, units shall not be submitted with total capacity
less than 10% below the scheduled capacity nor less than 5% of the
sensible capacity.
!'A G. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint
coating with removable access panels. Structural members shall be 16
gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.
n. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 500 hours in salt spray test in
compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet construction shall allow for all
service/maintenance from one side of the unit. Cabinet top cover shall be
one piece construction or where seams exists, it shall be double hemmed
and gasket sealed.
H. Access Panels: Water and air tight panels with handles shall provide
access to filters, heating section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil
section, and unit control section.
1. Downf low units base pans shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around
the supply and return openings for water integrity.
J. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior
° panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream.
K. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the units and
shall be accessible thru access panels. One inch thick glass fiber
E disposable media filters shall be provided with the provisions within the
unit for 2 inch thick filters to be field provided and installed.
L. Fans and Motors: Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved,
double width, double inlet, centrifugal type fan. Provide self -aligning,
grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication
fittings. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed,
j dynamically balanced supply fans. Provide units 6 1/4 tons and above
with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor sheaves. Outdoor and
-= indoor fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal
thermal overload protection. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically
and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position.
.-� Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished,
I with key -way, and protectively coated with lubricating oil.
M. Gas Fired Heating Section: Completely assembled and factory installed
,.. heating system shall be integral to unit. UL approved specifically for
f outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils.
Threaded connection withlu
p g or cap provided. Provide capability for gas
piping connection through side of unit.
N. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.
O. Gas burner shall be forced combustion type power burner, negative
pressure gas valve, manual shut-off, hot surface ignition, and flame
sensing safety control.
-► 03860396/98 EQUIPMENT 15500-7
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
P.
Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of
combustion air prior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Upon a
failure to ignite, two attempts of ignition will occur before lockout of the
,-
ignition system.
Q.
Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type fan with built-in thermal
overload protection on fan motor.
R.
Heat Exchanger: Provide drum and tube heat exchanger of free floating
...
design manufactured from 18 -gauge aluminized steel. Factory pressure
and leak tested. Heat exhanger shall be warrantied for 10 years.
S.
Outside Air: 25% outside air intake with hood, screen and manual
damper.
T.
Filter Section: Filters shall be factory furnished with each unit. Filter
media shall be one inch thick fiberglass or polyurethan with 20 pores per
inch mounted in rugged individual galvanized frames for easy handling and
cleaning. Both outside and return air shall be filtered. Filter face velocity
'
shall not exceed 400 FPM.
U.
Limit Controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the
event of excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or
loss of indoor airflow.
..
V.
Evaporator Coil: Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically
bonded to copper tubing coil.
W.
Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit.
r
Factory pressure test at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig.
X.
Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC or
galvanized steel with external connections.
Y.
Condenser Section: Provide internally finned 3/8 " seamless copper tube
mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Factory pressure tested to 450
-
psig
Z.
Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans
shall be statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with
integral thermal overload protection in a weather tight casing.
AA.
Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge,
1/2" mesh galvanized wire screen. The screen shall be installed on the 24
_.
gauge stand-off clips to allow 1" clearance between coil and screen.
BB.
Refrigeration System: Provide hermetic reciprocating compressors with
heat treated forged steel or cast iron shafts, aluminum alloy connecting
rods, automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage, internal
'
suction and discharge valves, crankcase heater, and centrifugal oil pump.
Internally isolated motors on springs. Provide suction gas cooled motor
with over temperature and over current protection. Compressors shall be
warrantied for 5 years.
--
CC.
Provide with thermostatic temperature control in the compressor windings,
to protect against excessive temperatures, high and low pressure
conditions.
:^
DD.
Provide each unit with factory supplied and piped liquid line filter drier,
suction and liquid line Schraeder valves..
EE.
Operating Controls: Provide Honeywell T7200 thermostat.
-,
FF.
Roof Mounting Frame: A 13" high galvanized roof mounting frame
supplied by the unit manufacturer shall be furnished and installed for the
unit.
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT 15500-8 i. -
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
GG. This frame shall include a'2"x4" hailer secured to the sides to facilitate
flashing.
HH. This frame shall exactly fit the unit and shall be approved by the National
Roofing Contractors Association.
II. This frame shall be set level and squared according to the manufacturers
instructions and secured to the building as detailed on the drawings.
JJ. All connections to the unit shall be made from bottom within the confines
of the frame.
2.10 FURNACE -GAS FIRED
A. Furnace shall have the heating and fan capacities scheduled. It shall be a
steel forced warm air, gas fired winter air conditioner complete with heavy
furniture steel casing, heat transfer element, burner, draft diverter, gas
pressure regulator, electronic pilot and safety controls, squirrel cage fans
with motors, filter and all other standard accessories.
B. Automatic controls at each unit shall include magnetic gas valves, remote
room thermostats, limit controls, and thermostatic fan switch. Fan motors
shall be provided with thermal overload protection.
C. Temperature controls shall be equal to Honeywell T7300 programmable
thermostat.
D. Furnaces shall be as manufactured by Carrier, Trane or Lennox.
2.11 PACKAGED DX COOLING COIL FOR FURNACE
A. Cooling coil shall fit the furnace. It shall be of the configuration indicated
on the drawings. Provide complete with coil, casing, drain pan, expansion
device and other accessories required. When performing with the furnace
and condensing unit it shall deliver the scheduled capacity.
B. Provide the refrigerant piping to completely connect the coils with the
condensing units. The piping shall consist of precharged lines with quick
couplings. Suction piping shall be insulated with foam plastic insulation
threaded on and sealed. Support the piping with Unistrut hangers.
C. Provide a liquid line filter dryer and a sight glass at each coil.
D. Provide a drain line from each coil to the floor drain.
2.12 PACKAGED AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
A. The air cooled condensing units shall be of the self contained packaged
type suitable for outdoor mounting. Each shall be factory assembled
complete with refrigeration system, condensing coils, fans, controls, etc.
all in a rigidly constructed and finished housing. The condensing unit shall
be connected to the remote cooling coil. The units shall be mounted as
shown on the drawings.
B. The refrigeration system shall be of the hermetically sealed type utilizing
Freon as a refrigerant. It shall be of the air cooled type with the
refrigerant condensed in copper coils with aluminum fins.
C. The fan in each unit shall be direct driven with motor of the permanently
sealed lubrication type.
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT 15500-9
l•
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
D.
Each unit shall have minimum performance characteristics as tabulated on
the drawings. It shall be furnished with the manufacturer's standard
thermostatic, manual, and safety controls, and shall be completely
internally wired. Each shall be furnished with anti -cycle timer, crankcase
heater, high pressure switch and low pressure switch.
E.
Each compressor shall be guaranteed for 5 years.
F.
Units shall be manufactured by Lennox, Carrier or Trane.
.�
2.13 AIR COOLED PACKAGED A/C UNIT
A.
Unit shall be self-contained, factory assembled, wired, and tested. Unit
configuration shall be horizontal for ceiling mounting and designed to fit 2
feet x 4 feet opening of a ceiling system.
B.
Fan shall be double width, double inlet centrifugal type with direct drive
motor.
C.
Filter shall be disposable type one inch thick and accessible through a
==
hinged return air grill.
D.
Unit cabinet and frame shall be 16 gauge furniture grade steel. Cabinet
shall be galvanized steel. All panels shall be insulated with 1 inch thick, 1-
1/2 lb. density insulation.
E.
Refrigeration system shall be completely prepiped with type L copper
tubing. Unit shall be complete with refrigerant metering device and
pressure fittings for charging and evacuation. Compressor shall be high
efficiency hermetic type. Refrigeration system shall be protected with a
manual reset high pressure switch and an automatic reset low pressure
switch.
F.
Water overflow sensor shall be provided to turn unit off in the event the
drain gets clogged.
G.
Electrical components shall be enclosed in a U.L. approved enclosure
within the unit and installed in such a manner that the unit could be
serviced in place where mounted. Control panel shall be wired in
accordance with U.L. standards. A heat, cool thermostat with fan switch
_
shall be provided for field installation.
H.
Cooling coil shall be high efficiency type copper tube, aluminum fins
mechanically bonded.'
I.
Air cooled condenser coil shall be copper tube aluminum fins mechanically
bonded. Coil shall be high efficiency type, factory installed and piped in
the unit.
J.
Condenser fan shall be double width and double inlet centrifugal type.
Blower shall be provided with one speed direct drive motor with a pressure
switch to cycle the fan down to 35° F ambient operation. Fan housing
--
shall be designed for direct mounting to the condenser coil section.
Electrical connection shall be factory provided for field hook-up.
K.
A remote control panel shall be provided with thermostat, status
r -
indicators, and an off -on switch.
L.
Electric reheat coil shall be open wire and shall be installed at the down
stream side of the evaporator coil. Heater operation shall be protected by
the use of primary protection.
M.
Condensate pump shall be provided where required for remote mounting.
115V/60/1 phase electrical power shall be provided from a different
source other than the unit.
03860396/98
EQUIPMENT 15500-10
r—
I I I
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
N. Units shall be Liebert or equal.
2.14 HEATING AND VENTILATION UNIT - DIRECT GAS FIRED
j A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings a complete make-up air
unit as shown and scheduled on the drawings and as herein specified:
Cambridge or equal. Unit shall be factory run and tested.
,!G B. Piping, wiring, adjustments and start-up shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Unit shall be mounted as indicated on
the drawings.
C. The unit shall include aluminized steel weatherproof cabinet with hinged
jand latched weatherproof service enclosure. The outside surface shall be
primed with zinc -chromate and finished with baked enamel. All interior
surfaces shall be internally lined. Provide discharge shut-off damper with
I motor and end switch, weatherhood with rainshield and intake birdscreen
and filter section with 2" thick Farr 30/30 filters.
D. The blower shall be a centrifugal forward curved fan with self -aligning
bearings. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced with
prelubricated ball bearings and adjustable V -belt drive with 1.4 minimum
service factor.
E. The motor shall be as specified under "Motors", this Section. Motor shall
be mounted on an adjustable base.
F. The burner shall be of the direct fired line burner type with spark ignited
intermittent pilot for natural gas as locally available pressure. Turn down
range shall be 25:1.
G. Electrical controls shall include the following:
1. Magnetic motor starter
2. Control transformer
3. High temperature limit switch
4. Air flow switch
5. Automatic mild weather burner lockout
6. Ignition transformer
7. Electronic flame safeguard system
! 8. NEMA 1 control box with dead front fused disconnect
9. Remote control station with switches and indicating lights
H. Gas controls and piping shall include the following:
1. Main gas shut-off valve
2. IRI approved controls
3. Motorized modulating gas valve
4. Discharge air thermostat with remote temperature selector.
17
i
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT 15500-11
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 15550
VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment
and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as
shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein.
B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipmentspecified and/or
shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each
item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished.
C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of
any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of
equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of
equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work
necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided.
D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely
installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of
the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop
drawings that all requirements have been met, including:
1. Space requirements
2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size)
3. Capacities
4. Clearance for maintenance
5. Quality
6. Quantity
F. Contract Closeout Submittals
1. Submit operating and maintenance manuals and wiring diagrams for
all equipment in accordance with Section 01700 - CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. General: Equipment shall be covered by the manufacturer's standard
warranty or guarantee on new equipment, which shall apply for a
minimum of one year following certificate of final payment, unless longer
warranties are specified.
03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
900-9330
VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT - APPARATUS BAY
A. Scope of System Operation: The vehicle exhaust removal system shall
capture 100% of the exhaust emissions directly at the tailpipe of the
vehicle and exhaust those emissions to a specified area safely outside the
building. The operating logic shall be designed to complete this cycle. A
pneumatically operated collection nozzle is connected to a motor vehicle's
exhaust tailpipe when the vehicle is started by the driver, the exhaust fan
will automatically energize and vent toxic gases directly to the outside of
the building. This automatic feature is achieved by means of pressure
sensor located inside the exhaust ducting, this pressure sensor senses the
engine's output pressure upon the first stroke of the engine piston and
energizes the fan starter. The automatic controller uses an adjustable
timer to keep the contactors energized for a designated interval of 2
minutes. Should the operating vehicle not exit the station in less than the
designated time period, a .temperature override switch can be incorporated
to override the timer relay. The override is achieved by means of an
adjustable temperature (heat) sensor has a range of 90 - 130 degrees. If
the vehicle is still running inside the station longer than anticipated, the
heat sensor will override the timer relay. The exhaust system will stay
connected to the vehicle tailpipe as it travels to the exit door by means of
a pneumatic connection device that slides on a specially designed track
system. The sliding track is securely attached to the building structure
and supports a flexible hose assembly that moves with vehicle inside the
station. As the vehicle nears the exit door, the connection nozzle is
automatically released from the tailpipe by means of an uncoupling valve
strategically located on the track. After the system releases the vehicle
tailpipe at the door, it retracts passively and smoothly into a convenient
storage position. When the vehicle returns to the station, a system
operator manually pulls the flexible hose assembly to the entrance door.
The system operator, without bending over, attaches the pneumatic
connection device just inside the door threshold as the vehicle enters the
station, at which time the exhaust fan motor energizes. The vehicle driver
momentarily stops the vehicle when the tailpipe is just inside the door
threshold (a backup man will notify the driver when it is time to stop the
vehicle). The system operator, standing erect with pneumatic slide valve
in his left hand, slides the connection device up against the flanged
adapter attached to the vehicle tailpipe, the' -operator will then inflate
pneumatic nozzle around tail pipe. The cycle is completed as the exhaust
fan vents the toxic gases with the connection nozzle firmly attached. The
vehicle then proceeds to the designated -parking position.
B. Sliding Balancer Track: Sliding track shall be a one piece continuous
extruded track in a minimum length of 20 feet. Construction profile shall
be of a boxloc type profile, which adheres to the following dimensional
data: track height 3 1 /8", width ,1 1 /2", thickness 1 /8". The track
material shall be aircraft aluminum alloy type AA -06063. The track is
designed with three separate and functioning compartments. The
mounting compartment, trolley compartment, and the boxloc
compartment. Each of these compartments performs a specific function
03860396/98
VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-2
M
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r-
to make the system work effectively. The mounting compartment is
designed to accept slider bars (which are provided with factory supplied
vertical support legs and riser clamp duct connection) and allow
!' positioning along the full length of slotted track mounting compartment.
Mounting compartment shall also accommodate compressed airlines for
purposes of a safe storage and appearance. The trolley compartment
conveys the trolley/balancer/hose assembly to the door threshold in a safe
and effective manner. The boxloc compartment allows the whole track to
remain rigid as it hangs from factory -supplied leg supports and to provide
an area to attach bolts for splicing additional tracks together for systems
over 20 feet long. The overall track lengths shall be 20 foot standard and
weight no more than 35 lbs. The track system shall be equipped with end
stops that limit travel of flex hose as the vehicle leaves the building. The
end stops shall be fabricated of zinc plated steel in U -shape form with
rubber end stop on the impact end of the end stop. It is attached by using
a 1/4" molded locking bolt. End stop shall be secured to track with no
less than (2) 1/4" bolts and locking nuts located on the underside of the
track. For security, a 1/4" bolt shall be drilled through the ends of each
track system to insure that the trolley/balancer assembly(s) roll no further
than the end of the track system.
C. Support Legs: Support legs shall be manufactured and provided by the
supplier of primary exhaust system. Supports shall be zinc -plated
telescopic type and shall be capable of telescopic travel form 6 inches to
13 feet. A minimum of one support with appropriate bracing shall be
provided for every 10 linear feet of track profile. The support leg shall
consist of a square outer profile with dimensions no less than 1 3/4" OD,
with 3/8" fastening hardware provided. Inner leg shall be C profile type
with continuous slot along its traveling length. Welded securely to bottom
of C profile shall be a mounting foot complete with slider bar and 3/8"
hardware necessary for mounting horizontal track to mounting
compartment system. The support leg shall be equipped with round
tubular zinc -plated steel with pressed ends. Angle shall be completely
adjustable to the leg support and mounted perpendicular and parallel to
direction of the track. Typical support angle shall be 451 from center line
` of manufacturer provided support leg. The standard leg shall meet the
Seismic 4 requirement needed to meet the specifications.
D. Double Track Joiner Plate: Shall be constructed from a minimum of 1/4"
thick zinc -plated material and designed to connect two parallel tracks to
make a double track system to accommodate bays over 40 feet in depth.
The joiner plate shall be 10" x 8" flat zinc -plated steel and designed to
attach the two tracks to a single support leg. The steel plate shall have
(6) 3/8" holes drilled 6 7/8" apart to accommodate the slider bar provided
with manufacturers support leg. The joiner plate shall have two slider bars
,•• attached to the plate and shall be located on the outside edges of plate,
these slider bars will fit into the boxloc tracks mounting compartment for a
i simple and secure attachment of plate to boxloc track. The center portion
of the joiner plate shall provide attachment for factory -supplied support.
E. Track Splicing Assembly: Shall be fabricated for the sole function of
connecting two boxloc sliding tracks end-to-end. Track splice shall be
manufactured of galvanized steel in two parts as a clamping device. This
x clamp shall accurately secure both tracks in a fashion, which shall
{ I
r- 03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
eliminate any possibility of snagging trolley assembly as it passes through
connection point of track system. Connecting length of splice shall be a
minimum of 15 3/4" long and fabricated of 14 gauge material. Four 1/4"
bolts with lock nuts shall pass directly through internal partition of boxloc
track. The splicing sleeve shall fit externally around the outside dimension -
of track profile.
F. Riser Clamp Assembly: Riser clamp shall be fabricated as a one piece
welded assembly and manufactured to create transfer of hard spiral pipe
joining at the top and flexible duct connection at the bottom. Riser clamp
shall be pre -drilled to mount air regulator to riser clamp assembly and to
accept airlines that pass through air tight seals mounted to riser pipe.
Slider bar and associated hardware shall be provided with riser clamp
assembly. Sizes of the riser clamp will range from 3" - 6" diameter to ^-
match the output velocity of the vehicles that will park in that station.
G. Accutrack Trolley/Balancer Assembly: Trolley assembly shall be
manufactured as a two piece galvanized steel assembly including bumper �-
stops at each end. Fixed to the side of the trolley are solid steel pins
which shall be four load carrying bearings that are sealed and permanently
lubricated. Load carrying bearings shall travel internally in track trolley
compartment. Two additional permanently lubricated trolley wheels shall
be provided on bottom side of track to reduce wobble of trolley as it
.conveys the hose assembly to the door threshold. Release plate shall be
attached to chassis of trolley to smoothly energize uncoupling release
valve when trolley -balancer assembly passes to door threshold. System _
balancer shall be a self-adjusting weight spring tension balancer with a
lifting capacity of no less than 31 Ib. Balancer shall have a minimum
diameter stainless steel cable of .080 and safety link connection.. The
system supplier shall manufacture balancer for the sole purposed of
conveying flexible hose to door threshold of automatic release system.
Balancer block shall bear the name of manufacture on the outside of spring
balancer casing. No exceptions will be taken on this matter.
H. Regulator Assembly: Regulator assembly shall be constructed of cast
aluminum and refinished with black epoxy coating. Regulator shall safely
operate with an input pressure of 0-200 psi, it's output pressure shall be
preset at 15 psi. The regulator shall be attached to each Riser
Assembly/Hose Drop or to the boxloc track to allow for independent
adjustment of each pneumatic nozzle. Regulator shall also be provided
with needle type adjustment gauge that clearly shows proper operating
range of system, and which can be visibly read from floor.
1. Uncoupling Valve Assembly: Provided for active release of connection
nozzle from moving exhaust pipe. Valve shall be single direction action
and affixed to a mounting bracket, which can be easily positioned along
the full length of track profile. Mounting bracket shall be formed from a
minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel and designed to fit snugly over top
of boxloc track system. A 1/4" opening shall be centered to top side of
bracket to accommodate 1" x 1/4". bolt with 1/2" PLT -plated 1 1/2" long
bar providing the secure attachment of uncoupling valve when system is
put into service. Release valve shall be set for the maximum exiting speed
of the vehicle.
03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-4 --
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
J. Upper Flexible Hose: Hose shall be flexible exhaust hose manufactured for
the sole purpose of venting high temperature exhaust gases, which are
produced by internal combustion engines. Flexible hose shall be designed
strictly for the harsh environment of rapid response auto -release of vehicle
tailpipe. Hose shall range from 3 - 5" diameter with varying lengths
depending on system length ranging from 20 - 43' without joining of
splicing connections. Hose material shall be high temperature synthetic
rubber impregnated into a high temperature laminated fabric with a
minimum overlapping thickness of 2 7/16". This construction of hose
must be capable of operating at continuous temperatures of 400°F and
intermittent temperatures of 500°F such as are experienced when pump
engines are tested inside the station. Independent testing by a recognized
UL laboratory shall be submitted. Wire helix shall be bound and protected
in laminations of hose winding. This shall be accomplished in a fashion,
which eliminates any possibility of personnel coming in contact with
exposed hot metal helix. The hose shall further protect internal wire helix
from heat buildup and in turn add increased visibility to personnel. Wear
strip shall be 9/16" wide and provided as a safety yellow color. The bend
radius of the high temperature hose shall be no lesser than 1.5 times the
diameter of hose to insure that hot gases be restricted as they pass
through the system.
K.
Lower Hose Assembly: Shall be a rigid 3-5" diameter by 2 foot long
section of yellow and black hose identical in appearance to the upper hose
assembly. Lower hose shall support connection nozzle and chrome
reducing elbow in a rigid fashion as to allow for operator to place hose
collection nozzle onto tailpipe without bending over. Lower hose is the
only section of hose which shall release from hose assembly in the event
of safety disconnect from the system.
L.
Hose Saddle: Hose suspension saddle shall be fabricated of a rubber
molded cushion specifically manufactured for the sole purpose of
suspending exhaust ventilation hose in a rapid response and auto -release
application. Design of saddle shall smoothly transition direction of hose
during its operating travel. Securing clamps shall be provided including all
link fasteners, which will mount to balancer safety link.
M.
Safety Disconnect Coupling: Rubber coupling shall be: incorporated in the
design of system enabling the lower two foot hose assembly to separate
from the upper hose assembly thus reducing the possible chance of
damage to system, in the event the exhaust connection nozzle assemble
may become entangled in wheels or under carriage of vehicles. This
device shall consist of two spun aluminum collars connected by a reusable
rubber band. The release tension of this device to separate shall be no
greater than 88 lbs. One collar shall house an expanded secondary metal
debris screen. Since this item is a point of safety for both personnel and
the system itself, no exception may be taken.
N.
Manual Fill Valve: Connection valve located 1 foot above safety release
coupling approximately 4 feet from floor and shall be of the sliding/push
button type for manual or automatic release. This valve shall incorporate
in its design a handle, which the operator may easily operate in a standing
position. The attachment of connection nozzle shall not position
operator's breathing zone closer than 44" from the exhaust tail pipe.
Automatic release of connection valve shall be no greater than 3 psi shift
03860396/98
VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
pressure to activate automatic nozzle deflation. Primary air supply shall be
accomplished by means of compression type fitting. Regulated air supply
line to connection nozzle shall be designed to safely release from upper
hose at a release pressure no greater than 80 lbs. No exception shall be
taken to this feature.
0. Connection Nozzle Assembly: Nozzle shall provide a substantially air tight
seal around exhaust tailpipe when connected. Seal shall not allow for
escape of life threatening exhaust gases which may be present during the
following conditions. If vehicle's engine is accelerated above normal idle
resulting in an exhaust velocity greater than 5000 feet/minute or in the
event that the output velocity or CFM of the exhaust exceeds
manufacturer's normal capture velocity or CFM of exhaust system, nozzle
shall automatically adjust its internal orifice to accept any tail pipe ranging
from one inch through six inch diameter. Manufacturer of nozzle shall
offer, if required, both maximum diameter nozzles ranging from 4.75"
diameter to 8.25" diameter. The nozzle pressure shall not exceed 15 psi.
when connected to vehicle tailpipe. Nozzle construction shall be high
temperature synthetic rubber, vulcanized to a high temperature synthetic
fabric.. A nomex inner liner shall be provided as a primary temperature and °~
also act as a friction barrier. The chrome reducing elbow which connects
the pneumatic grabber shall be fabricated using continuous welded
construction. This important feature eliminates the escape of any -�
potentially lethal exhaust gases and must provide for a smooth air flow
transition from connection nozzle to the high temperature flexible hose.
Angle of transition shall be less than or greater than 67° from center line ._
of reducer. Chrome reducer shall incorporate a primary expanded metal
debris screen, which is permanently affixed by welded seams to the inside
opening of exhaust fitting.
P. Compressed Air Features: Airlines shall be 1/4" (6mm) OD tubing capable
of exposure of high temperature air stream inside ventilation hose and duct
and shall be fed through exterior of hose and duct by the use of
substantially air tight chrome fittings. Manufacturer will provide quiet
operating compressor to be located accessible to the vehicle bay and
located so that preventative maintenance can be performed quickly and
effectively. The operation of compressor running inside station shall not
generate sound decibels in excess of 80 Dba. The compressor shall be
equipped with filter/dryer to insure the conveyance of clean dry to the
pneumatic controls incorporated in the auto -release ventilation system.
0. Special Features: System must be designed to expand to tandem vehicle
arrangement (one vehicle behind the other) by adding to the proposed
system. Systems that require replacement of existing system or maior
components to meet a tandem vehicle arrangement, shall not be
acceptable. Upon request, emergency disconnect feature shall be
provided to enable the vehicle to back off the system through a rear exit
door. Unique occasions may require the emergency vehicle to depart from
the back door in a drive through station. Also a malfunction of the front
over -head door may force the vehicle to exit from station outside the
confines of normal operation. Overall system design shall be for both
back -in and drive-through configurations when applicable, this assures
door to door coverage and collection of exhaust gases from point of
connection at doorway of either exit or entrance of facility.
03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-6
row
4
4
' LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
R. Vehicle Tailpipe Modification: Manufacturer drawing must accompany
system for the precise modification procedure for vehicles attached to
extraction system. The modification shall bend the exhaust gases at a 901
` angle on passenger side of vehicle. Tailpipes requiring a 45° angle of
exhaust venting shall not be acceptable, so to prevent exhaust blow back
into station after the auto -release system disengages the tailpipe. A
connection flange shall be provided by manufacturer as a precisely located
stop point for the connection nozzle. The manufacturers supplied adapter
shall securely attach to the vehicle tailpipe. Connection flange shall be
fabricated from 14 gauge aluminized steel. Two section (or) half's shall be
provided for simple attachment to vehicle tailpipe. The sections shall be
bolted together with four (4) 3/4" x 1 1/2" long PLT -plated bolts and nuts
assemblies.
I S. The system shall be as manufactured by Plyovent.
2.2 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT - VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SHOP
A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary
to put in working operation a complete system to remove exhaust gases
and particulate of operating vehicles within the confines of the garage
facility, as shown on the plans and as specified. All necessary controls,
J motors, fittings, duct, blower(s), and all other equipment and materials
specified are a part of this contractor's work.
B. All items of equipment and materials shown on the drawings or described
in the specifications are to be furnished and installed and put in proper
operating condition in accordance with good practice and manufacturer's
written or published instructions.
C. All workmanship and materials shall be in accordance with applicable
codes and regulations, i.e., SMACNA, NEC, ASTM, UBC, UMC, NFPA,
AMCA, IMC. Such codes and regulations are to be considered part of the
specifications. The Contractor shall coordinate his work and advise the
Architect of all special requirements necessary for the: proper installation of
his work.
D. The contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship
t for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the
complete job, against original defects of material and workmanship,
r, excessive wear and deterioration. Defects to be made good at the
Contractor's expense with no cost to the Owner.
E. Contractor shall install straight rail system applications that eliminates
diesel fumes from the garage and does not interfere with normal day-to-
day operations.
y 1. The exhaust system must provide complete evacuation of diesel
40* fumes at the source from start-up of the apparatus to exit of the
apparatus. The diesel evactuation system should be able to attach to
vehicle tailpipes in a 60 ft wide 8 stall mechanic's bay.
2. The system must not affect the personnel maintaining the apparatus.
The hose lengths shall be 30 -ft long high temperature flexible hose
and should not hang lower than seven feet from the floor level. The
hose should not lie on the floor, and be stored in a convenient and
safe fashion.
r- 03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-7
e
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3. The exhaust system should not block doorways, exits, and aisles in
maintenance bay, which would endanger the welfare of maintenance
personnel or visitors.
F. Equipment and materials provided for the system installation(s) shall be
standard product of the manufacturer regularly engaged in the
G.
ip
J.
K.
L.
manufacture of the product specified. Where the requirement calls for a
packaged exhaust system to be provided, all items will be the product of
the manufacturer. System components may not be by other
manufacturers. An authorized service organization, or factory employee
shall supervise the equipment installation.
All workmanship, manufacturing procedures, airflow design, and materials
shall be performance guaranteed. If any findings or test studies reveal
improper materials, defective components or inadequate performance as
outlined in the contract documents, the Contractor shall remove and
replace the materials in question.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals
1. Shop drawings with equipment position, dimensions, sizes, weights,
performance data, and also location and size of field connections.
2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's literature and data sheets
indicating rating capacities, dimensions, weights, accessories,
electrical requirements, wiring diagrams, location and size of field
connections.
3. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
4. Submit fan sound level data for fan specified.
Upon completion and testing of the installed system, test reports shall be
submitted in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each
component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with
specified performance criteria. Each .test report shall indicate the final
position of any controls used to balance system performance.
The equipment specified herein shall be a standard product of PlymoVent
Corporation, or an approved equal. The contractor shall provide all labor
and materials required to install and operate the system which shall be
included in the project. The system(s) shall be as shown on the plans and
as specified herein. Any field adjustments involving equipment location
within the building shall be determined in the field as approved by the
Architect.
Centrifugal Fans: The fan shall be a direct drive centrifugal type, high
pressure, single width, single inlet as required or indicated. Impeller wheels
shall be of a radial design for high static pressure performance. Impeller
wheels shall be spark resistance and made of almag material to prevent
static electricity build up. The impeller shall be dynamically and static
balanced, and of the non -overloading type to provide maximum efficiency
while achieving quiet, vibration -free operation. The fan housing shall be
manufactured from a nonferrous material - almag or equivalent. The fan
motor and assembly shall be mounted on a stainless steel frame for any
weather conditions with four (4)-prepunched openings at bottom of fan
base for field attachment to either exterior wall or roof structure.
Fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). The bearings shall
be self -aligned ball bearing type permanently sealed and lubricated. Fan
shafts shall be steel and rotate in a non -sparking TEFLON seal to prevent
03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM I 15550-8
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
hot gases coming in contact with motor bearings. The exhaust discharge
outlet shall be in compliance with ACGIH recommendations and EPA
requirements (min. of 40" above roofline).
M. Performance: Fan capacity shall be sized as such as to deliver the
indicated 650 CFM at each 5" hose drop to the vehicle being served.
N. Electrical Controllers: Electrical controller shall be approved by
'~ Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as a complete electrical system for
enclosed industrial control panels.
1. Electrical controllers, shall be UL listed/approved and manufactured in
accordance with Underwriters Laboratories standard UL -508 enclosed
industrial control panels. The electrical trolley shall include a limited
energy control circuit. Enclosures hall be NEMA 12 rated and UL listed
+� as Type 12. Electrical enclosure shall be provided and mounted in
electrical enclosure to restrict access to internal components of
controller by only authorized entry.
x- O. Electrical Contactors: Contactors shall be Allen Bradley industrial electrical
contactors provided with the appropriate adjustable overload relays to
meet the proper full load amperage of motor that is outlined in this project.
Contactor shall conform to the following standards: BS -5424, VDE0660,
E and be approved by UL Certification as an approved component.
' P. Control Transformer: To be UL listed industrial control circuit transformer
with primary and secondary fuse blocks. Transformer shall be provided
with multitap primary 208V through 480V, AC, and 24V through 120V
secondary.
r _ Q. Electrical Timer: Shall be solid state, 10 - 300 seconds adjustable timer.
Operating logic shall complete this cycle. Input voltage is applied to the
timer at all times. Upon closure of a normally open isolated start switch,
the load energizes and remains energized as long as the switch is closed.
When the start switch opens, the timing cycle starts. Timer shall be UL
recognized component under file number E65038.
R. Engine Start Switch: Shall be engine pressure sensing type capable of
recognizing the output pressure of any type of motor vehicle. Electrical
contact shall be dry type or not exceed 24V.
S. Electrical Wiring: Shall be run in wire channel to allow for easier
identification of wiring circuit and appearance. All wiring circuitry shall
meet UL listed for proper bending radiuses and terminations.
T. Electrical Terminal Block: Shall be 600 V, UL rated, recognized and shall
provide individual connection points for remote controls, power and motor
connections.
U. Electrical Wiring Schematic: Shall be provided with each electrical control
box supplied. Wiring schematic shall show internal circuitry as well as all
primary and secondary connections to the controller. This schematic shall
be provided as a D -print drawing to the department.
V. Performance: Shall be designed to sense the output pressure, which is
normally generated by any internal combustion engine designed to propel
any motor vehicle. The operating logic shall be designed to complete this
cycle. At any point in time when a collection device is connected to a
motor vehicle's exhaust tailpipe and at which time the operator manually
or automatically energizes the vehicle. This controller shall automatically
sense the engine's output pressure and in turn energize the electrical
contactors which will provide proper full load amperage to the exhaust
03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-9
M
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
system fan motor . The controller through the use of an adjustable timer
shall keep the contactors energized from 10 — 300 seconds. If the
responding vehicle does not disconnect from the exhaust ventilation
system in less than designated setting, a temperature override switch can
be incorporated to override the timer delay relay to ensure continuous
system operation. This automated function will work for as long as the
exhaust gas temperature is in excess of setting on heat sensor located in
the ductwork. This cycle shall not allow the electrical contactor, which
energizes the exhaust fan, to short cycle or stop while the system is
connected to an operating vehicle.
W.
Ductwork type and materials: To be UMC class C or SMACNA class II
product conveying . And must meet or exceed criteria for construction
and performance as outlined in Round Industrial Duct Construction
Standards, SMACNA. Materials of construction unless otherwise specified
for all duct and fittings shall be in minimum G-90 galvanized sheet metal in
accordance with ASTM -A525 and A527.
X.
Ductwork sizing and gauges: All duct subject to positive or negative
pressure shall be of round spiral pipe construction, with the range of
available sizes not to exceed 10 inches diameter. Duct gauge shall depend
on diameter and a minimum operating pressure of 8 inches water gauge.
Acceptable gauge and reinforcement requirements shall be in accordance
to the following. Inner duct diameter 4" - 8" diameter @ 26 -gauge .—
standard spiral pipe.
Y.
Ductwork Fittings: All exhaust fittings shall be round and have a wall
thickness 2 gauges (one even gauge number) heavier than the lightest ._
allowable gauge of the downstream section of duct to which they are
connected. Branch entrances shall be factory fabricated fittings or factory
fabricated duct /tap assemblies. Fittings shall be constructed so that air
streams converge at angles of 451. All seams shall be continuos stitch
welded and if necessary internally sealed to insure airtightness. Turning
elbows shall be stitch -welded and used for all diameters and pressures.
They shall be fabricated of 24 gauge galvanizedsteeland constructed as
two piece with continuous welded seam construction fittings. Tapered
body fittings shall be used wherever particular fallout is anticipated, and
where air flow is introduced to the transport duct manifold.
Z.
Ductwork Design Velocities: Shall be a minimum of 3500 - 4000 feet /
minute transport velocity. Capture velocity shall be 5500 - 6000 FPM to
extract 100 % of exhaust gases.
AA.
Scope of System Operation: The operating logic of this system shall
complete the following cycle. Upon the vehicles parking inside the garage
the exhaust system will store two suction trolleys in the 50 ft suction rail L -
profile. The operator has the option to locate the suction trolleys at the
most convenient location to access the 5" flexible hose. The hose shall
be equipped with a dampered nozzle that is hinged to enable a connection .-
to emergency vehicles tailpipes ranging in size from 3" — 6" diameter.
Upon connection to the vehicle exhaust pipe to the vehicle exhaust
ventilation system, the exhaust fan shall automatically and instantaneously �..
energize. This ensures total collection of the exhaust gases prior to the
vehicle entering the building. As the vehicle operates inside the garage
the extruded rail profile, which the two suction trolleys and flexible hoses
are connected to, convey the exhaust fumes directly to the outside of the
03860396/98
VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-10 �-
x '
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
facility to an exhaust fan mounted to the outside of the building. An
adjustable timer ranging from 15 - 300 seconds which will allow fan to
operate with vehicle engine.
BB. Straight Rail profile and construction: Shall be onepiece continuous
extruded profile in a minimum length of 20 feet. Construction shall be a
round profile type, which adheres to the following dimensional data: rail
diameter 6.6", rail thickness 0.175". The bottom of rail profile will have
continuous slots that will accept specially designed rubber sealing lips.
Construction shall be aircraft aluminum alloy type AA -06063. Rail shall be
!' extruded as a one-piece unit to maximize structural integrity of rail and to
minimize joints, which may add to possible leakage of gases. Extruded into
rail profile shall be all necessary mounting guides, which will allow for
*� support of rail mounting hardware and airline magazine cable supports.
Mounting compartment shall be provided continuously along both sides of
the rail extrusion, so not to limit the proper positioning of all mounting
supports in accordance with local, state, and federal codes.
CC. Support Assembly: Shall be horizontal 1 - rigid pipe welded to a curved
mounting plate and bent at 6.5 " radius, specifically designed to slide in a
�.- mounting slots of extruded rail profile. The support bar shall be zinc -plated
t bright and provided with two 3/8" by 1- /4 " hex head bolts, washers and
nuts to attach mounting support to rail. Mounting support shall be
fastened by the use of this hardware in a fashion that shall bolt the
mounting support securely through the exterior wall of the rail profile and
shall be securely fastened with nut and locking washer. Securely mount
entire length of rail profile to building structure. This shall be completed
with the use of galvanized/plated 1-%" diameter rigid conduit or 1-%"
t diameters schedule 40 pipe. Intersections of pipe shall be connected
securely by the use of pipe clamp couplings (key clamp type). The
primary locking screw, as well as, secondary safety self -tapping bolt shall
secure all vertical pipe -coupling connections. Vertical support and bracing
shall be provided to safely secure rail profile in accordance with building
code and seismic standards, which may apply. A minimum of one support
with appropriate bracing shall be provided for a maximum of every fifteen
linear feet of exhaust rail profile.
DD. Rail Splicing Joint: Shall be formed by extrusion equal to internal diameter
of suction rail profile. Splice shall have a wall thickness of no less than
.190" in thickness and a length of no less than 8" from end to end. Rail
splicing shall be safely secured by no less than 16 (Oxy) 1-'/4 " x 3/8"
bolts, nuts and lock washers. Each of which shall pass directly through
exterior rail profile / splicing joints and be secured with internal locking
,-- washer and nut. Self -tapping bolts/screws shall not be acceptable.
EE. Duct Connection (connection cut into rail profile): Shall be rectangular to
6" diameter round transition fitting fabricated from 20 gage galvanized
steel. Rectangular slot shall be 19" long by 1-3/4" high with 3/8" external
flange to slide into rail profile.
FF. Suction Trolley Assembly: Shall be a gantry type trolley with sealed
bearing loaded wheels designed to roll inside the internal rail profile. The
trolley chassis shall be galvanized steel epoxy -coated black finish. The
chassis is fitted with a tapered cone. The cone shall be fitted with
independent friction wheels that minimize resistance between cone and
! rubber sealing lips. The exhaust cone transition shall be a tapered slot
G
03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-11
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
GG.
HH.
900-9330
design, which shall fit inside suction rail profile. The tapered slot shall be
equal or exceed in area (sq. inches) the diameter of exhaust ventilation
hose which it is attached to. The trolley assembly shall be equipped with
rubber impact bumpers at both front and rear of chassis to eliminate metal
to metal contact which would destroy or damage trolley assemblies.
Balancer: Shall be adjustable weight balancer with a lifting capacity of no
less than 31 Lb. Balancer shall have a minimum diameter stainless steel
cable of .080 diameter and safety link connection. The balancer cable is
10ft long and the operation of the balancer shall be in a latch and lock
style.
Upper Flexible Hose: 5" hose shall be flexible exhaust hose manufactured
for the sole purpose of venting high temperature exhaust gases which are
produced by internal combustion engines. Flexible hose shall be designed
strictly for the harsh environment of maintenance facility. The hose shall
be made of a single layer of specially coated kevlar fabric, which has a
high temperature resistance. The kevlar fabric is mechanically joined to an
outer steel coil which has been coated in a tough, heat resistant, soft
plastic material in order to guard against impact as well as wear and tear.
The exhaust hose contains no glass fiber or asbestos. The temperature
range for this hose shall be + 570 degree Fahrenheit continuous operation
and + 625 degrees Fahrenheit intermittent operation.
Lower Hose Assembly: Shall be a high temperature 5" diameter by 6 foot
long section of 1200 degree hose. Hose construction shall be of double
layered, chemically treated, woven glass fabric which is resistant to high
temperatures. The woven glass fabric is mechanically joined to an outer
steel coil. The exhaust hose contains no asbestos. The temperature range
shall be 1200 degree Fahrenheit continuous operation and 1380 degree
Fahrenheit intermittent operation.
Connection Nozzle Assembly: Nozzle shall provide mechanical connection
around exhaust tailpipes ranging from 3" - 6" diameter. The nozzle
comprises a powder coated metal pipe and spring- loaded rubber lid. The
rubber lid which shuts tight and functions as a drought valve when the
nozzle is not being used, opens using a rubber -faced handle. The nozzle is
equipped with an exhaust probe opening sealed with a rubber plug.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Exhaust System: The exhaust removal system shall be installed as
indicated and recommended by the manufacturer. Welding and brazing --
shall conform to AMSE-17. Slip joints shall be sealed.Riser duct shall be
supported to the structure as indicated on the drawing. Main duct shall be
attached to building structural members.
B. Building Surface Penetrations: All penetrations to interior and exterior
walls shall be core drilled. All penetrations shall be sealed using a clear
waterproof sealant. Where core drilling is not possible, penetrations shall
be framed and sealed using sheet metal collar. The owner shall approve
all framing of duct penetrations around exterior and interior walls.
03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-12
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.2 APPARATUS BAY EXHAUST SYSTEM SUSPENSION
A. Guide Track: Installation height of sliding balancer track shall a minimum
of 10' and a maximum of 14' off the finished floor, or as otherwise
indicated on the drawings. The sliding balancer track shall be installed
approximately 20" from the side of the vehicle and maximum of 7' from
door threshold. The sliding balancer track for the exhaust system shall
include the highest quality of corrosion resistance supports and shall be
supplied by the manufacturer of exhaust system for ease of mounting to
structural channel, trusses, or angle iron. Brackets shall be a minimum of
0.125" thickness. Mounting bolts to be no less than 0.375" diameter
(structural grade 8) for connection to steel frame. Bolts required for
masonry installation shall be 0.5 x 3.5" expansion bolts, or 0.375" x 4"
sleeve anchors for wall mount masonry connection.
3.3 VEHICLE MAINTANCE SHOP EXHAUST SYSTEM SUSPENSION
A. Guide Rail: Installation height of straight rail shall a minimum of 10' and a
maximum of 16' AFF, or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. The
straight rail shall be installed 16 ft from door threshold parallel to the bay
door openings approximately 15ft AFF. The straight rail for the exhaust
system shall include the highest quality of corrosion resistance supports
and shall be supplied by the manufacturer of exhaust system for ease of
mounting to structural channel, trusses, or angle iron. Straight rail shall be
installed using the manufacturer's suggested guidelines including all
relative support members that attach to the building structure. Brackets
shall be a minimum of 0.125" thickness. Mounting bolts to be no less than
0.375" diameter (structural grade 8) for connection to steel schedule 40
pipe frame. Bolts required for masonry installation shall be 0.5 x 3.5"
expansion bolts, or 0.375" x 4" sleeve anchors for wall mount masonry
connection.
3.4 TESTING
A. Tests: Each exhaust system and inlet shall be balanced to produce the
indicated air quantities within 10 percent at conditions shown. Control
devices shall be set to control at the points indicated or directed. Any
fans with bearings shall be lubricated, and the speed, direction and
rotation of each fan shall be checked and verified as correct. Upon
completion and prior to acceptance of the installation, the exhaust system
shall be tested at the operating conditions to demonstrate satisfactory
functional and operating efficiency. Operating tests shalt cover a period of
not less than 2 hours for each system, and all tests will, if requested, be
conducted in the presence of the Owner or his designated representative.
If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory operation of the exhaust system,
deficiencies shall be corrected and tested. All instruments, facilities, and
labor required to properly conduct the tests shall be provided by the
Contractor. In addition, the vehicles to be attached to the exhaust system
shall flow tested to determine the maximum output velocity of exhaust
gases. Consideration shall be made for static regain made possible by a
substantially airtight connection to the vehicle tailpipe.
r~ 03860396/98 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM 15550-13
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.5 TRAINING
A. The Contractor, or authorized approved personnel, shall provide training to
the Owner (or appointed representatives of the Owner) in the daily use of
and maintenance of the vehicle exhaust removal system installed and
specified herein. The Owner shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the
date scheduled for the training course. Training shall be for all personnel
involved with the operation of exhaust system including all shifts required
to man the facility. Training session shall be in person by a duly
recognized representative of the manufacturer of exhaust system, 1
furthermore, an up-to-date training video will be provided to the owner
before project is signed off as completed.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98
VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 15600
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions
of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor,
materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all
operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various
systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air, correct setting
of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described
hereinafter.
B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical
equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain
optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building.
C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and
operation of the system.
D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the
building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained
throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions.
E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in
which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any
necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce
optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper
conditions in each conditioned space.
F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper
relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the
Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking
hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical
room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not
exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire
temperature survey period.
G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans shall be varied as
required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within
each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each
zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to
furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the
Owner, to attain the specified air volumes.
i
03860396/97 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15600-1
�.- MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
f
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data:
1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each
separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at
time of measurement.
2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to -
the temperature tabulation specified above.
3. Air quantities at each air handling device.
4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust
fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be
related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. ~`
5. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the
time of the reading shall be listed.
I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with
any typed supplements required to completely document all results.
Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this
shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be
provided.
J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets
indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in
quadruplicate.
1.3 -INSTRUCTIONS
A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the
operation and maintenance of all equipment.
B. Submit complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and
operation of the system components as specified in Section 01700 -
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. Provide complete data on all equipment, including
for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where
replacement parts can be purchased.
END OF SECTION
03860396/97 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15600-2
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS --
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16000
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this Section.
1.2 ELECTRICAL LINES
A. General: In general, the electrical lines to be installed under these
specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by
particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally
accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily
workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running
of electrical lines and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at
the building necessitate deviating from these standards.
B. Field Conditions: The electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations
of electrical lines, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, and
other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the
site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to avoid all
obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers
of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated,
satisfactorily operating installation.
C. Locations of Electrical Devices: The electrical plans show diagrammatically the
locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of
circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus
shall be determined by reference to the general plansand to all detail
drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements
at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall
be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right
to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before
installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation
if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner.
D. Space Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting
of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment
which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those
indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect
before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of
failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary
changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense.
03860396/98 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
E. Working Drawings: The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all
his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these
specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the
work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be
corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds.
F. Order of Precedence: Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the
conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the
chases and walls. The installation shall be coordinated with the work of all
other trades. The following order shall govern:
1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as
lighting fixtures, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid
conflicts at the site.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and
whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets.
G. Equipment Connections: Conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall
be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in
chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the
open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the
top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner.
H. Exceptions and Inconsistencies: Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and
specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract
is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all
changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular
apparatus, material, or equipment.
1.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. Description: All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for
pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be
done under Division 16 of these specifications. Every electrical current
consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the
Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division
16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of
wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the
responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between
the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern.
1.4 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. General: The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress
of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification
from the Architect or Owner.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. General: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as
recommended by the manufacturer.
03860396/98 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.6 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS
900-9330
A. General: The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be
necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall
include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect
any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus
above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the
uncompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on
the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction
of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of
apparatus in question.
1.7 TESTING
A. General: The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform
the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by
the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and
materials necessary for making tests.
1.8 COOPERATION
A. General: The contractor for the work -under each section of these
specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other
sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a
finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none
of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped,
hindered or delayed at any time.
1.9 COORDINATION OF TRADES
A. Ceiling Mounted Items: Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be
coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section
shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or
samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any
device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor
at his expense.
B. , Electrical Items: All items specified under Divisions 16 shall be installed tight,
plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other
trades.
1.10 PAINTING
A. Painting for Division 16 shall be as follows:
1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be
touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by
a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory
primed surfaces.
03860396/98 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2. Paint all exposed conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and
miscellaneous metal.
3. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare
metal is visible.
1.11 LARGE APPARATUS
A. General: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in
the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows,
doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and
placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed.
1.12 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. General: It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special
drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to
coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to
facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to
illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use.
These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work.
Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three
copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information.
1.13 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
A. General: The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these
specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall
rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another
section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all
drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work
involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the
scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished
equipment. -
B. Discrepancies: Should any. of the equipment furnished require connections of
a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the
Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. Minor differences
in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not
constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-4
I-
t LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
i
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division -1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all electrical
raceways, conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes,
together with all fittings, supporting devices, and other accessories required.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide manufacturer's catalog data on all conduit, conduit fittings, raceway,
outlet boxes, pull boxes and junction boxes.
1_.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in accordance with
Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. Accept delivery of conduit,
raceway, pull and junction and outlet boxes on site and inspect for damage.
Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect
conduit and raceway from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above
grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Protect PVC
conduit from sunlight.
03860396/98 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-1
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
900-9330
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Routing of Conduit: Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior
to rough -in. Conduit routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate
locations unless dimensioned. The contractor shall verify all site conditions
and shall route as required to complete the wiring system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
nm
B.
C
10
L�
F.
Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside
or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled
according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard 080.1; Pittsburg,
Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided
with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according
to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic
Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent.
Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel;
galvanized outside with protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled
according to Standard 1242; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.6; Allied,
Republic Steel, or approved equivalent.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips
(commercial Greenfield) or interlocked aluminum construction; conforming to
UL Standard UL I and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable
Company, or approved equivalent.
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized
steel strips or interlocked aluminum construction as for flexible metal conduit;
with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit
liquidtight; UL listed and labeled; Electri-flex type "LA" or approved equivalent.
PVC Conduit: Type 40 heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) conduit, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed
for direct burial use; Carlon or approved equivalent.
2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel
threaded couplings conforming to ANSI/NEMA FB1; bushing at all boxes and
cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet.
B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing (Compression and
Set Screw Couplings): Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type
couplings and connectors where exposed to the weather or in wet locations.
Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. Couplings shall
conform to ANSI/NEMA FB1. The connectors shall have insulated throats so
as to not damage the insulation during wire pulling operations.
03860396/98 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
C. Couplings and Terminations for Intermediate Metal Conduit: Same as for rigid
steel conduit.
D. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to
ANSI/NEMA FB1; T & B 440 Series or approved equivalent couplings at
connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series
or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or
cabinet terminations.
E. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming
to ANSI/NEMA FB1; T & B 5271 Series or approved equivalent adapters at
connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series or
approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet
terminations.
F. Couplings and Terminations for PVC Conduit: Type 40 heavy wall, high
impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings, conforming to NEMA
Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or
approved equivalent. PVC couplings and solvent cement by the same
manufacturer as the PVC conduit.
2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS IN CONDUIT
A. Description: Provide conduit expansion joints with internal ground and external
bonding jumper, 0-Z Type AX or approved equivalent.
2.4 CONDUIT SEALS
A. Description: Conduit seals shall be UL listed for the purpose. Killark series
ENY, EYS, EY, or Crouse Hinds series EYS, EZS, ES or approved equivalent.
B. Sealing Compound: Sealing compounds shall be UL approved for the purpose
and shall not be affected by the surrounding atmosphere or liquids, and shall
not have a melting point of less than 93 degrees C. 200 degrees F.)
2.5 WIREWAYS
A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw
covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square
D, General Electric, or approved equivalent.
B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable
front cover which is Basketed; weatherproof rainhood.
2.6 OUTLET BOXES
A. General: Outlet boxes shall be UL listed of sizes and types specified. Provide
boxes with integral brackets equal to Raco Style "FM".
B. Sheet Steel Boxes: NEMA OS 1, sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge,
galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City, Appleton or approved equivalent.
C. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB1, cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs;
Crouse -Hinds, Appleton, Pyle National or approved equivalent.
03860396/98 RACEWAYS AND :FITTINGS 16110-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
2.7 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Description: Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized
covers.
B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic
inches, use standard outlet boxes.
C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches,
use cabinets as specified for panelboards cabinets with covers of the same
gauge as cabinets, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes and enclosures for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WIRING METHODS
A. Description: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical
metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run
exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other
conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted.
3.3 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Underground Installations: .
1. Type: Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
2. In or under slab on grade: Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
3. Minimum size: 3/4 inch.
B. Outdoor Locations Above Grade:
1. Type... Rigid steel conduit.
2. Minimum size: 112 inch.
C. Wet and Damp Locations:
1. Type: Rigid Steel Conduit.
2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
D. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed within 6 :feet of finished floor: Rigid steel conduit or
intermediate metal conduit.
3. Exposed above 6 feet of finished floor where not subject to mechanical
damage: Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical
metallic tubing.
4. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
03860396/98 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-4
r
I LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
0
3.4 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS
900-9330
A. Installation: Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard Of
Installation." Install raceways, boxes and enclosures according to the
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Conduits: All exposed runs shall be installed level. and square and at proper
elevations, parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner.
Provide adequate headroom.
C. Bends: Install no more than the equivalent of four 90 -degree bends between
boxes. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Use hydraulic
one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless
otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight
legs of offsets parallel. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is
crushed, deformed or otherwise injured.
D. Conduit Bodies: Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction.
E. Expansion Joints: Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansions and
deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints.
F. Completion: Complete raceway installation before starting conductor
installation.
G. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without
injury or excessive strain. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are
minimum sizes to be installed.
H. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12 inches
long and not more than 24 inches long at final connections to all motors,
generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of
vibration or mechanical adjustment. In damp or wet locations, and where
installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
I. Connections to Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Use maximum of 6 feet flexible
metal conduit at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as
required.
J. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within twelve
inches of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where
crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least six inches from
insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid
installing raceways directly above or in close proximityto boilers and other like
objects operating at high temperatures.
K. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid
installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they
must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing
compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the
raceways.
L. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs
("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction to
prevent foreign matter from entering raceway. Do not pull any conductors into
raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all
raceways before pulling in conductors.
a
03860396/98 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r
M.
Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through fire rated walls, partitions,
etc., carefully fill all space between the outside of the raceway and the
building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling
material shall be in accordance with Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING.
N.
Roof Penetrations: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and
ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location
with roofing installation.
0.
Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not
containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to `
facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall
have not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull line. Identify
each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the
purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be
nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds.
3.5 JOINING
AND TERMINATING CONDUITS
A.
Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit --
ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull
boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized
locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set
screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit
systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems.
B.
Joining Electrical Metallic Tubing: Cut conduit square using saw or pipe
cutter; de -burr cut ends. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and fasten
securely.
C.
Joining PVC Conduit: Join PVC conduit using cement as recommended by the
manufacturer. Wipe PVC conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full coat
of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty
minutes, minimum.
D.
Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings,
align the raceway to enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part
against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut,
use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box. Where terminating in
threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears
against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the
raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipples
so no threads are exposed.
3.6 TELEPHONE AND DATA CABLE RACEWAYS --
A. 2 -inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above requirements, install
in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90 degree bends
or equivalent. Install pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with
these requirements.
03860396198 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-6
r
T7
t:
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
3.7 480 VOLT SYSTEMS
900-9330
A. General: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase
conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang
wall switch box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and
its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers between adjacent
switches in the box so that two different phase wires will not be the same
compartment.
3.8 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical
Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions.
B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of
riser clamps or U -bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening
in the floor.
C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with
galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps.' Carry individually supported
horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on galvanized steel hangers. Use no
perforated strap iron as hanger material. Arrange supports to prevent
misalignment of conduit during wire installation.
D. Above Non -removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are
installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry
ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner
channels.
E. Above Removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1 /4" are installed
above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where
present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any
wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Do not
attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Locate conduits a sufficient distance
above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as
not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling
panels.
F. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same
elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut
or approved equal angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size
trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded
weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the
smallest conduit supported. Group related conduits together. Provide space
on each rack for 25 percent additional conduit.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet
box in which conduits shall terminate. Install boxes in accordance with NECA
"Standard of Installation." Install in locations as shown on the Drawings, and
as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and
compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes.
r- 03860396/98 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-7
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1 /2" minimum depth with 3/8"
fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted
or suspended.
D. For Wall Switches, ;Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size
with proper square cornered tile wall cover; plaster cover, or finishing plate,
except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box.
E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep,
unless otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box.
F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. Use cast fully adjustable floor
boxes for installations in slab on grade.
G. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with Basketed covers. Use cast outlet
box in exterior locations exposed to weather and wet locations.
H. Location of boxes: Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate
mounting heights indicated or specified in section for outlet device. Electrical
boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended
purpose. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and
in unfinished areas only.
I. Orientation of Boxes: Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented
as specified in Section 16140 —WIRING DEVICES.
J. Above Accessible Ceilings: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6
inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed lighting fixture.
Locate outlet boxes to allow lighting fixtures positioned as shown on reflected
ceiling plan.
K. Fire Resistance: Install boxes in accordance with UL assembly design
requirements to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,
using materials and methods specified.
L. Coordination: Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted
above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
M. Adjacent Devices: Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,
thermostats, and similar devices.
N. Masonry Boxes: Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting
of masonry unit only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
O. Wall Boxes: Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Do not install
flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches
separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately
position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel bridges to
fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Install flush mounting box
without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
P. Ceiling Boxes: Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet
box. Do not fasten to ceiling support wires or ceiling panels. Support boxes
independently of conduit.
Q. Gang Boxes: Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together.
Do not use sectional box. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device
outlets.
03860396/98 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-8
FLUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
3.10 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
900-9330
A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger
sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate.
B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent
of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not
otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access.
3.11 IDENTIFICATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Branch Circuits: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink
to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the
panel and circuit number of the wiring contained.
B. Emergency Systems: Each pull and junction box serving emergency circuits
shall be painted red and shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring
contained inside the box. The label shall indicated the panel and circuit
number of the wiring contained.
C. Other System: Boxes serving other systems shall be labeled with indelible ink
to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. Identify the wiring system by
name (Fire Alarm, P.A., Telephone, Data Cable, Security, Closed-circuit TV,
Etc.).
3.12 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
A. Conduit Seals: Provide and install conduit seals as shown on the Drawings
and in accordance with Article 501 of the National Electrical Code. Install
conduit sealing fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations.
B. Sealing Compound: In the completed seal, the minimum thickness of the
sealing compound shall not be less than the trade size of the conduit, and in
no case less than 5/8 inch.
C. Splices and Taps: Splices and taps shall not be made in fittings intended only
for sealing with compound, nor shall other fittings in which splices or taps are
made be filled with compound.
D. Liquid Traps: Where there is a probability that the liquid or the condensed
vapor may be trapped within enclosures for control equipment or at any point
in the raceway system, approved means shall be provided to prevent
accumulation or to permit periodic draining of such liquid or condensed vapor.
E. Boxes for Hazardous Areas: Cast metal boxes approved for the location in
which used.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-9
4
1
t .
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 16115
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all underground
electrical duct and direct burial conduit and pullboxes together with all other
accessories required.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02200 - EARTHWORK: Excavation and backfill of utility.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
C. Coordination Drawings: Submit for review complete coordination drawings
showing duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground
structures. Include plans and sections drawn to accurate scale.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site in accordance
with Section 01600- MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. Accept conduit on site.
Inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required
time period. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing
above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
r- 03860396/98 UNGERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on
Drawings.
B. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes and
pullboxes with final arrangement of other utilities as determined in the field.
1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
A. Underground Plastic Conduit: Type 40, heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications
TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or equivalent.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: As specified under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND
FITTINGS.
2.2 PULLBOXES
A. Polymer Concrete/Fiberglass Pull Boxes: Constructed of polymer concrete and
reinforced by a heavy -weave fiberglass. Cross ribbed, heavy duty cover to
support heavy pedestrian or light vehicular traffic. Cover with non -slip
checkered surface. Neoprene gasket attached to cover. Size pullbox as
required by NEC. Composolite "PC" style as manufactured by Quazite.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Underground Warning Tape: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored
yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
PART 3 EXECUTION `
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine site to receive ducts and manholes for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
underground ducts and manholes. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 < EXCAVATION
A. Perform excavation as specified in Section 02200- EARTHWORK.
03860396/98 UNGERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-2
FLUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r-
3.3 BACKFILLING
A. Perform backfill in accordance with Section 02200 - EARTHWORK.
3.4 OPENING AND CLOSING PAVEMENT
A. General: Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets,
drives or other existing pavement, including "black topping," cut the pavement
as required. Hold the size of the cut to a minimum consistent with the work
to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed and
the excavation has been backfilled, patch the paving using materials to match
those cut out. Take care that the patches are level with the original surfaces
and thoroughly bond with them.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT
A. General: Assemble and install conduit according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to
the contrary. Make joints with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends
of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field bends with
proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening
are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. "Snake" plastic
conduit in trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to
allow for expansion and contraction. Maintain this configuration during
backfilling.
B. Separation Between Conduits: 3 inches minimum for like services, and 6
inches minimum between power and signal ducts.
C. Terminations: Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from
plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such
structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar
change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to
underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried
in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits.
D. Waterproof Wall and Floor Entrances: Install a watertight entrance sealing
device with the sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into
masonry construction with 1 or more integral flanges. Secure membrane
waterproofing to the device to make permanently watertight.
E. Pulling Cord: Install 100 -pound -test nylon cord in each conduit, including
spares.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT
A. General: Install conduit according to manufacturer's written instructions. All
steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such
conduit with 0.020 inch thick vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double
thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable
solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped
in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job,
overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints.
r- 03860396/98 UNGERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-3
rt
f
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.7 INSTALLATION OF PULLBOXES
A. General: Install cast iron pullboxes in concrete pad with 4" minimum concrete
on all sides of pullbox. Set top of pullbox flush with concrete. Do not install
pullbox in low areas where water may stand.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 UNGERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-4
c
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
f'.
C
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together
with all splices, connections, terminations and identification for wiring systems
rated 600 volts and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide manufacturer's catalog data on conductor and insulation materials.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's
instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
[ B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Routing of Wire and Cable: Wire and cable routing shown on the Drawings is
approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet
Project Conditions. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and
destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required
0
03860396/98 CONDUCTORS 16120-1
r
I
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous
without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and
other imperfections. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller
shall be solid.
B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN or THWN-2 insulation,
temperature rated 90 degrees C, unless the type is specifically designated or
specified. Service feeders shall be type THWN-2. Feeder circuits shall be
Type THWN-2.
C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN-2 conductors,
temperature rated 90 degrees C, for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for
motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient
temperature or convection or radiant heat.
D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the
purpose.
E. Manufacturers: Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda; Simplex or approved equivalent.
2.2 JOINTS AND SPLICES
A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure
connectors or compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes
to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with
properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable.
B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors;
or UL approved electrical spring connectors make. All connectors shall be of
proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not
acceptable.
2.3 COLOR CODING
A. General: Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color A
coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall
be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the
specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors
shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of slip-on colored plastic
sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes,
panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points.
B. Neutral and Grounding Conductors: Neutral conductors shall be white or
natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more
yellow stripes.
C. 208 Volt System: Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases,
A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system.
D. 480 Volt System: Phase conductors shall be yellow, brown and orange for
phases A, B, and C respectively in the 480 volt system.
^
03860396/98 CONDUCTORS 16120-2
71 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables
for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WIRE PULLING
A. Preparation: Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause
injury to conductors is completed.
B. Pulling Lines: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors
into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable
material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of
woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors.
C. Multiple Wires in a Raceway: All conductors to be installed in a single conduit
shall be pulled in simultaneously.
D. Cable Lubricant: Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound for
building wire No. 4 and larger. All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall
be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which
they are used.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. General: Install conductors as indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions and the NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints
or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where
circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through
circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit.
C. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed
in a single conduit, except that one 3 -wire circuit or one 4 -wire circuit
consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different
phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This
provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors
of a circuit with three- and four-way switching.
D. Dedicated Neutrals: Where indicated on the drawings, branch circuits shall be
installed with dedicated neutrals in a single conduit.
E. Wiring at Outlets and Switches: Install with at least 12 inches of slack
conductor at each outlet and wall switch.
F. Terminations: Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as
indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals,
including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published
torque -tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A.
G. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control
circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the
National Electrical Code.
03860396/98 CONDUCTORS 16120-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
r
900-9330
H. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or
scheduled otherwise.
I. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of
run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10
conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors.
J. Home runs on 277 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of
run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 175 feet use No. 10
conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors.
K. Different voltages in same raceway: Power and Lighting circuits of different
system voltages (e.g. 208Y/120 and 480Y/277 volts) shall not occupy the
same conduit.
L. Emergency Lighting and Power Conductors: Run in conduits separate from all
other wiring.
M. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at
outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically
secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with rubber tape, and
friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the
conductor. In lieu of this, vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least
four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals,
sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of insulating putty.
N. Wet Locations: Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in
accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations.
O. Identifying Labels: Adhesive vinyl cloth or vinyl self -laminating adhesive
labels; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Handwritten labels are not
acceptable. Securely fasten labels to all cables, feeders and power circuits in
pull boxes, outlet boxes, wireways, lighting, power and distribution
panelboards, etc.
P. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the
like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle
conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors
in larger groups.
Q. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical
conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes
shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS
gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured
with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable
supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly
and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a
basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved by the
cable manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 CONDUCTORS 16120-4
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the agreement and Division -1 General Requirements, apply to the
work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices
indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly
connected to conductors so as to be operable.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's
instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and
installation of Product.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code . Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
�^ Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
' A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of
Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Bryant, Leviton and
Pass and Seymour are also acceptable.
B. Specification Grade: All wiring devices shall. be "Heavy Duty, Specification
Grade", and shall be UL listed.
±"" 03860396/98 WIRING DEVICES 16140-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.2 COLORS _
A. White: All devices shall have a white finish where available. Otherwise,
devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light
colors, and shall have a brown finish where mounted in wall finished in dark
colors.
B. Emergency Systems: All wiring devices which are connected to the _
emergency power system shall have a red color. Otherwise, devices shall
have a color as specified above.
2.3 WALL SWITCHES (20 Ampere)
A. 20 Ampere Wall Switches: For all loads: _
1. Single pole wall switch: Hubbell HBL1221.
2. Three-way wall switch: Hubbell HBL1223.
3. Four-way wall switch: Hubbell HBL1224.
4. Pilot -lighted switch: Hubbell HBL1221-PLC.
2.4 RECEPTACLES
A. 20 Ampere Receptacles:
1. Duplex: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Hubbell
No. HBL5362 (NEMA 5-20R).
2. Ground Fault Current Interrupter: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire ...
grounding duplex with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter.
Hubbell No. GF -5362 (NEMA 5-20R).
B. Dryer Receptacle: 30 ampere, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding: _
Hubbell No. 9430A (NEMA 14-30R) with No. S723 plate and No. 9432C plug
(NEMA 14-30P).
C. Oven Receptacle: 50 ampere, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding: _
Hubbell No. 9450A (NEMA 14-50R) with No. S723 plate and No. 9452C plug
(NEMA 14-50P).
D. Equipment Receptacle: 50 ampere, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 3 wire, grounding:
Hubbell No. HBL7962 (NEMA 10-50R) with No. S723 plate.'
E. Equipment Receptacle: 20 ampere, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 3 wire, grounding:
Hubbell No.. HBL6810 (NEMA 10-20R) with No. S7 plate.
F. Equipment Receptacle: 30 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding:
Hubbell No. HBL9308 (NEMA 5-30R) with No. S723 plate.
G. Clock Hanger Outlet: Simplex, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding
simplex and stainless steel plate: Hubbell No. HBL5235 (NEMA 5-15R). ^-
2.5 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES
r
A. Duplex Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a Basketed
cast aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell
No. 5206WO. _
B. GFCI Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a Basketed cast
aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No.
WPFS26. _
03860396/98 WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 ""
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
2.6 INCANDESCENT WALL DIMMER SWITCH
900-9330
A. Incandescent Wall Dimmer Switch: Modular full wave solid state units with
integral, quiet on-off switches, and audible and electromagnetic noise filters.
Lutron Nova -T Series NT architectural switch of sizes noted on drawings.
Where multiple dimmers are installed in a multi -gang box, follow the
manufacturer's recommendations for derating the dimmers.
2.7 FLUORESCENT WALL DIMMER SWITCH
A. Fluorescent Wall Dimmer Switch: Modular dimmer switches compatible with
dimmer ballasts. Provide with trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming.
Dimmer -ballast combination shall be capable of consistent dimming to a
maximum of 1 percent of full brightness. Lutron Nova -T Series NTF with
Lutron Hi-Lume dimming ballasts.
2.8 COMMUNICATION DEVICES
A. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified
under Section 16110- RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Coverplates
will be furnished by the Telephone Company. Where an outlet is shown, and
it does not receive a telephone instrument, install a blank coverplate.
B. Data Cable Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under Section
16110- RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Where an outlet is shown,
and it does not receive a data instrument, install a blank coverplate.
2.9 FLOOR MOUNTED DEVICES
A. Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable cast iron box, number of gangs as shown on the
drawings with all required accessories and with the fittings specified herein.
Hubbell No. B-2436, B-4233, B-4333 or Walker 880CS1, 880CS2, 880CS3.
B. Power Service Fitting for Duplex Receptacle: Cast aluminum fitting with satin
finish and with 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding duplex
receptacle as specified above. Hubbell No. S-3825 or Walker 828R.
C. Telephone Service Fitting: Cast aluminum fitting with 2-1/8 inch and 3/4 inch
combination threaded cap. Hubbell, No. S-2625 or Walker 829CK-1.
D. Data Cable Service Fitting: Cast aluminum fitting with 2-1/8 inch and 3/4 inch
combination threaded cap. Hubbell No. S-2625 or Walker 829CK-1.
E. Carpet Plate: In carpeted areas, provide bronze carpet plate as required.
Hubbell No. SB -3083, SB -3084, SB -3085 or Walker 817C; 827C, 837C.
2.10 COVERPLATES
A. General: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets
and other kindred devices.
B. Stainless Steel For Flush Mounted Devices: Coverplates in finished spaces
shall be 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel. Sierra Electric Corporation
"S -Line" or approved equivalent. In unfinished or machinery spaces plates
shall be smooth plastic to match devices which they cover. Sierra "P -Line" or
approved equivalent.
03860396/98 WIRING DEVICES 16140-3
t
r.-
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. Surface Mounted Devices: Zinc -coated sheet metal with rounded or beveled
edges, of same size as boxes, for indoor use; cast alloy plates with gaskets for
outdoor use.
D. Weatherproof Devices: Die cast aluminum with spring loaded gasketed covers
to close automatically when plugs are removed. Stainless steel springs. UL
listed for use in damp locations and wet locations, cover closed. Orient device
to maintain watertightness. Sierra 4500 series or approved equivalent. _
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Outlet Boxes: Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
Coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural elevations. Coordinate
mounting heights with the Architectural baseboard height. Verify that wall
openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
B. Floor Boxes: Verify floor box locations and that floor boxes are adjusted
properly.
C. Circuit Wiring: Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,
tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Outlet Boxes: Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished
surface. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install devices _
plumb and level.
B. Switches: Install switches with OFF position down.
C. Wall Dimmers: Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and
indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. Do not
share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
D. Receptacles: Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. Connect wiring
device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
E. GFI Receptacles:At each GFI receptacle location shown on the drawings
.install an actual GFCI receptacle as indicated. No "feed-thru" protection of
GFCI receptacles shall be allowed.
F. Coverplates: Install wall plates when painting is complete. Use jumbo size
plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. Install galvanized steel plates on
outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings,
and on surface mounted outlets.
G. Adjacent Devices: Group adjacent devices under single, multigang wall plates.
03860396/98 WIRING DEVICES 16140 1
4
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Wiring Devices: Inspect each wiring device for defects. Operate each wall
switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. Verify that each
receptacle device is energized. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. General: Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.6 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Inside Coverplate: At each wiring device identify the panel and circuit number
to which the device is finally connected in indelible ink.
3.7 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. General: Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device
shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. In
general, devices which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork
shall be installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches
shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. Unless
otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices
at the following heights.
1. Wall Switch: 48".
2. Receptacle: 18".
3. Telephone and Data Outlet: 18".
4. Wall Dimmer Switch: 48".
5. Fire Alarm Visual Devices: lowest point of 80" or 6" below ceiling.
6. Wall mounted speaker and/or Bell: 84".
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 WIRING DEVICES 16140-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16180
EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and service
necessary for and incidental to equipment wiring and control as shown on the
drawings and/or as specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items in
accordance with Section 01300. SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's
instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Location of Equipment: Verify locations of equipment and location of electrical
connections prior to installation. Equipment locations are shown on Drawings
in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required
to complete wiring system.
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-1
4
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit according to the requirements specified in Section 01700 -
PROJECT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of equipment and
electrical connections.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. General: Coordinate work under provisions of Sectioin 01039 -
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS. Obtain and review shop drawings, product
data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other
sections. Determine connection locations and requirements.
B. Sequence of Construction: Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to
coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. Sequence electrical
connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide electrical equipment and materials as specified under other
sections of this Specification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3,1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Verify conditions according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections. _
B. Connections: Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring,
and energization.
C. Thermostats: Verify the location of all thermostats in the field.
3.2 EQUIPMENT WIRING
A. General: Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning,
plumbing, kitchen, laundry and laboratory equipment, and all other electrical
devices furnished by the Owner or under other Divisions of the specifications.
B. Locations: Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment
locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown
on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the —
work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment
furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. Request of the
Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings .—
required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit
preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job.
03860396/98 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-2
r -
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. Disconnect Switches: Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not
provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical
7appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required by the
National Electrical Code and/or indicated.
3.3 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
A. General: Do not rough -in conduits or wiring for kitchen equipment until exact
equipment locations have been laid out and approved by the Owner. After
approval, provide conduit stub -ups and equipment connections at the exact
locations shown on those drawings.
3.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. General: Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls
which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor.
3.5 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
A. General: Connect each packaged air conditioning equipment with a non-fused
disconnect switch mounted on the unit or on a wall adjacent to the unit.
3.6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Make electrical connections in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B. Connections: Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit.
Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet
locations.
C. Wiring: Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable
for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment.
D. Receptacles: Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug
is required by the manufacturer. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied
attachment plug is indicated.
E. Strain Relief: Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord
connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.
F. Devices: Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control
devices as indicated or as required.
G. Interconnections: Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices
and equipment where indicated or required.
END OF SECTION
r 03860396/98 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-3
r
r
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing identification of
electrical materials, equipment and installations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide manufacturer's catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates: Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of
engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least
1/16" thick, 3 -ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be
condensed gothic, at least 1/4" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on
the label shall include the name of the item or equipment served utilizing the
equipment names shown on the drawings.
B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3116 inch white letters on black
background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and
receptacles.
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.2 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Adhesive vinyl cloth or self laminating vinyl adhesive labels.
Thomas & Betts Type WBC, WES or approved equivalent. Pre-printed, type-
written or field printed is acceptable. Handwritten labels are not acceptable.
B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, switchboard gutters, pull
boxes and wireways.
C. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as actually
installed.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings.
2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, foil backed detectable type, colored
yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Equipment: Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.Secure _
nameplate to equipment front using adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside
surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
B. Underground Conduit: Identify underground conduits using underground
warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 12 inches below finished grade.
3.3 EQUIPMENT
A. General: All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved
nameplates. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the
following:
1. Switchboards.
2. Panelboards.
3. Dry type transformers. --
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
3.4 CONTROL DEVICES
A. General: All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device
served. All electrical control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity
to the equipment served. Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include
but not limited to the following:
1. Contactors.
2. Motor Starters.
3. Relays.
4. Disconnect Switches.
5. Timeswitches.
03860396/98
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195-3
i t
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16400
ELECTRICAL SERVICE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. General: The work shall include all labor, material and equipment for the
complete electrical service from the power company service point to the
r=• building service entrance equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall provide
and install an electrical service of the size indicated on the drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02200 - EARTHWORK: Trenching and backfilling of utilities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
C. Utility Drawings: Submit for review Utility Company prepared drawings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Utility Company Requirements: Perform Work in accordance with Utility
Company written requirements.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
,.• A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
r., Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
' 1.7 UTILITY FEES
j A. General: All service requirements shall be verified with the Power Company
prior to the bid date and all additional costs (if any) shall be included in
Contractor's bid price.
F03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Location of Service Transformers: Verify locations of service transformers _
prior to excavating for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT
A. Description: As specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND
ELECTRICAL DUCTS.
2.2 UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT
A. Description: As specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND
ELECTRICAL DUCTS. —
2.3 SECONDARY SERVICE CONDUCTORS
A. Description: As specified under Section 16120- CONDUCTORS.
PART 3 EXECUTION _
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Verify conditions according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Equipment: Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and
energized.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent
electric service to the Project.
B. Coordination: Coordinate location of Utility Company's facilities to ensure
proper access is available.
3.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Underground Service from pad mounted transformer: The Utility Company
(LP&L) will provide and install a pad mounted transformer assembly where
shown. Provide and install a reinforced concrete pad for the transformer of the
size and configuration as directed by the Power Company. Furnish and install
service entrance conductors in conduit from the building, underground to the
transformer assembly. Leave sufficient slack in the conductors at the
transformer to facilitate connections by the Power Company.
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400-2 "-
{ { I I
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r
3.4 METERING
A. All by the Utility Company (LP&L) at the pad mounted transformer: All
metering for Utility Company billing will be done by metering equipment
furnished and installed by the Utility Company in the pad mounted transformer
housing.
3.5 SYSTEMS OF WIRING
A. 480Y/277 volt, 3 phase, 4W system:
1. Electrical Service: Combined 480Y/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz.
service for lighting and power.
2. Power Feeders: 480 volts, 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire as noted.
3. Lighting Feeders: 480Y/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire for fluorescent and/or
mercury lighting loads. 208/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire for incandescent
lighting and receptacle and appliance loads.
4. Branch Circuits: 2, 3, or 4 wire as is most convenient for the contractor,
or as required to properly serve the load.
3.6 LOAD BALANCING
A. General: The contractor shall carefully balance his electrical loads between the
various phases. When the facilities are under use at their heaviest loading
periods, tests shall be run on the "hot" conductors in each feeder to a panel
and any unbalance shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall
be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%) in amperes.
3.7 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. General: As specified in Section 02200 - EARTHWORK.
3.8 INSTALLATION Of UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT
A. General: Install as specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND
ELECTRICAL DUCTS.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT
A. General: Install as specified under Section 16115 : UNDERGROUND
ELECTRICAL DUCTS.
END OF SECTION
7 03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX00-
9 9330
SECTION 16425
ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all equipment
together with all accessories required to obtain a complete and operating
electrical distribution system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings,
fault current withstand ratings, and time -current curves of all equipment and
components.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings.
Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown;
conduit or busway entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends;
size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard
instrument details.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's
instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit for review Manufacturer's Maintenance
Instructions including spare parts listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures
and intervals. Provide one (1) set of installation and maintenance instructions
with each switchboard. Instructions are to be easily identified and affixed
within the incoming or main section of the line-up.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
i A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS 16425-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with
Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT and in conformance with
manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation
and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Delivery: Deliver each switchboard section in 54 inch maximum width
shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping
skids. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required
time period.
C. Storage: Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an
additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,
water, construction debris, and traffic
D. Handling: Handle in accordance with NEMA P132.1 and manufacturer's written
instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings, on shop drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of switchboard.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL `REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after
installation of switchboards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Electrical switchboards shall be of General Electric, Cutler -Hammer,
Square D or Challenger manufacture, equivalent to Square D QED2/S.
2.2 SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION
A. Description: Provide NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and
configurations as indicated and specified.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Electrical switchboards shall be fabricated in
accordance with all current NEMA and IEEE standards, as applicable. Where
applicable, each vertical section of the board shall bear a UL label.
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS 16425-2
7 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
c C. Ratings: Voltage and current ratings shall be as scheduled and indicated on
the Drawings. The switchboard and devices shall have a fully rated short
circuit rating as shown on the drawings. Bus bars shall be braced for a
minimum of 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
D. Bus Material (Copper): All buses shall be tin plated copper, supported with
f" high impact, non -tracking insulating material, and shall be braced to withstand
mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions. Plating shall be
applied continuously to all bus work. The switchboard bussing shall be of
sufficient cross sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 temperature rise
r requirements. The phase and neutral through bus shall have an ampacity as
shown on the Drawings.
E. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front or rear as required for
maintenance. All hardware used on conductors shall have a high tensile
strength and a suitable protective finish. A -B -C type bus arrangement (left to
�. right, top to bottom, front to rear as viewed from the front) shall be used
I throughout to assure convenient and safe testing and maintenance. Where
special circuitry precludes this arrangement, bus bars shall be labeled.
F. Bus for Future Devices: When specified, space for future device shall include
' all necessary bus, device supports and mounting, and connections. The
vertical main bus bars shall be furnished for future branch devices. Device
mounting bolts and bus connecting straps shall be supplied with future unit
devices. Full height bus bars shall be supplied only when units and space for
future units fill the vertical section.
G. Load Side Bus Bars: Fully insulate load side bus bars in rear accessible
compartments. Do not reduce spacing of insulated bus.
H. Neutral Bus: For 4 -wire systems, the neutral shall be of equivalent ampacity
as the phase bus bar. The neutral bus in the feeder sections shall not be
further than twenty inches from the front of the switchboard.
1. Ground Bus: Provide a copper ground bus secured to each vertical section
structure, and extend the entire length of the switchboard.
J. Insulated Ground Bus: Where indicated on the Drawings provide an insulated
k , copper ground bus, and extend the entire length of the switchboard.
K. Barriers: Each main and feeder device compartment shall be isolated/insulated
from the vertical bus bars with a fiberglass barrier.
L. Cable Connections: Cable connectors shall be tin-plated copper, and UL listed
for aluminum or copper cables. The connectors shall be mechanical type lugs,
n for short circuit ratings of 100,000 A or less. Short circuit ratings above
100,000 A shall have compression lug.
M. Protective Devices: Switchboard shall include protective devices listed on
drawings and as specified in these specifications with necessary
interconnection, instrumentation and control wiring. Switchboard current
ratings including devices shall be based upon operation in a 40 degree C. room
ambient.
N. Control Wiring: Control wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks
within the switchboard are to be furnished when required. All control wires
leaving the switchboard are to be provided with terminal blocks with suitable
numbering strips.
0. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front or rear of the
switchboard as required, suitable for the conductor materials and sizes
indicated.
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS 16425-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
P. Future Sections: Full provisions for the addition of future sections shall be
provided. Bussing shall include all necessary hardware to accommodate
splicing for future additions.
2.3 SWITCHBOARD ENCLOSURE
A. Enclosure (Indoor): Provide NEMA Type 1 General Purpose enclosure for
indoor switchboards.
B. Construction: Switchboard shall be completely self-supporting structure of the
required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one
metal -enclosed switchboard 90" high, excluding floor sills, lifting members and
pull boxes. Sides, top and rear covers shall be code gauge steel, bolted to the —
switchboard structure. The frame structure members shall be die -formed,
12 -gage steel bolted together and reinforced at corners with rugged gussets
internal and external to the structure members. The switchboard frame is to
be suitable for use as floor sills in indoor installations. Switchboard is to be
provided with adequate lifting means, and be capable of being rolled or moved
into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor --
sills.
C. Finish: All steel surfaces are to be chemically cleaned and treated, providing
a bond between paint and metal surfaces to help prevent the entrance of --
moisture and formation of rust under the paint. The switchboard exterior is to
be furnished with manufacturer's standard light gray paint.
D. Alignment (Front and Rear): All vertical sections comprising the switchboards
shall be aligned front and rear.
2.4 MAIN DEVICES AND SECTIONS
A. Main Section Devices (Individually Mounted): Provide electrical switchboards
with incoming line main devices in individually mounted construction. The
incoming line main devices are to be side or rear accessible through bolted -on
covers.
B. Main Molded Case Programmable Solid State Trip Circuit Breaker: Main circuit
breaker shall be molded case with programmable solid state trip as described
in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE
DEVICES.
2.5 BRANCH DEVICES
A. Distribution Section Devices (Group Mounted): Provide switchboard with --
group mounted branch devices. The group mounted devices are to be
front -accessible and furnished with vertical wiring gutters on the front of the
distribution sections. The gutters are to be furnished with code gage steel
formed covers bolted to the structure frame. Unused device space is to be
covered with non conductive covering.
B. Branch Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip Circuit Breaker: Branch circuit
breakers shall be molded case with thermal magnetic trip as described in
Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE
DEVICES.
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS 16425-4
0
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.6 GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING EQUIPMENT
A. Description: Where indicated on the Drawings provide ground fault
interrupting equipment integral with the overcurrent protective devices as
specified under Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT
PROTECTIVE DEVICES.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Verify conditions under provisions of the General Conditions and
Special Conditions. Verify that surface is suitable for switchboard installation..
B. Concrete Pad: Provide 6" concrete housekeeping pad. Coordinate size of
equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided, including space for future
sections. Fabricate base 4 inches larger in both directions than the overall
dimensions of the supported unit.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Install switchboard in locations shown on the Drawings, in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEMA PB 2.1.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Bus Connections: Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical
fasteners after placing switchboard.
B. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount printed, basic operating instructions
for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences, and
emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on the front of the switchboards.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper
alignment, anchorage, and grounding.
B. Tests: Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and
phase to ground for one minute each, at test voltage of 1000 volts; minimum
acceptable value for insulation resistance is 2 megohms.
C. Joints: Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque
wrench. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in
UL 486A and 486B.
D. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminal bolts in accordance
with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL
486A and UL 486B.
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS 16425-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Mechanisms: Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
B. Bus Connections: Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Circuit Breakers: Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values
indicated.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Paint: Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS 16425-6
PO
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 16441
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for
and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide switch ratings, enclosure type and dimensions.
C. Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items
specified herein.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
B. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site in accordance
with Section 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT. Accept delivery of
disconnect switches on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed
damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect from corrosion and
entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide
appropriate covering.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
03860396/98 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
B. Location of Disconnect switches: Verify locations of disconnect switches prior
to installation. Disconnect switches are shown on Drawings in approximate
locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete
wiring system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Description: NEMA KS1, Type HD heavy duty, enclosed load interrupter knife
switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. Switches shall be unfused unless
noted otherwise; quick make, quick break. All motor circuit switches shall be
horsepower rated.
B. Enclosures: Provide disconnect switches in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed
to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA I general purpose enclosures unless special
enclosures are required.
C. Auxiliary Poles: Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters,
provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary
control circuits in starters. Switches shall have provisions for a field installable
electrical interlock.
D. Manufacturers: Switches shall be of General Electric, Westinghouse or Square
D manufacture, equivalent to Square D Class 3110 quick make quick break
switches.
2.2 TUMBLER SWITCHES
A. Description: Where space does not permit use of the above specified
switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable
horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric
Type RB or approved equivalent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation: Install disconnect switches level and plumb.
B. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
NECA "Standard of Installation."
C. Connections: Connect disconnect switches to wiring system and to ground
as indicated and as instructed by the manufacturer. Tighten connectors and
terminals, including screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer's
published torque tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-2
I--
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein
in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's
instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and
installation of exothermic connectors.
D. Field Test Reports: Submit for review Contractor's Field Tests of installation.
Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSUNFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01700 -
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.
03860396/98 GROUNDING AND BONDING
i1
16450-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ROD ELECTRODE
900-9330 -
A. Ground Rods: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long copper clad steel ground rod.
B. Manufacturers: Ground rods shall be as manufactured by Blackburn or
approved equivalent.
2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Pipe Clamps: Cast Bronze, heavy-duty, sized to match water pipe, as --
manufactured by Blackburn Series J or approved equivalent.
B. Structural Steel Connectors: Copper clad steel, 3/4" diameter by 5" minimum
grounding lug, as manufactured by Burndy Type GSTUD-HY or approved
equivalent. Weld lug to structural member.
C. Rod Clamps: Cast of high strength corrosion resistant copper alloy, UL listed
for direct burial, as manufactured by Blackburn Number JAB 34H or approved
equivalent.
2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Exothermic Connections: Molds, welding metal, tools, and all accessories shall
be from the same manufacturer. All connections shall be made as directed by
the manufacturer's instructions. Molds shall not be altered in the field.
Exothermic connections shall be made by the CADWELD or approved
equivalent process.
2.4 CONDUCTORS
A. Material: Stranded copper as specified in Section 16120- CONDUCTORS.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 (NEC) requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. General: Provide adequate and permanent service neutraland equipment
grounding in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the
following additional requirements. Size grounding conductors in accordance
with National Electrical Code Tables 250-94 and 250-95.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Connect the service ground and equipment
ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main
service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the
..service -ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and
equipment grounding electrode conductor without joint or splice to the
grounding electrode system as described below.
03860396/98 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-2 =�
I 1 I
F
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
! C. Grounding Electrode System: The following items shall be bonded together by
the grounding electrode conductor to form the grounding electrode system.
1. Metal Underground Water Pipe: Connect to the main water service pipe
with an approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces
thoroughly before connection, to assure good metal to metal contact.
P Where a dielectric fitting occurs on water main, connect the grounding
conductor to the street side of the fitting. Bond the metallic conduit to
the grounding conductor at each end. Provide and install with ground
clamps a No. 3/0 copper jumper conductor around the water meter.
s 2. Metal Frame of Building: Connect to the effectively grounded structural
steel frame of the building with a copperclad steel grounding lug as
,.- specified welded to the steel member. Connect to the grounding
electrode conductor with an approved compression connection.
3. Concrete -encased Electrode: Connect to a 112" minimum steel
reinforcing bar located in the concrete foundation or footing in contact
r with earth for a minimum of twenty feet with a #4 copper conductor by
means of an exothermic weld connection. Extend the conductor and
{ connect to the grounding electrode conductor with an approved
compression connection.
D. Supplemental Grounding Electrode: Supplement the grounding electrode
system with an additional electrode which shall be 10' long by 3/4 inch
diameter copperclad steel ground rod. Bond the supplemental grounding
electrode to the service equipment ground with #6 copper conductor.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF GROUND RODS
A. General: Locate ground rods a minimum of one rod length from each other
and at least one rod length away from any other grounding electrode.
Interconnect ground rods with bare #6 copper conductors buried at least 24
inches below grade. Connect bare cable ground conductors to ground rods by
means of exothermic welds except as otherwise indicated. Make these
connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing the steel. Drive
rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade.
3.3 GROUNDING BUILDING STEEL
A. General: The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the building
service grounding electrode, using the conductor size specified in National
Electrical Code Section 250-94(a). The grounding conductor shall be
connected to building steel using a grounding lug as specified above welded
to the building steel.
r, 3.4 GROUNDING RACEWAYS
A. General: Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems,
pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints
or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic
conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in
the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each
03860396/98 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
non-metallic conduit. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder
raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards,
cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such
bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment
grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table
250-95.
3.5. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. General: Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with
insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for
each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same
raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the
grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or
less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a
grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to
bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment
to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point
of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and
system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95.
3.6 GROUNDING DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. General: Ground the secondary neutral point and the housing of each dry -type
transformer. Connect these items together within the transformer housing and
run a common grounding conductor from their point of connection to a point
of grounding. The grounding electrode shall be in order of preference:
1. The nearest available effectively grounded structural metal member of the
building, connecting to the btAlding steel using a grounding lug welded to
the building steel; or
2. The nearest available effectively grounded metal water pipe 2 inches or
larger in diameter; or
3. Other electrodes as specified in National Electrical Code Sections 250-82
and 250-83 where the above described electrodes are not available.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of
galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware,
conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be
galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity
and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.
3. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material
such as red paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact
surfaces.
03860396/98 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-4
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
B. Exothermic Weld Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for
underground connections. Install at connections to ground rods. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that
show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C. Terminations: Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals,
including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published
torque tightening values or to values specified in UL 486A and 486B.
D. Compression Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide
the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools
and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide
embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that
a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-5
I I I
�1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16460
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
900-9330
A. Dry -type distribution transformers with primary and secondary voltages of 600
V and less and capacity ratings through 2000 kVA.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
B. NEMA ST20
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1561
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Suppliers asking consideration as an approved equal shall submit complete,
warranted performance data and physical dimensions for similar transformers.
Data shall be submitted for each size specified, and shall be received by the
consultant engineer no less than 10 days prior to the bid due date for
consideration.
1.4 STANDARDS
A. Transformers 1000 kVA and smaller shall be listed by UL.
B. Conform to the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
C. Transformers are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA
ST20.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Transformers shall be as manufactured by Jefferson, Cutler -Hammer, Hevi-
Duty, Square D or approved equivalent manufacturer, equal to the Square D
Transformers specified hereinafter.
B. Approved manufacturers shall be registered firms in accordance with ISO
9001:1994 SIC 3612 (US); which is the design and manufacture of low
voltage dry -type power, distribution, and specialty transformers.
A. All insulating materials are to exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated for
220° C UL component recognized insulation system.
03860396/98 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
B. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 115° C temperature rise above 40°
C ambient. Transformers 25 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of 4 - 2.5%
full capacity primary taps. Exact voltages and taps to be as designated on the
plans or the transformer schedule.
C. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50° C
rise above a 40° C ambient.
D. The transformer(s) shall be rated as indicated in the following schedule:
1. Identification Number(s)
2. kVA Rating
3. Voltages
4. Phase
5. Frequency
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound construction and shall be
impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish.
B. All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses.
Magnetic flux are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core
overheating. Cores for transformers greater than 500 kVA shall be clamped
utilizing insulated bolts through the core laminations to provide proper pressure
throughout the length of the core. The completed core and coil shall be bolted
to the base of the enclosure but isolated by means of rubber vibration -
absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal -to -metal contact between the core
and coil and the enclosure except for a flexible safety ground strap. Sound
isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will
not be acceptable.
C. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by
means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable
UL and NEC standards.
D. The trasformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy
gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing
a continuous -process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing,
followed by electrostatic deposition of polyester powder coating and baking
cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall
be UI recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49.
2.4 SOUND LEVELS
A. Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the
following: 15 to 50 KVA - 45 dB; 51 to 150 kVA - 50 dB; 151 to 300 kVA -
55 dB; 301 to 500 kVA - 60 dB; 501 to 700 kVA - 62 dB; 701 to 1000 kVA -
64 dB; 1001 to 1500 kVA - 65 dB; 1501 to 2000 kVA - 66 dB.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Set transformer plumb and level. Arrange equipment to provide
adequate spacing for access and for cooling air circulation.
03860396/98 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460-2
r"
' LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
B. Connections: Install all conductors to and from each transformer in flexible
metallic conduit not less than 24 inches long. Provide neoprene grommets or
neoprene padding to prevent metallic contact between conduit and transformer
housing. Install copper wire grounding jumpers between conduit and housing.
Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C. Floor Mounted Transformers: Mount floor mounted transformers on vibration
isolating pads suitable for isolating the transformer noise from the building
structure. Set transformer on spring type vibration and noise eliminators
mounted on 6" high concrete base.
D. Vibration Isolation: All vibration isolators shall be properly selected by their
manufacturer for the specific duty involved. Maximum vibration transmission
shall not exceed 10 percent.
E. Suspended (Trapeze) Mounted Transformers: Mount trapeze mounted
transformers as indicated. Construct the platform of welded or bolted angle
iron. Support the platform from the building construction with steel rod
hangers, with spring -type vibration and noise eliminators interposed between
rods and platform.
F. Grounding and Bonding: Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with
Section 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING.
G. Terminations: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque tightening values or those specified in UL
486A and UL 4868.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. General: Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap
adjustments.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 16460-3
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for
and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings.
Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing
fabrication. Drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type
of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of
cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent
information necessary to determine compliance with the drawings and
specifications.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and
maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Submit manufacturer's
installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
and installation of Product.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code -Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
C. Main Panelboard: The building main panelboard shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment."
03860396/98 PANELBOARDS 16470-1
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site in accordance
with Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. Accept delivery of
panelboards on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to
carrier within their required time period. Deliver panelboards in factory
fabricated water resistant wrapping. Protect panelboards from corrosion and
entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide
appropriate covering. Store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material
components, enclosure and finish.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Location of Panelboards: Verify locations of panelboards prior to installation. --
Panelboards are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless
dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete electrical distribution
system.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of panelboards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various _
panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. Cabinets shall be
rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters'
Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned
over to receive trim. Cabinet fronts shall be cut from single sheet of not less
than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim
clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface
mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush
mounted.
B. Enclosures: Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X or 12 as indicated on
the Drawings or as required.
C. Cabinet Doors: Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler
lock and catch. On doors more than 48 high provide a combination three
point catch and lock with T -handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all
locks keyed alike. Provide with metal directory frame mounted inside each
panel door.
D. Cabinet Finish: All back boxes shall be galvanized; all exposed metal,
including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer.
03860396/98 PANELBOARDS 16470-2 "�
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
f
E. Multiple Sections: Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more
than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more
separate boxes bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front;
J - each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices.
F. Branch Circuits: Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare",
provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled
as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary
connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where a
=' breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device
complete for operation. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable
without disturbing adjacent units. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with
sequence phasing.
G. Copper Panelboard Bus: Provide each panelboard with copper busbars.
Provide each panelboard with a separate equipment copper grounding bus bar
bonded to the panelboard cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide
panelboards with an isolated copper grounding bus bar insulated from the
panelboard cabinet. Neutral and Phase bus bars to be copper.
i
4,
2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. General: Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit
breakers as scheduled, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as
scheduled.
B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolted in circuit breakers as described in
Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE
DEVICES.
C. Manufacturers: Panels shall be of General Electric, Cutler -Hammer, Challenger
or Square D manufacture only, equivalent to the Square D panels listed below.
1. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: Square D Type NQOD with type
QOB, QOBVH, QOBH circuit breakers as required.
2. Panelboards for 277/480 volts Service: Square D, Type NF with Type
EDB, EGB or EJB breakers in 15 to 125 ampere sizes; Type KA subfeed
breakers in sizes above 125 amperes and not over 225 amperes.
D. Hinged trim construction: Both trim types to employ a hinged inner and outer
door giving easy access to circuit breaker handles and gutter space.
2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. General: Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of bolted -in circuit
breakers scheduled on the drawings, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on
the mains as scheduled. Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS
symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings; no subfeed
breakers shall be permitted. Provide circuit breakers as scheduled on the
drawings.
B. Manufacturers: Panelboards shall be of General Electric, Cutler -Hammer,
Challenger or Square D manufacture only, equivalent to the Square D I -Line
Panelboards determined by the system voltage and by the sizes and types of
circuit breakers scheduled on the drawings.
03860396/98 PANELBOARDS 16470-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. Main Circuit Breaker.
1. Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip: Main circuit breakers shall be
molded case with thermal magnetic trip as described in Section 16475 -
CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES.
D. Branch Circuit Breakers:
1. Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip: Branch circuit breakers shall be
molded case with thermal magnetic trip as described in Section 16475 -
CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION >
A.
General: Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1, NECA
"Standard of Installation", and the manufacturer's written instructions. Install
panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
B.
Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter
devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application
Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters."
C.
Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with
bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. ^ .
D.
Filler Plates: Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E.
Circuit Directory: Provide a neatly typewritten circuit directory for each branch
circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to
balance phase loads. Identify branch circuits with room numbers to match
those finally posted on doors. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic.
F.
Circuit Labels: Provide engraved plastic nameplate to identify the circuits on
each distribution panelboard.
G.
Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates on each panelboard to
identify the. panelboard name, voltage and upstream power source.
H.
Emergency Systems: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate on each
panelboard to identify the electrical system serving the panelboard (Normal or
Emergency).
I.
Spare Conduits: Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to
an accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1
inch. Identify each as SPARE.
J.
Grounding: Ground and bondpanelboard enclosure according to Section
16450.
K.
Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding
connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening c—
values or as specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.2 ADJUSTING �.
A. toad Balancing: Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard
feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to
within 10 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch
circuits.
r.,
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 PANELBOARDS 16470-4 �-
r
1 LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
�a
SECTION 16475
CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL -
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements , apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment, and service
necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time -current
curves.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and
maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Indicate application
conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified
under Regulatory Requirements. Include all operation and maintenance
manuals.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish under provisions of the General Requirements.
-? 03860396/98 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT DEVICES
16475-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOLDED CASE THERMAL MAGNETIC TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Description: NEMA AB 1, molded case, one, two and three pole, with integral
thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, UL listed. Two and
three pole circuit breakers with common tripand single operating handle.
Handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Circuit breakers shall have
the voltage and trip rating scheduled or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Operation: Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle
mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action with positive handle
indication.
C. Trip Elements: Thermal magnetic trip element calibrated for 40 deg. C.
ambient temperature.
D. Terminations: Terminations for 10-30 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for
use with 60 degree C. or 75 degree C. conductors. Terminations for breakers
35 ampere and greater shall be UL listed for use with 75 degree C conductors.
E. Interrupting Rating: Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical
ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings.
F. Breakers 250 Amp Frame and Greater: Circuit breakers with frame sizes ---_
greater than 250 amperes shall have adjustable magnetic trip elements which
are set by a single adjustment, push to trip button and reverse connection
capability.
G. Switching Duty: UL listed SWD for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere single
pole, suitable for 120 volts ac fluorescent loads.
H. HACR Listing: UL listed as HACR type, 120/240 volt, 15-60 ampere, one, two
and three pole, to serve heating air conditioning and refrigeration equipment.
Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment
branch circuits.
I. HID Lighting Circuits: Circuit breakers serving HID lighting circuits shall be
specifically designed for HID circuits.
J. Accessories:' Provide circuit breakers with switching neutral, shunt trip,
ground fault current interrupters, or remote controlled operators as scheduled
on the drawings.
K. Motor Circuit Protectors: Where indicate on the Drawings or Specified `
elsewhere provide molded case circuit breaker with integral instantaneous
magnetic trip element in each pole.
2.2 MOLDED CASE PROGRAMMABLE SOLID STATE TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER
A. Description: NEMA AB 1, molded case, with integral solid state current
sensing and trip system, UL listed. Circuit breakers shall have the voltage and
trip rating scheduled or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Operation: Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle
mechanism with quick -make, quick -break common trip action with positive
handle indication and reverse connection capability.
C. Solid State Trip: Circuit breakers shall be equipped with a digital solid state,
ambient insensitive current sensing and trip system. The circuit breaker
ampere rating shall be established by a UL listed rating plug. The digital trip
03860396/98 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT DEVICES 16475-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
900-9330
system shall accurately sense the RMS value of sinusoidal and non -sinusoidal
current waveforms by continuously sampling each phase throughout every
cycle. A push to trip button shall be provided on the cover.
Terminations: Terminations shall be UL listed for use with 75 Deg. C.
conductors.
100% Continuous Current Rating: Provide circuit breakers with UL listing for
100% continuous current rating.
Accessories: Provide UL listed accessories as scheduled on the drawings.
Interrupting Rating: Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical
ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings.
Field Programmable Features: Circuit breakers shall be equipped with cover
mounted field programmable features as described below:
1. Standard Features: Provide each molded cased digital trip circuit breaker
with the following standard features.
a. Adjustable long-time current setting.
b. Adjustable long-time delay.
c. Long-time current pickup light.
d. Adjustable instantaneous current pickup.
2. Additional Features: Provide each molded case digital trip circuit breaker
with the following additional features.
a. Adjustable short -time current pickup.
b. Adjustable short -time delay with I -squared -t in and out switch.
c. Overload trip indication light.
d. Short circuit trip indication light.
3. Ground fault features: Provide each molded case digital trip circuit
breaker indicated on the drawings with integral equipment ground fault
protection with memory. Provide the following features.
a. Adjustable ground fault current pickup.
b. Adjustable ground fault delay with I -squared -t in and out switch.
c. Ground fault trip indication light.
d. Ground fault push -to -test button.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT DEVICES 16475-3
7
o LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 16481
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and service
necessary for and incidental to motor wiring and control as shown on the
drawings and/or as specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions,
and enclosure details.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under
Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site in accordance
with Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. Accept delivery of
motor controllers on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage
to carrier within their required time period. Protect from corrosion and
entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide
appropriate covering.
*- 03860396/98 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Location of Motor Controllers: Verify locations of motor controllers prior to
installation. Motor controller locations are shown on Drawings in approximate
locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete
wiring system.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of motor controllers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS
A. General: All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other
Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where --
motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected
in place with such equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection is
not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed
as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions
necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the
Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a
part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled
millwrights or similar craftsmen.
2.2 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers: Motor Controllers shall be of Furnas, General Electric,
Westinghouse, Square D or approved equivalent manufacture with the proper 1M
enclosures. All controllers shall be NEMA rated.
B. General: Coordinate the features of each motor controller with the ratings and
characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, r..
the duty cycle of the motor, drive, and load, and the pilot device, and control
circuit affecting controller functions. Provide controllers that are horsepower
rated to suit the motor controlled.
C. Enclosures: For individually mounted controllers and control devices, comply
with NEMA Standard 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum)." Provide enclosures suitable for the environmental conditions at
the controller location. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures except as otherwise
indicated or required.
03860396/98 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-2
r�
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PIC1
is
2.3 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually
operated, full -voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light, field
convertible auxiliary contact, and push button operator.
B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose
Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower
induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle
operator.
C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually
operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors,
without thermal overload unit, with red pilot light and toggle operator.
D. Thermal Overload Protection: Melting alloy or bi-metal strip with inverse time
characteristic. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to
nameplate full load current of the specific motor with appropriate adjustment
for duty cycle. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements,
t^ one per phase.
E. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 or 3R as required or as shown on the
drawings. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a
r.� recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate.
2.4 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. General: All motor starters (controllers) and control equipment shall be
furnished and installed under this Division of the specifications. The starters
03860396/98 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-3
and control equipment shall conform with the schedule! on the drawings if
applicable.
B. Full Voltage Non Reversing Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose
Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower.
C. Full Voltage Reversing Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose Class A
magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. Include
electrical interlock and integral time delay transition between FORWARD and
REVERSE rotation.
D. Contacts: Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to the motor. All
contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing
!�
starter from panel
E. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
F. Solid State Overload Protection: Solid state current sensing, heaterless,
control power inductively acquired from motor load current, ambient
F
insensitive, NEMA Class 10 or 20 as required by the load, 3:1 full load current
adjustment, with thermal memory, manual reset, tripping accuracy plus or
,Oak
minus 2 percent, short-circuit self-protection, phase loss protection and phase
imbalance protection equal to Square D Motor Logic.
G. Motor Control Centers: Where indicated on the Drawings provide motor
controllers in motor control center.
H. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 or 313 as required or as shown on the
drawings.
tl
03860396/98 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
2.5 MOTOR CONTROLLER FEATURES
900-9330
A. General: Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights and hand -off -automatic
switches in all starters. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish
interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. Starter
disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control
circuits when the starter is disconnected.
B. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish
interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. NEMA
ICS 2, two each field convertible contacts in addition to seal -in contact.
C. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type.
D. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form P.
E. Pushbuttons: Unguarded Recessed type.
F. Indicating Lights: Incandescent type.
G. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
H. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
I. Control Power Transformers: Equip each starter unit with a control power --
transformer, 120 volt secondary, 50 va minimum. Provide 2 primary & 1
secondary fusing.
2.6 COMBINATION STARTER DISCONNECTS
A. Combination Controllers: Starter units shall be combination starter and non-
fused switch units in common enclosure as scheduled on the Drawings.
Provide means for locking disconnect handle, and means for defeating cover
interlock.
B. Non -Fusible Switch Assemblies: Non -fusible switch shall be as described in
Section 16441 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
:e.
A. Preparation:: Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation. Do not
install controller until building environment can be maintained within the
service conditions required by the manufacturer.
B. General: Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install enclosed controllers plumb. r
C. Wall Mounting: For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on
light weight structural steel channels bolted to the wall Mount 5 ft. to
operating handle.
D. Floor Mounting: For controllers not located at walls, provide freestanding --
racks fabricated of structural steel members and light weight slotted structural
steel channels. Use feet consisting of 3/8 inch thick steel plates, 6 inches
square, bolted to the floor. Use feet for welded attachment of 1-1 /2 inch by
1-1/2 inch by 1/4 inch vertical angle posts not over three feet on centers.
Connect the posts with horizontal lightweight slotted steel channels and bolt
the control equipment to the channels.
03860396/98 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481-4
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
E. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of
Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION.
F. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door
identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code
letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.
G. Connections: Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings.
Tighten field connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,
in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
values or as specified in UL 486A and UL 4868.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
16481-5
J'
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16495
TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, short circuit
ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete
manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory
Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment, and service
necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc., listing suitability with any molded case circuit breaker for purpose
specified and shown.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with
Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT and in conformance with
manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation
and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Delivery: Deliver wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids.
Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time
period.
03860396/98 TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 16495-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
C. Storage: Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an
additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,
water, construction debris, and traffic.
D. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift
only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Location of Automatic Transfer Switch: Verify locations of automatic transfer
switch prior to installation. Locations are shown on Drawings in approximate
locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete
wiring system.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of automatic transfer
switches.
C. Operation Data: Submit complete manufacturer's operation data. Include
instructions for operating equipment. Include instructions for operating
equipment under emergency conditions when engine generator is running.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit complete manufacturer's maintenance data.
Include routine preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule. List special
tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. General: Furnish service and maintenance of transfer switches under an
optional maintenance agreement (contract) selected by the Owner.
Maintenance contract price shall not be included in the equipment price.
Complete procedures and service intervals are to be detailed in the
maintenance service proposal which is to be offered to the Owner at the time
of transfer switches start up.
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. General: Provide maintenance materials according to the -Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Tools: For each automatic transfer switch provide two of each special tool
required for maintenance.
03860396/98 TRANSFERSWITCH AND CONTROLS 16495-2
r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
900-9330
A. Description: Transfer switch shall. be a double throw switch operated by
momentarily energized single solenoid mechanism and a control module
interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. It shall be inherently
interlocked mechanically and electrically, with no neutral position possible.
Designs which use linear induction motors in lieu of solenoids do not meet this
specification. Designs which incorporate a distinct center off, mid or neutral
position do not meet this specification (regardless of the dwell time in that
position). Operating current for transfer shall be from source to which it is
transferring load. The contact transition time in either direction shall not
exceed one-sixth of a second. Switch shall be suitable for use as service
equipment where required.
B. Contacts: Main contacts shall be silvered. Contacts shall be of segmented
design on all units exceeding 150A. All contacts and coils shall be easily
replaceable from front of panel without major disassembly. Interlocked molded
case circuit breakers or contactors is not acceptable.
C. Manual Operator: Provide a removable manual operating handle for
maintenance and emergency purposes. Designs which include permanently
mounted handles which move as the ATS cycles are not acceptable.
D. Codes and Standards: The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the
requirements of the following codes and standards and shall be listed as such
when applicable:
1. UL Standard 1008 -Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches.
2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, including use in emergency and
standby systems in accordance with Articles 517, 700, 701 and 702.
3. NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities.
4. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
5. IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems.
6. IEEE Standard 241 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electrical Power
Systems in Commercial Buildings.
7. NEMA Standard ICS2-447 - AC Automatic Transfer Switches.
B. IEC - Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches.
E. Fire. Pump Duty: When used with fire pumps the automatic transfer switch
shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 20, Standard for Centrifugal Fire
Pumps.
F. Configuration: Electrically operated, mechanically held transfer switch. The
switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by voltage variations or
momentary outages so that the contact pressure is maintained at a constant
value and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized for maximum reliability
and operating life.
G. Solid Neutral: Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown
on the Drawings, a neutral conductor terminal with fully rated AL -CU pressure
connectors shall be provided.
03860396/98 TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 16495 - 3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
H. Control Module: The automatic transfer switch sensing and logic shall be
controlled by an integral microprocessor. The control module shall be supplied
with a protective cover and shall be separately mounted inside the transfer
switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be solid state
on normal and alternate and mounted on plug-in circuit boards. Interfacing
relays shall be industrial control grade plug-in type with dust .covers. The
control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in
accordance with IEEE Standard 472, ANSI C37.90a. '-
1. Manufacturers: The automatic transfer switch shall be Zenith Controls ZTS
or approved equal by Russelectric or Asco.
2.2 TRANSFER SWITCH OPTIONS AND FEATURES
A. Indicating Lights: The switch shall contain pilot lights to indicate the source
to which the switch is connected. Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate
NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, SWITCH
POSITION.
B. Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source.
C. Engine Start Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to start the engine manually
for test purposes without transferring the load.
D. Return to Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual
transfer from alternate to normal source.
E. Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: 1 normally open and 1 normally closed.
F. Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage. The
pickup voltage shall be field adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and the
dropout voltage shall be field adjustable from 75% to 98% of the pickup value.
Initiate transfer when voltage drops below 85 percent of nominal source
voltage.
G. Alternate Source Monitor: Monitor each line of alternate source voltage and
frequency. The pickup voltage shall be field adjustable from 85% to 100% of
nominal (factory set at 90%) and pickup frequency shall be field adjustable
from 90% to 100% of nominal (factory set at 95%).
H. In -Phase Monitor: Inhibit transfer until source and load are within 15 electrical
degrees. Alternates to the in-phase monitor (such as programmed transition)
will not be considered for this critical application, such designs do not meet
this specification and are unacceptable.
I. Engine Exerciser: A field adjustable clock exerciser shall be provided, to
exercise the plant automatically at full load at regular intervals for a
pre -selected period of time. Start engine every 7 days; run for 30 minutes
under load and 30 minutes unloaded before shutting down.
J. Remote Control Terminals: Provide terminals for a remote contact which
opens to signal the ATS to transfer to alternate source and terminals for
remote contacts which open to inhibit transfer to alternate source and/or
retransfer to normal.
K. Output Terminals: Provide output terminals to signal the actual availability of
the normal and alternate sources, as determined by the voltage sensing pickup
and dropout settings for each source.
03860396/98 TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 16495-4
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900.9330
k
2.3 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Starting Controls: Engine starting control shall operate from a DPDT
gold -flashed contact rated 10 amps, 32 VDC that closes for engine start and
opens for engine stop. When engine fires, cranking controls shall be
r automatically disconnected. Cranking disconnect shall prevent recranking for
a definite time if voltage falls to a low value. If engine fails to fire, or if any
r" safety device operates while the engine is running, engine shall stop
immediately and starting controls shall lock out, requiring manual reset.
Cranking shall be continuous for 45 seconds before lockout.
B. Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation
jby normal source monitor.
C. Time Delay To Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: The time delay to
fi-- override momentary normal source outages shall be field adjustable from 0.5
to 6 seconds and factory set at one second. Transfer switch shall close pilot
contact to start engine 1 second after normal source failure or 1 second after
,•� drop in voltage on any phase to 85% or less of normal voltage.
D. Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source
monitor and permission by alternate source monitor. When generator is
delivering not less than 90% rated voltage and 95% of nominal frequency, the
i main transfer switch shall transfer load from normal to alternate source.
E. Time Delay Before Transfer to Alternate Power Source: The time delay on
transfer to alternate source shall be field adjustable from O to 5 minutes and
factory set at 0 minutes.
' F. Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon restoration of normal source
to not less than 95% of rated voltage on all phases.
G. Time Delay Before Transfer to Normal Power: The time delay on retransfer to
normal shall be field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and factory set at 30
minutes. If standby plant should fail while carrying the load, retransfer to
normal source shall be instantaneous upon restoration of normal source.
H. Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down: The unloaded running time delay for
generator cooldown shall be field adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes and factory
set at 5 minutes. The system shall then be ready to restart on next power
failure.
I. Engine Exerciser: Bypass exerciser control if normal source fails during
✓. exercising period.
J. Alternate System Exerciser: Transfer load to alternate source during engine
exercising period.
2.4 TRANSFER SWITCH RATINGS
A. Voltage: Voltage ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Number of Poles: 3 poles as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Load Inrush Rating: Rated for all classes of load.
D. Continuous Current Rating: Continuous current rating as indicated on the
Drawings.
03860396/98 TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 16495-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
E. Withstand Current Rating: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes, when used
with Class RK1 current limiting fuse. Withstand current rating at 480 volts
shall be as follows when used with any molded case circuit breaker.
1. 70, 100 and .150 ampere switches: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. -
2. 225 and 260 ampere switches: 30,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
3. 300 to 400 ampere switches: 35,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
4. 600 to 1200 ampere switches: 50,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
5. 1600 to 4000 ampere switches: 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
Note: These ratings are based on UL 1008 withstand and closing tests for use "
with any molded case circuit breaker. . Specific breaker only ratings are
unacceptable.
F. Without exception, prototypes of the specified ATS's must have undergone
their UL temperature rise testing on a single sample after both UL overload and
endurance testing.
2.5 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: NEMA ICS 1.
_ B. Temperature: 40 degrees C.
C. Altitude: 3,300 feet.
2.6 ENCLOSURE
A. Enclosure: ICS 6, Type 1 or as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Verify conditions under the provisions of the General Requirements.
B. Surface: Verify that surface is suitable for transfer switch installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Provide 6" concrete housekeeping pads where needed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of
Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION.
C. Connections: Tighten factory made connections, including connectors,
terminals, bus joints, mountings, and grounding. Tighten field connected
connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL
Standards 486A and 486B.
03860396/98 TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 16495-6
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
900-9330
A. General: Prepare and start systems under provisions of the General
Requirements.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. General: Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 01650 -
STARTING OF SYSTEMS.
B. Description: Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in bypass, normal, and
emergency modes.
END OF SECTION
�- 03860396/98 TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 16495-7
a
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services
necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the
drawings and specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Include manufacturer's catalog data and drawings on all interior and exterior
lighting fixtures with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by Luminaire
"Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly
labeled. Ballast and lamp data shall accompany fixture submittals. Submit
dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of
utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency
and visual comfort probability. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples
of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the
Architect/Engineer for every type fixture.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete
manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under
Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manufacturer's operation and
maintenance instructions for each product.
1.4 PRE -APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: All requests for substitute lighting fixtures shall be submitted to the
.,, Engineer no fewer than twelve calendar days prior to the bid opening. The
substitution proposal shall be bound, manufacturer's catalog data in
alphabetical order by Fixture Type, and a cross index clearly indicating all
proposed substitutions. Engineer's review is only to establish the suitability
!-- 03860396/98 LIGHTING 16500-1,
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330 E
of the manufacturer and the fixture series. If approved by the Engineer, the
substitution shall be listed in an addendum. The substituted fixtures are still
subject to Engineer's review as described elsewhere in this section.
1.5 CATALOG NUMBERS
A. General: All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided,
even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the
required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products. Accept delivery of
lighting fixtures on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to _
carrier within their required time period. Protect lighting fixtures from
degradation by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide
appropriate covering. Lighting fixtures shall remain in factory protective
shipping cartons until installation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Locations: The drawings are schematic and only indicate the approximate
location of lighting fixtures. The precise location of lighting fixtures shall be
coordinated with the architectural reflected ceiling plan and other architectural
features.
B. Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Verify that there will be sufficient headroom for
the installation of recessed lighting fixtures prior to ordering lighting fixtures.
Verify ceiling system type and provide suitable plaster ring or frame if required.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Lamps (One Standard Carton): At the completion and acceptance of the work
provide and deliver to the owner 1 standard carton, or a minimum of 12
replacement lamps of each lamp type. The lamps shall be delivered in
unopened boxes to the location designated by the owner.
03860396/98 LIGHTING 16500-2
! LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. General: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet
shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings
and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings,
furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage.
2.2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. General: All exterior mounted lighting fixtures shall be UL listed for wet
locations where installed in direct contact with weather and UL listed for damp
locations where installed protected from weather.
2.3 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
2.4 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS
A. Description: Electronic dimming ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or
integrated electronic components and shall have a minimum frequency of
` operation of 20 kHz and shall operate without visible flicker. Ballast shall be
UL listed Class P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a
r minimum power factor of 95% and an maximum lamp current crest factor of
r 03860396/98 LIGHTING 16500-3
A. General: Electronic ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or integrated
electronic components and shall have a minimum frequency of operation of 20
,.
kHz and shall operate without visible flicker. Ballast shall be UL listed Class
P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a minimum power
factor of 95 % and an maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.6. Input current
total harmonic distortion shall be 10% maximum. Ballasts shall maintain
constant light output with input voltage variations of plus or minus 25%.
Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode
filaments and then ignites the lamp. Ballasts shall withstand line transients as
defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A and shall comply with FCC Rules
and Regulations Part 18, for non -consumer equipment.
B. Ballasts for T8 Rapid Start Lamps: Ballasts shall have the following maximum
ANSI input watts when used with F32T8 "Octron" lamps. Ballasts shall be
Advance Mark V IC, Magnetek Triad HP or approved equivalent.
1. One Lamp: 31 watts.
2. Two Lamp: 61 watts.
3. Three Lamp: 95 watts.
4. Four Lamp: 121 watts.
C. Biaxial Fluorescent Lamps: Ballasts shall have the following maximum ANSI
input watts when used with F39BX biaxial lamps. Ballasts shall be Advance
Mark V IC, Motorola Rapid Start or approved equivalent.
1. One Lamp: 37 watts.
2. Two
Lamp: 72 watts.
r
3. Three Lamp: 106 watts.
2.4 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS
A. Description: Electronic dimming ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or
integrated electronic components and shall have a minimum frequency of
` operation of 20 kHz and shall operate without visible flicker. Ballast shall be
UL listed Class P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a
r minimum power factor of 95% and an maximum lamp current crest factor of
r 03860396/98 LIGHTING 16500-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
1.6. Input current total harmonic distortion shall be 10% maximum. Ballasts
shall maintain constant light output with input voltage variations of plus or
minus 25%. Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats
cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. Ballasts shall withstand line
transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A and shall comply with
FCC Rules and Regulations Part 18, for non -consumer equipment. Ballasts
shall dim continuously between 100% and 1 % light output.
B. Controls: Provide wall mounted control units designed to be used in
..conjunction with the electronic dimming ballast.
C. Manufacturers: Electronic fluorescent dimming ballasts shall be Lutron Hi-
Lume. No Substitutions.
2.5 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS
A. Description: All interior HID lighting fixture ballasts shall be encased and
potted and shall have automatic thermal protection. Outdoor HID ballasts shall
be coil and core type. HID ballasts shall be high power factor, minimum 90%.
Ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.4.
B. Metal Halide: Peak -lead autotransformer, high power factor for all wattages.
C. High Pressure Sodium: High -leakage reactor, high power factor for 70, 100
and 150 watts. Auto -regulated lead, high power factor for' 200 and greater
watts.
2.6 ACRYLIC LENSES
A. 0.125 Inch Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the
material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum nominal thickness of
0.125 inches. .Only KSH brand lenses shall be acceptable.
2.7 INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A. General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the
completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and
of the ratings and types scheduled on the drawings or as required by the
lighting fixture manufacture; General Electric, Phillips, Sylvania or approved
equivalent.
B. Incandescent A Lamps: Medium base, inside frosted unless scheduled or
recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps shall be 120V,
750 hour minimum.
C. Incandescent R Lamps: Medium base, reflector flood or spot as scheduled or
recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps shall be 120V,
2000 hour minimum.
2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the
completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and
of the ratings and types scheduled on the drawings or as required by the
lighting fixture manufacture; Philips, General Electric, Sylvania or pre -approved
equivalent.
03860396/98 LIGHTING 16500-4
I-
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
B. T-8 3500K: Rapid start, T-8, 3500K, 32 watt, 2850 initial lumens, 82 CRI,
20000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to Philips F32T8/TL835.
C. 13 Watt Compact Fluorescent: Pre -heat with integral starter, 3500K, 13
watts, 900 initial lumens, 82 CRI, 10000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start
equal to Philips PL-S13W/35.
D. 26 Watt Compact Fluorescent: Rapid start, 3500K, 26 watts, 1800 initial
lumens, 82 CRI, 10000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to Philips
PL-T26W/35/4P.
E. 32 Watt Compact Fluorescent: Rapid start, 3500K, 26 watts, 2400 initial
lumens, 82 CRI, 10000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to Philips
PL-T32W/35/4P.
F. 40 Watt Biaxial Fluorescent: Rapid start, 3500K, 40 watts, 3150 initial
lumens, 82 CRI, 10000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to Philips
PL-L40W/35/RS.
2.9 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) LAMPS
�-• A. Metal Halide: Phosphor coated "E" or "BT" lamp.
B. High Pressure Sodium: Clear lamps for exterior application, diffuse lamps for
interior application, "E" lamp.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent
fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where
such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and
securely attached according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on
reflected ceiling plan. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures
using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install
conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. Fixtures shall be
securely fastened to the ceiling framing member by the use of four UL listed
clips. Support luminaries larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling
grid. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below.
C. Fixtures in Plaster or Gypboard Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or
frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster or gypboard ceiling.
D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings.
Install surface mounted luminarigs plumb and adjust to align with building lines
and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. For lay -in ceilings install
a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural
members. Do not suspend fixtures from lay -in ceiling panels.
E. Continuous Rows: Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row
shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of
the lamp shall be visible.
F. Pendant Mounted Fixtures: Install suspended luminaires using pendants
supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend
luminaire at indicated height.
03860396/98 LIGHTING 16500-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
G.
Fixtures Mounted to Exposed Grid: Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed
grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the
attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure, otherwise use bolts or
screws to secure fixture to ceiling grid. Where they cannot be centered on a
grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the
structural members.
H.
Wall Mounted Fixtures: Install wall mounted luminaries, emergency lighting
units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled.
Coordinate the locations with architectural wall elevations and with
architectural features.
I.
Exit Signs: Install surface mounted exit signs plumb and adjust to align with
building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
J.
Accessories: Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
K.
Connections: Connect luminaries to branch circuit outlets provided under
Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. Make wiring connections to r -
branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature
conditions within luminaire. Bond products and metal accessories to branch
circuit equipment grounding conductor.
L.
Lamps: Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
M.
Firestopping: Install recessed luminaries using accessories and firestopping
materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. --
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for
proper connection and operation.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. General: Aim and adjust luminaries as indicated or as directed.
B. Exit Signs: Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. Clean photometric control surfaces
as recommended by manufacturer. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. General: Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 LIGHTING 16500-6 r"
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16620
STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. General: Furnish and install a complete emergency engine generator plant to
furnish power to circuits as shown. All equipment shall be new and unused.
The unit shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
production of such equipment. That company and its authorized dealer shall
assume sole responsibility for the performance of the unit and all its
accessories. The unit shall be a standard model in regular production and shall
be selected to operate at a rating recommended by the manufacturer's current
catalog literature.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points,
and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery,
battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, day tank,
and remote radiator.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings.
Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Show plan and
elevation views with overall and interconnectionpoint dimensions, fuel
consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air
requirements, electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection
diagrams.
D. Test Reports: Submit for review Manufacturer's test data. Indicate results of
performance testing.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete
manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,
handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of
Product.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit for review Manufacturer's Certification.
Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. Include copy of
manufacturer's certified drawings in project record documents.
03860396/98 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16620-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Indicate procedures and
findings.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
r
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with
Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT and in conformance with
manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation
and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Delivery: Accept delivery of unit on site wrapped for protection and mounted
on shipping skids. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their
required time period.
C. Storage: Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an ._
additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,
water, construction debris, and traffic.
D. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift _
only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Location of Standby Generator: Verify location of standby generator prior to
installation. Locations are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless
dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete electrical distribution
system.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of all equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and
maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Include instructions for
normal operation. Include instructions for routine maintenance requirements,
service manuals for engine and day tank, oil sampling and analysis for engine
wear, and emergency maintenance procedures. Include commercial type
manuals consisting of operating and maintenance information, parts, books,
dimensional drawings and wiring diagrams of engine generator set and all
auxiliary equipment.
03860396/98 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16620-2 r
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
t"
i
1
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. General: Furnish service and maintenance of engine generator under an
optional maintenance agreement (contract) selected by the Owner.
Maintenance contract price shall not be included in the equipment price.
Complete procedures and service intervals are to be detailed in the
maintenance service proposal which is to be offered to the Owner at the time
of generator start up.
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. General: Provide -maintenance materials as required for preventive
maintenance.
B. Tools: Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the
engine generator system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. Filters: Provide two of each fuel, oil and air filter element under provisions of
the General Requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. General: The generating unit offered shall be covered by the manufacturer's
standard warranty or guarantee on new machines, which shall apply for a
minimum of three years following certificate of final payment.
1.12 PARTS AND SERVICE
A. General: The supplier offering the engine generator set shall be the authorized
dealer of the manufacturer of the set, and shall be fully qualified and
authorized to provide service and parts for the engine, generator and auxiliary
components at any time, day or night. Availability of parts and service will be
considered in reviewing the submittal.
1.13 TESTING
A. General: The complete engine generator plant shall be assembled and tested
at the factory. The tests shall be as outlined herein and a certified report of
the test shall be submitted for review. A copy of the report shall be bound in
the operation and maintenance manual. Factory tests shall be as follows:
1. Test results to be reported at full load include engine RPM, frequency,
average voltage, line to line voltage for all three phases, average current,
line to line current for all three phases, and observed power, all at .80
a power factor.
w
r 03860396/98 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS
16620-3
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
900-9330
A. General: The standby engine generator shall be of Caterpillar or Onan
manufacture equal in all respects to the Caterpillar Olympian Model D150P1.
2.2 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
A. Description: NFPA 125, engine generator system to provide source of power
for Level 1 applications.,
B. Sources: Engine, generator and accessories shall be compatible equipment,
furnished by a single manufacturer and shall be.packaged and warranted as a
unit.
C. System Capacity: Provide 150KW rating at 0.8 power factor, at elevation of
3300 feet above sea level in an ambient temperature of 125 degrees F.
maximum and 0 degrees F. minimum, standby rating using engine mounted
radiator. The rating of the unit shall be based on operation of the set when
equipped with all of the necessary operating accessories, such as radiator, fan,
air cleaners, lubricating oil pump, fuel injector pump, fuel transfer pump, jacket --
water pump, governor, charging generator, main generator, exciter, regulator,
muffler and other devices specified herein.
2.3 ENGINE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Type: Water cooled inline or V type, four stroke cycle, compression ignition
Diesel internal combustion engine, either naturally aspirated, pressure charged
or turbocharged.
Rating: Sufficient to operate under full load for 24 hours in an ambient of 100
degrees F. at elevation of 3300 feet.
Horsepower: The brake horsepower of the engine at rated RPM with all
accessories attached, shall not be less than required by the full load rating of
the generator, taking into account all efficiency losses.
Fuel System: No. 2 fuel oil. State guaranteed fuel consumption at 100, 75,
and 50 percent load at rated speed. Fuel consumption shall not exceed 0.44
pounds per bake horsepower per hour at full load with fuel rated at 19,350 Btu
per pound (high heat value).
Engine speed: 1800 RPM.
Cylinders: Multicylinders, vertical inline or V type; removable wet or dry type
liners of close grained alloy iron, heat treated for proper hardness to obtain
maximum life. The minimum engine displacement shall be 5.99 liters.
Pistons: Trunk type; oil cooled; cast iron or aluminum alloy; fitted with both
compression and oil control rings.
Crankshaft: Drop forged, electrically hardened and dynamically balanced; main
bearing journal on both sides of each crankpin.
03860396/98 STANDBY.ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16620-4
x
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
i
900-9330
I. Bearings: Connecting rod and main bearings shall be precision removable shell
type.
J. Valves: Heat resisting alloy steel with stellite facing; stellite faced exhaust
valve seats.
K. Flywheel: Both statically and dynamically balanced.
L. Lubrication: Submerged suction, gear type oil pump to supply forced feed,
constant pressure oil to all important points such as main bearings, crank pin
bearings, pistons, piston plus, timing gears, camshaft bearings, and valve
rocker mechanisms; replaceable element, full flow oil filter; spring loaded
bypass valve to bypass oil if filter is clogged; lubricating oil cooler, engine
mounted and water cooled. State guaranteed lubricating oil consumption.
M. Fuel Pump: Integral engine driven fuel transfer pump to supply adequate
quantity of fuel under all conditions to the engine injection system.
N. Governor (Electronic, Isochronous): Provide electronic governor to provide
isochronous regulation, no load to full load and 0.25 percent steady state
regulation. Recovery to steady state within 5 seconds following sudden load
changes. Equip governor with means for manual operation and adjustment.
0. Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and
voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Include remote starting control circuit, with MANUAL -OFF -REMOTE selector
switch on engine generator control panel. The generator set engine shall be
equipped with a 12 volt battery charging alternator.
P. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil
pressure, overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by
manufacturer.
Q. Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral
thermostatic control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F.,
and suitable for operation at 208 Volts AC.
R. Radiator: Engine shall be equipped with mounted radiator using a permanent
type ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant, with blower type fan, water manifold,
temperature control valve, and gear or V belt driven engine water circulating
pump, sized to maintain safe engine temperature in ambient temperature of
125 degrees F. Radiator air flow restriction 0.5 inches of water maximum.
S. Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler,
fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear driven water pump. Include fuel
pressure gauge, water temperature gauge, and lube oil pressure gauge on
engine/generator control panel. The engine lube oil and coolant drain lines
shall be extended through the engine base.
T. Mounting: Provide unit with suitable spring type vibration isolators and mount
on structural steel base. Provide unit with integral anti -vibration pads installed
between engine/generator mounting feet and generator set frame.
U. Exhaust System: Provide critical type silencer, with muffler companion flanges
and flexible stainless steel exhaust connection for each exhaust outlet, sized
in accordance with engine manufacturer's instructions.
V. Air Cleaner and Silencer: Provide an air cleaner and critical grade silencer as
recommended by the engine manufacturer.
03860396/98 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16620-6
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.4 GENERATOR
A.
Generator: NEMA MG1, engine drive, revolving field, reconnectible brushless
synchronous generator with brushless exciter, direct connected to engine with
steel disc flexible coupling. Generator housing shall bolt to engine flywheel
housing. It shall have a single ball bearing support for the rotor. Rotor shall
be dynamically balanced up to 25% overspeed. It shall be open, dripproof
type with amortisseur windings.
B.
Rating: 150KW rating, at 0.8 power factor, 480/277v, 3 phase, 60 Hz at
1800 rpm for continuous service in standby power application at the altitude
and ambient temperature specified hereinbefore.
C.
Insulation Class: F.
D.
Temperature Rise: .130 degrees C Standby.
E.
Enclosure: NEMA MG 1, open drip proof.
F.
Exciter: Generator field excitation shall be by a rotating exciter mounted on
generator rotor shaft through a brushless rotating diode system.
G.
Voltage Regulation: Include generator mounted volts per hertz exciter
regulator to match engine and generator characteristics, with voltage
regulation plus or minus 1 percent from no load to full load at 0.8 power
factor. Include manual controls to adjust voltage droop, voltage level (plus or
minus 10 percent) and voltage gain. voltage stability shall be plus or minus
03860396/98
0.5 percent of average RMS value at any steady state load condition from no
load to full load. Stable voltage operation shall be reestablished within 5
seconds following any sudden load change between no load and full load. On
any load addition up to and including 90 percent full load, the voltage dip shall
not exceed 20 percent of rated voltage.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A.
Skid Mounted Fuel Tank (Dual Wall, 24 Hour Capacity): Provide engine
generator set with a UL listed, dual wall, aluminized steel fuel tank. Fuel tank
shall be incorporated in sub base of generating set. Provide tank with flexible
fuel line connections, lockable fill cap, vent to both primary and secondary f --
containments, fuel level gauge, low fuel level alarm, and leak detection alarm.
Tank shall have fuel capacity to provide 24 hours of operation at full load.
Tank shall have baked enamel finish and weatherproof secondary containment.
B.
Batteries: Heavy duty, diesel starting type lead acid storage batteries, ampere
hours capacity as required for generator. Match battery voltage to starting
system. Include necessary cables and clamps.
C.
Battery Tray: Treated for electrolyte resistance, constructed to contain
spillage.
D.
Battery Charger: Current limiting type designed to float at 2.17 volts per cell
and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. Provide charger with adjustable charge rate
with two steps, trickle charge and fast charge; automatic reset thermal
overload circuit breaker on charger. Include full wave rectifier, DC voltmeter
and ammeter, and 120 volts AC fused input. Charger may be mounted on
wall, on generator control panel in enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1
requirements, or in automatic transfer switch and shall operate from 120 volts
normal power.
03860396/98
STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16620-6 ►-
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
E. Line Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, molded case circuit breaker on generator
output with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole,
sized in accordance with NFPA 70. Include battery voltage operated shunt
'. trip, connected to open circuit breaker on engine failure. Unit mount in
enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements.
F. Microprocessor Based, Generator Mounted, Digital Control Panel: NEMA 250,
Type 1 with engine/generator controls and indicators. Control Panel shall
include open Protocol communication interface. Include provision for padlock
and the following equipment and features:
1. Automatic start -stop engine control with programmable safety
shutdowns.
2. LCD digital readout for: Engine Oil Pressure; Coolant Temperature; Engine
RPM; System DC Volts; Engine Running Hours; Generator AC Volts;
Generator AC Amps; and Generator Frequency.
�- 3. Flashing Led indicators for protection and diagnostics, including:
a. Low oil pressure.
b. High coolant temperature.
c. low coolant level(when optional coolant sensor is installed).
d. Overspeed.
e. Overcrank.
f. Emergency stop.
g. Spare fault shutdown.
h. Spare fault alarm.
4. Cycle cranking, with adjustable crank/rest periods of 1 to 60 seconds.
5. Cooldown timer, adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes.
6. Programmable for energize to shut off or energize to run.
ell 7. Generator voltage adjust potentiometer.
8. Indicator/display test switch.
9. NEMA 1 /IP22 enclosure.
10. Spare alarm and fault inputs for customer use.
11. Emergency stop pushbutton.
12. Coolant loss sensor.
13. Electronic governors.
r" 14. Auxiliary relay.
15. Alarm modules and remote annuciators for standby power applications to
meet NFPA 110 codes.
r^ 16. Panel lights.
G. Remote Annunciator Panel: Flush mounted panel with brushed stainless steel
finish. The annunciator shall be powered by the engine generator storage
battery to provide a warning of derangement of alarm conditions in the
standby power plant. Provide audible and visible indicators and alarms
required by NFPA 110.
03860396/98 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16620-7
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.6 WEATHER PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE
A. The unit shall be shipped to the job assembled in a weatherproof shelter. The
shelter shall completely enclose the charger and all other accessories. The
shelter, shall be constructed of welded and bolted sheet steel, 16 gauge and
14 gauge with a 14 gauge floor plate. All metal parts shall be prime coated
and finish painted with machinery enamel. Each assembly shall have shuttered
air openings on the front and sides, with mesh screens covering side shutters.
The shelter shall have hinged double doors on each side and one door in the
rear for access to the engine generator and controls. All door handles shall be
of key lock design. The packaged generator set shall include single point lift
capability.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mounting: The engine generator set shall be factory mounted on a welded
structural steel base of box type construction. Provide and install a reinforced
concrete pad designed for the weight of the unit and set the steel base on the
pad by installing pad type vibration isolators under the base of the unit.
Isolation pads shall be properly selected and installed to minimize noise and
vibration transmission.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with
Section 01650 - STARTING OF SYSTEMS.
B. Full Load Test: Provide full load test utilizing portable test bank, if required,
for four hours minimum. Simulate power failure including operation of transfer
switch, automatic starting cycle, and automatic shutdown and return to
normal. Record in 20 minute intervals during four hour test: `
1. Kilowatts.
2. Amperes.
3. Voltage. —
4. Coolant temperature.
5. Room temperature.
6. Frequency.
7. Oil pressure.
C. Alarm and Shutdown Circuits: Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating
conditions.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. General: Prepare and start systems according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
03860396/98 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16620-8
i'
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
B. Supervision: After the engine generator is installed, and before it is energized,
a representative of the manufacturer shall inspect the installation and perform
the prestarting checks on the unit. After his inspection is complete, he shall
crank the unit and test the system for proper operation. At the time of final
inspection, he shall demonstrate the operation of the system including starting,
stopping, exercising, etc. from the transfer switches.
C. Instructions: The manufacturer's representative shall allot sufficient time 4
hours minimum to instruct the owner's personnel as to the complete operation
of the emergency system including the engine generator, transfer switches,
service recommendations.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. General: Adjust work in accordance with Section 01700 - CONTRACT
-, CLOSEOUT. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed. After final
acceptance of the generator system and test the contractor shall refill the
diesel tank with full fuel.
3.5 CLEANING
A. General: Clean work according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil
and fuel filters.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. General: Provide systems demonstration in accordance with Section 01650 -
STARTING OF SYSTEMS.
B. Simulation: Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and
demonstrate that system operates to provide emergency and standby power.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16620-9
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. General: Provide and install a complete and operating 24 VDC, closed circuit,
electrically supervised, zone annunciated fire alarm and detection system with
emergency battery backup as shown on the drawings and described herein.
It is the intent to obtain a complete system which will operate as described
herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided
whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings.
The system shall include but not be limited to all control panels, power
supplies, signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit,
wire, fittings, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating
system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. The contractor
shall submit complete documentation for the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System
showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names,
and Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance
with these specifications.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review a complete riser diagram and layout of the
entire Fire Alarm / Life Safety System, showing all interconnect wiring and
equipment. Provide annunciator layout and system wiring diagram showing
each device and wiring connection required.
D. Test Reports: Submit for review Manufacturer's test data. Indicate
satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete
manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,
handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of
products.
03860396/98
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-1
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: The equipment and installation shall comply with the
current applicable provisions of the following standards:
1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code, Article 760.
2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.
3. Local and State building codes.
4. All requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
5. Underwriters. Laboratories, Inca
6. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
B. UL Listing: The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the
following standards as applicable.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Record actual locations of initiating devices, signaling
appliances, and end -of -line devices. Record actual wiring diagram.
C. Operation Data: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for
items specified herein. Include the following in the operation and maintenance
manuals:
1. Complete typewritten operating instructions.
2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified.
3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering
numbers.
4. A plan showing conduit size and routing, number and size of conductors
and locations of all devices. "
5. Maintenance and repair procedures.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience. The fire alarm
installing firm shall be the authorized dealer of the manufacturer, shall be duly
licensed in the State of Texas under Senate Bill 925 and shall empty on staff �--
NICET Level III technicians. That firm shall maintain a staff of qualified
technicians capable of installing and servicing the system. They shall also
maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system.
1.7 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General: All equipment and material shall be new and unused, and listed by
Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel
components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty
without degradation of function or performance. All equipment covered by
this specification or noted on Installation Drawings shall be the best equipment
suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be
recognized and U.L. listed as compatible by both manufacturers.
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-2
r..
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
' A. General: Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for one year
k from Date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. Keys: Provide six keys of each type.
C. Smoke Heat Detectors: Provide three of each type'of automatic smoke and
heat detector.
1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (MULTIPLEXED)
A. General: Complete, zoned, noncoded, addressable, microprocessor -based fire
detection and alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation.
B. Alarm Verification: Provide analog addressable smoke detectors and automatic
alarm verification for alarms initiated by certain smoke! detector zones as
indicated on the Drawings.
C. Signal Transmission: Multiplex signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm
service only.
1.11 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Noninterfering: Zone, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal on
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-3
7
one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All
zones are manually resettable from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) after
the initiating device or devices are restored to normal. Systems that require
the use of batteries or battery backup for the programming functions are not
acceptable.
B. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone
initiated. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not
altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal.
Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third -level priority. Signals
of a higher level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even
though the lower -priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals
regardless of priority or order received.
C. General Alarm: The actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause the
following events to immediately occur:
,.,
1. Audible/Visual Signals: Sound all audible devices continuously and flash
all associated visual signals.
2. Voice Evacuation: Sound all voice alarm messages continuously and flash
r,
all associated visual signals.
r"
3. FACP General Alarm: Indicate the general alarm condition at the FACP
4. FACP Zone Identification: Identify the device that is the source of the
alarm (or its zone) at the FACP.
5. Remote Annunciator General Alarm: Indicate the general alarm condition
at the remote annunciator.
6. Remote Annunciator Zone Identification: Identify the device that is the
source of the alarm (or its zone) at the remote annunciator.
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-3
7
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
Ia
E.
F.
G.
In
x-
900-9330
7. Exit Signs: Flash all exit signs.
8. Air Unit Shutdown: Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to
initiate shutdown of all air handling units over 2000 CFM by zone.
9. Smoke Dampers: Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to close
smoke dampers by zone.
System Trouble Detection: When a trouble condition is detected by one of the
system initiating or indicating circuits, the following shall immediately occur:
1. FACP System Trouble: Indicate system trouble at the FACP.
2. FACP Audible/Visible Signal: Activate a local sounding device in the
FACP which is distinct from the general alarm sound. Manual
acknowledge function at FACP silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm
is displayed until initiating failure or circuit trouble is cleared.
3. Trouble Indication: Indicate the device or zone with the trouble condition.
If the trouble condition is caused by module failure, power trouble, or
ground fault, the corresponding trouble indication on the FACP shall
operate.
4. Remote Annunciator: Indicate a visual and audible trouble alarm at
remote annunciator panel.
Control Switch Operation: Switches provide capability for acknowledgement
of alarm; supervisory, trouble, and other specifiedsignals at the FACP; and
capability to silence the local audible signal and light a light -emitting diode
(LED). Subsequent zone alarms cause the audible signal to sound again until
silenced in turn by switch operation. Restoration to normal of alarm,
supervisory, and trouble conditions extinguish the associated LED and cause
the audible signal to sound again until the restoration is acknowledged by
switch operation.
Walk Test Operation: Walk test mode shall test initiating device circuits and
indicating device circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset
the system. Upon activation of an initiating device, the controlled outputs
shall operate for approximately four seconds with circuits that were selected
under walk test. Inducing a trouble into the initiating circuit shall activate the
controlled outputs shall activate and remain activated until the trouble is
cleared. Inducing trouble into the indicating circuit shall activate the particular
circuit and pulse the circuit at a one second on/off rate until the trouble is
cleared. An alarm indication, and a trouble indication shall operate upon
completion of each circuit testa
Alarm Verification Operation: Smoke detection for a zone with alarm
verification causes the following:
1. Alarm Indication: Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification"
signal at the FACP.
2. Verification Sequence: Activation of a listed and approved "alarm
verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector.
3. Alarm Initiation: Initiate general alarm if the alarm is verified.
4. Alarm Cancellation: FACP indication cancellation and system reset if the
alarm is not verified.
Waterf low Operation: Waterf low switch operation initiates a non silenceable
general alarm.
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-4
` LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
r
w
I. Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switch Operation: Sprinkler valve tamper switch
operation causes or initiates the following:
1. FACP: A supervisory audible and visible "valve tamper" signal at the
. FACP.
2. Remote Annunciator: A supervisory audible and visible "valve tamper"
signal at the remote annunciator.
J. History Mode Operation: The system shall be able to store and display the last
255 system events which have occurred.
K. Remote Annunciation: Manual and automatic operation of alarm and
supervisory initiating devices is annunciated both on the FACP and remote.
annunciator, indicating the location and type device.
L. Loss of Primary Power: Loss of primary power at the FACP shall cause the
following indications:
1. FACP: Sound trouble signal and illuminate emergency power light when
�-- the system is operating on an alternate power supply.
P 2. Remote Annunciator: Sound trouble signal and illuminate emergency
power light when the system is operating on an alternate power supply.
M. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Displays plain language description of alarms,
jtrouble signals, supervisory signals, monitoring actions, system and
component status, and system commands.
i
1.12 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. General: Only FACP equipment and peripheral field devices have been shown
R
on the Drawings. Specific and complete wiring between control equipment
and peripheral equipment has been deleted for clarity.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
l 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
r
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Notifier.
2. Gamewell.
3. Edwards System Technology (EST).
B. Being listed as an acceptable Manufacturer in no way relieves the Contractors
obligation to meet the requirements of the specification. Listing of the
manufacturer does not guarantee that their system conforms to the
specification requirements.
2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems."
B. Flush Enclosure: Modular flush wall mounted enclosure. Wall thickness shall
be verified for proper thickness.
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-5
I
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
C. Cabinet: The back box and door shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with
provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. The door
shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening
for viewing of all indicators. Arrange panel so all operations required for
testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from
the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a
complete control panel, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures.
Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for
interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. Identify each enclosure by
an engraved, red laminated, phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the
enclosure nameplate shall not be less than. 1 inch high. Identify individual
components and modules within the cabinets with permanent labels.
D. Control Modules: The FACP shall be modular in structure for ease of
installation, maintenance, and future expansion. The FACP shall be provide
with the proper number and types of modules to serve all zones, indicating
devices and functions as indicated on the drawings. Local, visible, and audible
signals notify of alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of
audible alarm has a distinctly different sound.
E. Systems: Alarm and supervisory systems are separate and independent in the
FACP. The alarm initiating zone boards in the FACP consist of plug in cards.
Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is not _
acceptable.
F. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls (Multiplex System): Provide
control at the FACP for the addressable system components, including
annunciation and supervision. A display with a minimum of 80 characters
displays alarm, supervisory, and component status messages. Arrange keypad
for use in entering and executing control commands.
G. System Power Supply: Comply with UL 1481 "Power supplies for Fire
Protective Signaling Systems." The main power supply for the FACP shall be
integral to the control panel itself, and shall be adequate to serve control panel
modules, remote detectors, remote annunciators, door holders, smoke
dampers, relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery operated
emergency power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode
for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 15 minutes. Input power shall be
120 VAC, 60 Hz. The power supply shall provide an integral variable rate
battery charger which will automatically inhibit the deep discharge of the
system standby batteries, and shall be protected against the accidental reverse
polarity connection of the standby batteries. The main power supply shall
continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground conditions, and shall have
the following LED indications: --
1. Negative Ground Fault LED
2. Positive Ground Fault LED
3. Battery Fail LED
4. AC Power Fail LED
H. Voice Alarm: An emergency communication system, integral with the FACP,
includes central voice alarm system components complete with microphones,
preamplifiers, tone generators and message generators.' Manual or automatic
alarm signals generated by the System shall be used to generate audio
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721.6
FLUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
evacuation signals or messages which shall be distributed throughout the
building's speaker circuits. All field circuits shall be fully supervised and power
limited by the main control panel.
L Voice Alarm Amplifier: Comply with UL 1711, "Amplifiers for Fire Protective
Signaling Systems." The voice alarm amplifier shall be sized to serve the
speaker circuits. The amplifier shall include an integral power supply, and shall
provide the following controls and indicators. Adjustment of the correct Audio
Level for the Amplifier shall not require any special tools or test equipment.
1. Normal Audio Level LED
2. Incorrect Audio Level LED
3. Brownout LED
4. Battery Trouble LED
5. Amplifier Trouble LED
6. Audio Amplifier Gain Adjust
J. Voice Alarm Channels: The Audio Subsystem shall be capable of providing up
to 4 channels of Fire Alarm evacuation signals and messages. The alarm
evacuation messages may be made through a microphone or through a
pre-recorded message panel.
K. Audio Message Generator: The Audio Message Generator shall provide up to
4 digitally -recorded voice messages, each of which may be up to 24 seconds
long. A built-in microphone shall allow paging through speaker circuits.
Additionally, the audio message generator produces a variety of tones
including slow whoop, yelp, yeow, siren, hi/lo, and steady tone. A variety of
prerecorded messages shall be available from the factory. Up to two
pre-programmed messages may be installed in the system. The AMG may be
commanded to produce any one of its tones or messages. The Audio Message
Generator shall have the following controls and indicators to allow for proper
operator understanding and control.
1. Audio Level Normal LED
2. All Call LED
3. On -Line LED
4. Amplifier Trouble LED
5. Speaker Trouble LED
6. All Call Switch
7. Local Speaker Volume Control
L. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan
plastic or glass cover in a metal frame. Install the frame in a location
observable from the FACP. Include interpretation and appropriate response for
displays and signals, and briefly describe the functional operation of the
system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.3 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR UNITS
A. Description: The remote annunciator panel shall be housed in a backbox
designed for surface or flush mounting directly to a wall or vertical surface.
The back box shall be constructed of painted steel with provisions for electrical
conduit connections into the sides and top. The remote annunciator system
shall provide alarm, trouble and supervisory annunciation corresponding to the
FACP, and integral control switches.
r 03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-7
l
t
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
2.4 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
A.
Manual Fire Alarm Station: Comply with UL 38, "Manually Actuated Signaling
Boxes." Manual fire alarm pull stations shall be semi -flush mounted,
non -coded, non-breakglass type, equipped with key lock in order that they may
be tested without operating the handle, and so designed that after an actual
activation, they cannot be restored to normal except by key reset. An
operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually
detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet, front or side.
Manual stations shall be constructed of die formed, satin -finished aluminum,
with operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear
on three sides of the Manual Station in letters one half inch in size or larger.
Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox, or
semi -flush mounting on standard single gang box or switchplate.
B.
Automatic Heat Detector: Comply with UL 521, "Heat Detectors for Fire —
Protective Signaling Systems." Automatic heat detectors shall be combination
rate of rise and fixed temperature rated at 135 degrees F for areas where
ambient temperatures do not exceed 100 degrees, and 200 degrees for areas
where the temperature exceeds 100 degrees, but does not exceed 150
degrees. Automatic heat detectors shall be low profile, ceiling mount type
with positive indication of activation. The rate of rise element shall consist of
an air chamber, a flexible metal diaphragm, and a factory calibrated,
moisture -proof, trouble free vent, and shall operate when the rate of
temperature rise exceeds 15 degrees F. per minute. The fixed temperature
element shall consist of a fusible alloy retainer and actuator shaft. Automatic
heat detectors shall have a smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet.
C.
Photoelectric Area Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors
for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be
optical type using an LED light source. Each detector shall contain a visual
status and alarm indicator, remote LED output and a built-in test switch.
Detector shall be provided on a twist -lock base that allows for mounting to a
4" outlet box. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 3.0% as
measured in a U.L. smoke box. Calibration sensitivity and performance test
shall be performed without smoke. The detector shall not alarm when exposed
to air velocities of up to 3000 feet per minute.
D.
Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268A "Smoke Detectors for
Duct Applications." Provide duct mounted smoke detectors in the air ducts of
air conditioning units where indicated on the drawings. Detectors shall be
ionization or photoelectric type as indicated on the Drawings and as specified
above. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided with visual alarm and power
indicators, and a reset switch. Each detector shall be installed upon the air
duct, with properly sized air sampling tubes.
E.
Duct Detector Remote Test Station: Where indicated on the Drawings provide .—
duct detectors with remote test station and alarm LED which indicates the
alarm status of the associated smoke detector. For detectors located in roof
mounted air conditioning units, install the remote test stations flush in the _
ceiling directly below or as close as possible below the roof mounted air unit.
For detectors mounted inside the building spaces, mount the remote test
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-8
W
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
stations on the wall or ceiling near the detector. Provide each test station with
a typewritten label indicating the unit that the detector resides in. Provide
each duct detector with auxiliary contacts for air unit control interface.
2.5 ALARM INDICATING DEVICES
A. Visual Only Units: Comply with UL 1638, "Visual Signaling Appliances." The
visual section of the unit shall have a minimum of 75 candela and meet or
exceed the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). Mount
the visual only units as indicated on the drawings.
B. Voice Evacuation Speakers/Visual Indicating Appliances: Comply with UL
1480, "Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling." Compression driver type with
flared projectors, blocking capacitor for DC line supervision, terminal blocks for
the in -out connection of the field wires. Seal the back of each speaker to
protect the speaker cone from damage and dust. The speakers shall have a
uniform output over a frequency range from 400-4000 HZ. and shall have field
selectable power taps of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1,2,4 and 8 watts. Match transformer
tap to the acoustical environment of the speaker location. Rated sound output
shall be 96 dBa as measured in under UL Standard 1480. The speakers shall
flush mount to 4" square backboxes 1 1/2 inches deep, with 1 1/2 inch
extension ring. The finish shall be red/white textured enamel. The visual
section of the unit shall have a minimum of 75 candela and meet or exceed the
requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). Provide with
hardware to achieve mounting as indicated on the drawings.
�- 03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-9
2.6 AUXILIARY DEVICES
A.
Waterflow Switches: Comply with UL 346, "Waterflow Indicators for Fire
Protective Signaling Systems." Waterflow switches shall be installed in
sprinkler pipes to signal fire detection and control systems or auxiliary
indicators when flow occurs. Water flowing in the pipe shall deflect a vane in
the switch and cause a contact closure.
B.
Supervisory Switches: Supervisory switches shall be installed on sprinkler
("
cut-off valves to indicate the closing of the valve. The switch shall be
mounted on the valve actuator arm and test'in a notch filed in the valve stem.
If the valve stem is moved it shall force the actuator arm out of the notch thus
causing the switch to operate. The switch shall be rated at 7.5 amps for 24
volts.
2.7 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16120
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE.
B.
Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Power limited
fire -protective signaling cable, copper conductor, 300 volts .insulation rated
105 degrees C.
C.
Plenum Cable: Power limited fire -protective signaling cable classified for fire
and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105
degrees C, suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts,
r
4
and plenums.
�- 03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-9
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Installation of the fire alarm/life safety system shall be in strict
compliance with manufacturers' written recommendations and NFPA
Standards. Consult the manufacturers control panel and peripheral equipment
installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment
sizes, etc: before beginning system installation. Refer to the riser/connection '—
diagram for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data.
B. Mounting: All equipment shall be attached to a non load-bearing wall, and
shall be held firmly in place. Fastening and supports shall be adequate to
support the required load, and provide a safety factor of five. All fire alarm
devices shall be flush mounted in the walls that they are located on with the
exception of existing block wall construction. In this case, devices shall be 7.
mounted in surface mounted boxes and shall be fed with surface mounted
raceway via the shortest exposed path. All surface boxes and raceways shall
be in accordance with Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS of these --
specifications.
C. . FACP: FACP will be mounted with the top of panel not more than 6 feet
above floor level. The FACP shall be flush mounted in the wall with the
exception of the panel being installed on an existing block wall or when
located in a non-public space such as an equipment room or janitor's closet.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to final coordinate the proper wall
thickness of new walls containing FACPs.
D. Remote Annunciator: As indicated on the riser/connection diagram drawings,
each system alarm point or zone in the system shall be uniquely labeled within _
the FACP. Names of the system points/zones shall be as defined by the
Engineer orthe Owner. Fire sprinkler activation detecting system(s) shall each
be indicated on a separate zone in the FACP.
E. Manual Stations: Install manual station in recessed backboxes with operating
handle 48 inches above finished floor.
F. Audible/Visible Signal: install audible and visual signal devices the lower of 80
inches above finished floor or 6 inches below ceiling.
G. Water Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each
sprinkler valve station required to be supervised.
H. Conduit and Boxes: Provide complete wiring and conduit between all
equipment in separate conduit, maximum 40% full. Conduits of proper size
shall be installed from the control panel equipment to field devices. All field
devices shall be mounted upon U.L. listed electrical junction boxes. Conduit
shall not enter the FACP, or any other remotely mounted control panel
equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry knockouts have been
provided by the factory. .—
L Junction Boxes: All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. listed electrical
junction boxes. All electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as 'Fire Alarm
System" with decal or other approved markings.
J. Power Circuit: The FACP shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch
circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power
distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. FACP primary power wiring shall be 12 _
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-10
7
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to an equipment
grounding conductor. Conduit shall enter into the FACP backbox only at those
areas of the backbox which have factory conduit knockouts.
K. End -of -line Devices: Mount end -of -line device in control panel.
L. Door Holders: Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80
pounds pulling force.
M. Connections: Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices,
sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression
system control panels, duct smoke detectors and any other devices as
required.
N. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72E. Install ceiling
mounted detectors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge.
Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches but not more than 12
inches below the ceiling. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors
on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet
apart in any direction. Install detectors no closer than 5 feet from air registers.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 16110 -
"RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces
and as indicated.
B. Wiring Within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
the sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to
the terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated,
spliced or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system
to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the wiring diagrams of the
system. Make all connections with approved crimp on terminal spade lugs,
pressure type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes,
cabinets, or equipment enclosures where any circuit tap is made.
D. Conductors: Unless otherwise specified within the installation manual of the
specific equipment being used, all field wiring shall be minimum #16 (solid) or
#14type, and shall be approved for use as fire alarm cable:. Cable shall be the
type listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use and shall be installed per NEC Article
760.
E. Color Coding: Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded
as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each
junction box.
1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white.
2. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red.
3. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown.
4. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative).
5. Door Release: Gray, gray.
6. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, orange.
7. Municipal Fire Alarm Loop: Black, white.
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-11
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
3.3 GROUNDING (VOICE ALARM)
A. General: Ground equipment and conductor cable shields. For audio circuits,
minimize to the greatest extent possible ground loops, common mode returns,
noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5 ohm ground at
main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Field inspection and testing will be performed according to the
Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Tests: Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department
requirements.
P_
3.5 FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. Final Test: The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the
entire system has been accomplished by a factory trained distributor in the
presence of a representative of the authority having jurisdiction and the
Owner's representative.
B. As -built Drawings: The distributor will present a complete set of "as -built" Fire
Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's
Manual to the Building Owner's representative and the local AHJ. A fee of
$200.00 per floorplan will be charged to the distributor/contractor for
obtaining the fire alarm plan(s) and/or floor plan(s) on diskette from the
electrical engineer. Diskette will be provided upon receipt of check.
C. Service: The distributor shall make available contracted periodic system
testing, maintenance, and/or calibration services.
3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. General: Prepare and start systems in accordance with Section 01650 -
STARTING OF SYSTEMS.
B. Factory Technician: The distributor shall provide the on-site services of an
authorized, factory trained technical representative to supervise all connections
and fully test all devices and components of the system during installation
phase.
C. Training: The distributor shall provide comprehensive training on the
operation, proper use, and testing of the installed fire alarm system to the
Building Owner's Representative, and the local AHJ.
D. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses
to each.
END OF SECTION
03860396/98 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721-12
j
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16770
PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes a system for amplifying sound signals from sources such
as microphones, radio system and/or telephone system and distributing and
reproducing them on loudspeakers at various locations. The intent of items
specified in this section and shown in the drawings is to provide a complete
and operable 12 zone overhead public address/paging and background music
system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or
loudspeaker zones, with separate amplification and switching that permit
selection between paths for speaker alternative program signals.
B. Zone: A separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that
may be arranged for selective switching between different channels.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings detailing public address and music systems including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Console layouts.
2. Control panels.
3. Rack arrangements.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiating clearly between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring.
Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
E. Calculations for sizing system back-up battery.
F. Product certificates signed by equipment manufacturers certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
G. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply
with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. Upon
request, submit evidence of experience and of relationship with system
manufacturer.
- 03860396/98 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 16770-1
F
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330 -
H. Manufacturer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that manufacturers
comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
Upon request, submit evidence of manufacturing experience.
I. Report of field tests and observations, including record of final tap settings of
speaker line matching transformers and signal ground -resistance measurement
certified by Installer.
J. Maintenance data for system to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized
representative of the system manufacturer to perform Work of this Section.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing
public address and music systems complying with thu requirements of these
Specifications and experienced with at least 5 projects of similar size and
scope that. have been in operation for 3 years or more.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical
Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Comply with UL 50.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A
B.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Alpha Communications; Goldcom Inc. Div.
2. Altec Corp.; Sound Products Div.
3. Atlas-Soundolier; American Trading & Production Corp. Div.
4. Dukane Corp.; Communications Systems Div.
5. Bogen Communications, Inc.
6. Executone Information Systems Inc.
7. Peavey Electronics Corp.
8. Rauland-Borg Corp.
03860396/98 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 16770-2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
1 2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment to form an integrated
system. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance
of specified functions.
B. Functional Performance: System functions include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Multizone Operation: A switch or switches may be operated for selective
connection of separate zones to different signal channels.
2. Selectability of sources for amplifying sound between various microphone
outlets and other inputs.
3. All -Call Operation: A single switch may be used to make an
announcement to all zones simultaneously, regardless of zone or channel
switch settings. When switch is released, system returns to original
operating mode.
4. Telephone Paging: Ability to use the all -call function by dialing an
extension from any local telephone instrument and speaking into the
telephone. The system returns to original operating mode when
telephone is hung up.
5. Program Signal: Internal tone generator is activated by time -controlled
dry contacts in a separate clock and program system device. Tone
generator produces a tone that is amplified and sounded over all
speakers, overriding signals currently being distributed.
6. High -Quality Sound Reproduction: Sound is free from noises, such as
pops, clicks, hisses, and hums at all loudspeakers at all times during
system operation, including standby mode with inputs off. System
output is free from distortion and nonuniform coverage of amplified
sound.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Use all solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty at
ratings indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power
usually supplied at 105 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
2.4 CENTRAL EQUIPMENT
A. Preamplifiers: Comply with EIA -SE -101. Provide preamplifiers with the
following minimum features, either separately mounted or as an integral part
of the power amplifier:
1. Output Power: Plus 4 dB above 1 mW at matched power amplifier load.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than one percent.
3. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz.
4. Input Jacks: Minimum of 2. One matched for low -impedance
microphone; other matchable to cassette deck, CD player, or radio tuner
signals without external adapters.
5. Noise Level: Minus 55 dB minimum, below rated output.
6. Controls: ON-OFF, input levels, master gain.
r 03860396/98 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 16770-3
t
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
B.
C
7
E.
G.
900-9330
Power Amplifiers: Comply with EIA -SE -101. Provide the following minimum
features:
1. Mounting: Rack mounted.
2. Output Power: 70-V balanced line.
3. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from zero to full load.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent, at rated power output
from 50 to 12,000 Hz.
5. Signal -to -Noise Ratio: 60 dB, or greater, at rated output.
6. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 50 to 12,000 Hz.
7. Input Sensitivity: Matched to the preamplifier and providing full -rated
output with a sound pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm on
microphone.
8. Output Power Ratings: As indicated.
9. Controls: ON-OFF, input levels, low-cut filter.
Microphone: Comply with EIA -SE -105. Provide microphone with features as
follows:
1. Type: Dynamic, with cardioid polar or omnidirectional characteristic.
.2. Impedance: 150 ohms.
3. Frequency Response: Uniform, 60 to 12,000 Hz.
4. Output Level: Minus 58 dB minimum.
5. Finish: Satin chrome.
6. Mounting: Desk stand with integral -locking, PRESS -TO -TALK switch.
7. Quantity of Microphones: 2.
8. Quantity of Desk Stands: 2.
Control Unit: Comply with EIA -310. Modular construction.
1. Self -Contained Power and Control Unit: Includes in a single assembly the
basic control, electronics, and power supply necessary to accomplish the
specified functions. Power amplifier conforms to "Power Amplifiers"
Paragraph.
2. Spare Positions: Provide 20 percent spare zone control and annunciation
positions on console.
3. Microphone jack.
Telephone Paging Adapter: Arranged to accept voice signals from telephone
extension dialing access and to automatically provide amplifier input and
program override for preselected zones. Features include the following:
1. Frequency Response: Flat, 200 to 2500 Hz, minimum.
2. Impedance Matching: Adapter matches telephone line to public address
system input.
Equipment Rack: Comply with EIA -310. House amplifiers and auxiliary
equipment in standard EIA 19 -inch (483 -mm) racks. Comply with the
following:
1. Group items of the same function together, either vertically or side by
side, and arrange controls symmetrically.
2. Power -Supply Connections: Approved plugs and receptacles.
3. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are
accessible at the rear of the rack for maintenance and testing, with each
item removable from the rack without disturbing other items or
connections.
4. Cover empty space in equipment racks with blank panels so the entire
front of the rack is occupied by panels.
03860396/98 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 16770-4
r�
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
7
900-9330
5. Enclosure Panels: Ventilated rear and sides and solid top. Use louvers
in panels to assure adequate ventilation.
6. Finish: Uniform, baked -enamel factory finish over rust -inhibiting primer.
7. Power Control Panel: Install the front of the equipment housing. Include
a master power ON-OFF switch and pilot light, and a socket for a 5-A
indicating cartridge fuse for rack equipment power.
8. Service Light: Install at the top rear of the rack and control by an
adjacent switch.
9. Vertical Plug Strip: Grounded receptacles, 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. the
full height of the rack, to supply rack -mounted equipment.
10. Maintenance Receptacles: Duplex convenience outlets supplied
independently of the equipment plug strip and located in the front and
bottom rear of the rack.
11. Spare Capacity: Provide 20 percent spare space capacity in the rack for
future equipment.
H. Cone -Type Loudspeakers: Comply with EIA -SE -103. Provide units with the
following minimum features:
1. Axial Sensitivity: 45 dB minimum per EIA standard.
2. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 50 to 15,000 Hz.
3. Size: 8 inches (203 mm) with 1 -inch (25 -mm) voice coil and minimum 5 -
oz. (142-g) ceramic magnet, except as otherwise indicated.
4. Dispersion Angle: 100 degrees.
5. Rated Output Level: 10 W.
6. Matching Transformer: Comply with EIA -160. Full -power rated with 4
EIA standard taps. Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB.
7. Flush -Ceiling Mounting Units:. In steel back boxes, acoustically
dampened, with provision for relief of back pressure. Metal ceiling grille
with baked, white -enamel finish.
I. Horn -Type Loudspeakers: Comply with EIA -SE -103. Provide weatherproof
units with the following features:
1. Type: Single -horn units, double reentrant design, with minimum full -range
power rating of 15 W.
2. Matching Transformer: Comply with EIA -160. Full -power rated with 4
EIA standard taps. Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB.
3. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 250 to 12,000 Hz.
4. Dispersion Angle: 130 degrees by 110 degrees.
5. Mounting: Integral bracket.
6. Units in Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Listed and labeled for the
environment in which they are located.
J. Microphone Outlets: 3 -pole, polarized, locking -type, female microphone
receptacles in single -gang boxes. Equip wall outlets with a brushed stainless-
steel device plate.
K. Wire and Cable: Jacketed, twisted -pair and twisted -mu ltipair, untinned, solid
copper conductors.
1. Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch
(0.8 mm) thick.
2. Microphone Cables: Neoprene jacketed, not less than 2/64 inch (0.8 mm)
thick over shield with filled interstices. Shield No. 34 AWG tinned, soft -
copper strands formed into a braid or approved equivalent foil. Shielding
coverage on the conductors not less than 60 percent.
03860396/98 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 16770-5
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
3. Cable for Use in Plenums: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.
L. Weatherproof Equipment: Where equipment is indicated to be weatherproof,
or is exposed to the weather or damp conditions, provide items specifically
designed and listed for such duty.
1. Grounding Components: As specified in Division 16450 Section
"Grounding & Bonding."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and
counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and r -
counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum -board
partitions where cable wiring method may be used. Use plenum cable in
environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal cable and
raceway wiring except in unfinished spaces.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed
structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables
by straps, staples, or similar fittings so designed and installed as not to
damage the cables. Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (762
mm) and not more than 6 inches 0 52 mm) from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
E. Wiring Within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle,
lace, and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and
use lacing bars. _
F. Control Circuit Wiring: Provide number of conductors as recommended by
system manufacturer for control functions indicated.
G. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on
numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets,
and equipment enclosures.
H. Impedance and Level Matching: Carefully match input and output impedances
and signal levels at audio signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where
required.
I. Provide physical isolation from each other for microphone, line -level, speaker,
and power wiring. Run in separate raceways or provide 12 -inch (305 -mm)
minimum separation where exposed or in same enclosure. Provide additional
physical separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
J. Microphone Outlets: Install as follows, except as otherwise indicated: .-
1. Wall Outlets: Flush mounted.
K. Conductor Sizing: Except as otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit
conductors from racks to loudspeaker outlets not smaller than No. 18 AWG
and conductors from microphone receptacles to amplifiers not smaller than
No. 22 AWG.
L. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Use color coding of conductors and
apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media
are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams.
M. Weatherproofing: Apply to units that are mounted out-of-doors or in damp
locations or where exposed to weather.
03860396/98 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 16770-6
i
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
r
900-9330
N. Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap
settings indicated on the Drawings.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize
ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other
impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate
from power system and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated.
Comply with installation requirements of Division 16450 Section "Grounding
& Bonding."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory -authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components
and the testing and adjustment of the system.
B. Testing Procedure: Conform to the following:
1. Schedule tests a minimum of 7 days in advance of performance.
2. Report: Submit a written record of test results.
3. Operational Test: Perform operational system test to verify conformance
of system to these Specifications. Perform tests that include originating
program and page material at microphone outlets, preamplifier program
inputs, and other inputs. Verify proper volume levels and freedom from
noise and distortion.
4. Signal -to -Noise Ratio Test: Measure the ratio of signal to noise of the
complete system at normal gain settings, using the following procedure:
a. Disconnect a microphone at the connector or jack closest to it and
replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using a 1000 -Hz
signal. Replace all other microphones at the corresponding
connectors with dummy loads, each equal in impedance to the
microphone it replaces. Measure the ratio of signal to noise.
b. Repeat the test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.
c. The minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB.
5. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated
power. Feed signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000,
and 12,000 Hz into each preamp channel and measure the distortion in
the amplifier output. The maximum acceptable distortion at any
frequency is 3 percent total harmonics.
6. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into the system using octaves
centered at 500 and 4000 Hz. Use a sound -level meter with octave band
filters to measure the level at 5 locations in each zone. For spaces with
seated audiences, the maximum permissible variation in level is plus or
minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels between locations in the same zone
and between locations in adjacent zones must not vary more than plus or
minus 3 dB.
03860396/98 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 16770-7
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
900-9330
7. Power Output Test: Measure the electrical power output of each power
amplifier at normal gain setting at 50, 1000, and 12,000 Hz. The
maximum variation in power output at these frequencies must not exceed
plus or minus 1 dB.
8. Ground Test: Measure ground resistance at pubic address system signal
ground terminal using method specified in Division 16 Section
"Grounding." Submit report of measurement.
C. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
D. Retesting: Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and observations. Include.
revising tap settings of speaker line matching transformers where necessary
to optimize volume and uniformity of sound levels. Completely retest work
affected by such deficiencies at the Contractor's expense. Verify by the
system tests that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with
applicable standards. Provide a written record of all retest results.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage
and deterioration.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration and Training: Obtain and pay for the services of a factory -
authorized service representative to demonstrate the system in all operating
modes and functions and to train Owner's maintenance personnel.
B. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
C. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Provide a minimum of 3 hours' training.
D. Training Aid: Use the approved operation and maintenance manual as an
instructional aid. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." Provide
copies of pertinent excerpts from the manual for use in the instruction.
3.6 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy, Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of
Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels,
resetting matching transformer taps, adjusting controls, and investigating
possible need for any system revisions required to meet actual occupancy
conditions. Provide up to 3 visits to the site for this purpose.
END OF SECTION
03860396198 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND MUSIC SYSTEMS 16770-8
u
r
7
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
SECTION 16915
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
900-9330
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to
the work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services
necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the
drawings and specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials in accordance with
Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information
on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's
instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit for review Manufacturer's Maintenance
Instructions. Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and
contacts.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National
Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site in accordance
with Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. Accept delivery of
equipment on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to
carrier within their required time period. Protect from corrosion and entrance
of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather.
03860396/98 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 16915-1
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
900-9330 -
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. As -built Drawings: Record actual locations of each contactor and indicate
circuits controlled on project record documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING PHOTO/TIME CONTROL CENTER _
A. Description: Furnish and install, for exterior lighting, a Photo/Time control of
the seven day calendar dial type, which shall be suitable to operate r
mechanically held contactors.
B. Time Switch: The time switch shall function to prevent energization of lighting
for preset periods each day. When permitted by the time switch, photocontrol f -
shall operate the control center to energize whenever natural lighting falls
below 25 footcandles. The time switch dial shall permit different ON-OFF
settings for each day of the week, with provisions for omitting selected days.
The switch shall have a spring driven reserve sufficient to operate time switch
controls for at least 16 hours after a power failure. On restoration of power,
switch shall transfer to synchronous motor drive and automatically rewind
reserve.
C. Photocontrol: The photocontrol shall be remotely installed at an outside
location and shall have cadmium sulphide hermetically sealed cell. It shall be
fully temperature compensated and provide a time delay of at least 15 seconds
to prevent false switching.
D. Manual Switches: Manual switches shall be provided to maintain lighting ON
or OFF until returned to AUTO position.
E. Control Circuits: The center shall have two circuits as follows:
1. Circuit A - ON by photocontrol - OFF by time switch
2. Circuit B - ON by photocontrol OFF by photocontrol
F. Manufacturer. Photo/Time control shall be Tork T-920LE or approved
equivalent, in NEMA 1 surface enclosure with externally accessible override
controls, or as noted on the drawings.
2.2 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES (CONTACTORS)
A. Description: The remote control switches shall be of the single coil, electrically
operated, mechanically held type. Positive locking shall be obtained without
the use of hooks, latches, or semi-permanent magnets. The switches shall be
listed under UL 508. They shall be fully rated and marked for use with ballast
lighting, tungsten, and general use loads. Provide the contactor with 120 volt
coil and installed in NEMA 1 enclosure or as indicated on the drawings.
B. Contacts: Totally enclosed double break silver cadmium oxide power contacts.
Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line
or load wiring. Provide the number and arrangement of contacts as shown on
the drawings.
C. Manufacturers: Switches shall be Square D type L or LX (30A Max) or type
S (800A Max).
03860396/98 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 16915- 2
LUBBOCK FIRE DEPARTMENT COMPLEX 900-9330
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 OUTDOOR LIGHTING
A. General: All outdoor lighting indicated to be controlled by
Photocell/Timeswitch shall be set to be turned on at dusk and off at a pre-set
time.
END ,OF SECTION
d
f
r�
k
c
I
03860396/98 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 16915-3